Struct aws_sdk_rds::Client

source · [−]

pub struct Client { /* private fields */ }

Expand description

Client for Amazon Relational Database Service

Client for invoking operations on Amazon Relational Database Service. Each operation on Amazon Relational Database Service is a method on this this struct. .send() MUST be invoked on the generated operations to dispatch the request to the service.

Examples

Constructing a client and invoking an operation

    // create a shared configuration. This can be used & shared between multiple service clients.
    let shared_config = aws_config::load_from_env().await;
    let client = aws_sdk_rds::Client::new(&shared_config);
    // invoke an operation
    /* let rsp = client
        .<operation_name>().
        .<param>("some value")
        .send().await; */

Constructing a client with custom configuration

use aws_config::RetryConfig;
let shared_config = aws_config::load_from_env().await;
let config = aws_sdk_rds::config::Builder::from(&shared_config)
  .retry_config(RetryConfig::disabled())
  .build();
let client = aws_sdk_rds::Client::from_conf(config);

Implementations

source

impl Client

source

pub fn with_config(
client: Client<DynConnector, DynMiddleware<DynConnector>>,
conf: Config
) -> Self

Creates a client with the given service configuration.

source

pub fn conf(&self) -> &Config

Returns the client’s configuration.

source

impl Client

source

pub fn add_role_to_db_cluster(&self) -> AddRoleToDBCluster

Constructs a fluent builder for the AddRoleToDBCluster operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>):
 The name of the DB cluster to associate the IAM role with.
- role_arn(impl Into<String>) / set_role_arn(Option<String>):
 The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role to associate with the Aurora DB cluster, for example arn:aws:iam::123456789012:role/AuroraAccessRole.
- feature_name(impl Into<String>) / set_feature_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the feature for the DB cluster that the IAM role is to be associated with. For information about supported feature names, see DBEngineVersion.
On success, responds with AddRoleToDbClusterOutput
On failure, responds with SdkError<AddRoleToDBClusterError>

source

pub fn add_role_to_db_instance(&self) -> AddRoleToDBInstance

Constructs a fluent builder for the AddRoleToDBInstance operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_instance_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_instance_identifier(Option<String>):
 The name of the DB instance to associate the IAM role with.
- role_arn(impl Into<String>) / set_role_arn(Option<String>):
 The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role to associate with the DB instance, for example arn:aws:iam::123456789012:role/AccessRole.
- feature_name(impl Into<String>) / set_feature_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the feature for the DB instance that the IAM role is to be associated with. For information about supported feature names, see DBEngineVersion.
On success, responds with AddRoleToDbInstanceOutput
On failure, responds with SdkError<AddRoleToDBInstanceError>

source

pub fn add_source_identifier_to_subscription(
&self
) -> AddSourceIdentifierToSubscription

Constructs a fluent builder for the AddSourceIdentifierToSubscription operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- subscription_name(impl Into<String>) / set_subscription_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the RDS event notification subscription you want to add a source identifier to.
- source_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_source_identifier(Option<String>):
 The identifier of the event source to be added.
 
 Constraints:
 - If the source type is a DB instance, a DBInstanceIdentifier value must be supplied.
 - If the source type is a DB cluster, a DBClusterIdentifier value must be supplied.
 - If the source type is a DB parameter group, a DBParameterGroupName value must be supplied.
 - If the source type is a DB security group, a DBSecurityGroupName value must be supplied.
 - If the source type is a DB snapshot, a DBSnapshotIdentifier value must be supplied.
 - If the source type is a DB cluster snapshot, a DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier value must be supplied.
 - If the source type is an RDS Proxy, a DBProxyName value must be supplied.
On success, responds with AddSourceIdentifierToSubscriptionOutput with field(s):
- event_subscription(Option<EventSubscription>):
 Contains the results of a successful invocation of the DescribeEventSubscriptions action.
On failure, responds with SdkError<AddSourceIdentifierToSubscriptionError>

source

pub fn add_tags_to_resource(&self) -> AddTagsToResource

Constructs a fluent builder for the AddTagsToResource operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- resource_name(impl Into<String>) / set_resource_name(Option<String>):
 The Amazon RDS resource that the tags are added to. This value is an Amazon Resource Name (ARN). For information about creating an ARN, see Constructing an RDS Amazon Resource Name (ARN).
- tags(Vec<Tag>) / set_tags(Option<Vec<Tag>>):
 The tags to be assigned to the Amazon RDS resource.
On success, responds with AddTagsToResourceOutput
On failure, responds with SdkError<AddTagsToResourceError>

source

pub fn apply_pending_maintenance_action(&self) -> ApplyPendingMaintenanceAction

Constructs a fluent builder for the ApplyPendingMaintenanceAction operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- resource_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_resource_identifier(Option<String>):
 The RDS Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource that the pending maintenance action applies to. For information about creating an ARN, see Constructing an RDS Amazon Resource Name (ARN).
- apply_action(impl Into<String>) / set_apply_action(Option<String>):
 The pending maintenance action to apply to this resource.
 
 Valid values: system-update, db-upgrade, hardware-maintenance, ca-certificate-rotation
- opt_in_type(impl Into<String>) / set_opt_in_type(Option<String>):
 A value that specifies the type of opt-in request, or undoes an opt-in request. An opt-in request of type immediate can’t be undone.
 
 Valid values:
 - immediate - Apply the maintenance action immediately.
 - next-maintenance - Apply the maintenance action during the next maintenance window for the resource.
 - undo-opt-in - Cancel any existing next-maintenance opt-in requests.
On success, responds with ApplyPendingMaintenanceActionOutput with field(s):
- resource_pending_maintenance_actions(Option<ResourcePendingMaintenanceActions>):
 Describes the pending maintenance actions for a resource.
On failure, responds with SdkError<ApplyPendingMaintenanceActionError>

source

pub fn authorize_db_security_group_ingress(
&self
) -> AuthorizeDBSecurityGroupIngress

Constructs a fluent builder for the AuthorizeDBSecurityGroupIngress operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_security_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_security_group_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the DB security group to add authorization to.
- cidrip(impl Into<String>) / set_cidrip(Option<String>):
 The IP range to authorize.
- ec2_security_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_ec2_security_group_name(Option<String>):
 Name of the EC2 security group to authorize. For VPC DB security groups, EC2SecurityGroupId must be provided. Otherwise, EC2SecurityGroupOwnerId and either EC2SecurityGroupName or EC2SecurityGroupId must be provided.
- ec2_security_group_id(impl Into<String>) / set_ec2_security_group_id(Option<String>):
 Id of the EC2 security group to authorize. For VPC DB security groups, EC2SecurityGroupId must be provided. Otherwise, EC2SecurityGroupOwnerId and either EC2SecurityGroupName or EC2SecurityGroupId must be provided.
- ec2_security_group_owner_id(impl Into<String>) / set_ec2_security_group_owner_id(Option<String>):
 Amazon Web Services account number of the owner of the EC2 security group specified in the EC2SecurityGroupName parameter. The Amazon Web Services access key ID isn’t an acceptable value. For VPC DB security groups, EC2SecurityGroupId must be provided. Otherwise, EC2SecurityGroupOwnerId and either EC2SecurityGroupName or EC2SecurityGroupId must be provided.
On success, responds with AuthorizeDbSecurityGroupIngressOutput with field(s):
- db_security_group(Option<DbSecurityGroup>):
 Contains the details for an Amazon RDS DB security group.
 
 This data type is used as a response element in the DescribeDBSecurityGroups action.
On failure, responds with SdkError<AuthorizeDBSecurityGroupIngressError>

source

pub fn backtrack_db_cluster(&self) -> BacktrackDBCluster

Constructs a fluent builder for the BacktrackDBCluster operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>):
 The DB cluster identifier of the DB cluster to be backtracked. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must contain from 1 to 63 alphanumeric characters or hyphens.
 - First character must be a letter.
 - Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.
 Example: my-cluster1
- backtrack_to(DateTime) / set_backtrack_to(Option<DateTime>):
 The timestamp of the time to backtrack the DB cluster to, specified in ISO 8601 format. For more information about ISO 8601, see the ISO8601 Wikipedia page.
 
 If the specified time isn’t a consistent time for the DB cluster, Aurora automatically chooses the nearest possible consistent time for the DB cluster.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must contain a valid ISO 8601 timestamp.
 - Can’t contain a timestamp set in the future.
 Example: 2017-07-08T18:00Z
- force(bool) / set_force(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether to force the DB cluster to backtrack when binary logging is enabled. Otherwise, an error occurs when binary logging is enabled.
- use_earliest_time_on_point_in_time_unavailable(bool) / set_use_earliest_time_on_point_in_time_unavailable(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether to backtrack the DB cluster to the earliest possible backtrack time when BacktrackTo is set to a timestamp earlier than the earliest backtrack time. When this parameter is disabled and BacktrackTo is set to a timestamp earlier than the earliest backtrack time, an error occurs.
On success, responds with BacktrackDbClusterOutput with field(s):
- db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>):
 Contains a user-supplied DB cluster identifier. This identifier is the unique key that identifies a DB cluster.
- backtrack_identifier(Option<String>):
 Contains the backtrack identifier.
- backtrack_to(Option<DateTime>):
 The timestamp of the time to which the DB cluster was backtracked.
- backtracked_from(Option<DateTime>):
 The timestamp of the time from which the DB cluster was backtracked.
- backtrack_request_creation_time(Option<DateTime>):
 The timestamp of the time at which the backtrack was requested.
- status(Option<String>):
 The status of the backtrack. This property returns one of the following values:
 - applying - The backtrack is currently being applied to or rolled back from the DB cluster.
 - completed - The backtrack has successfully been applied to or rolled back from the DB cluster.
 - failed - An error occurred while the backtrack was applied to or rolled back from the DB cluster.
 - pending - The backtrack is currently pending application to or rollback from the DB cluster.
On failure, responds with SdkError<BacktrackDBClusterError>

source

pub fn cancel_export_task(&self) -> CancelExportTask

Constructs a fluent builder for the CancelExportTask operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- export_task_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_export_task_identifier(Option<String>):
 The identifier of the snapshot export task to cancel.
On success, responds with CancelExportTaskOutput with field(s):
- export_task_identifier(Option<String>):
 A unique identifier for the snapshot export task. This ID isn’t an identifier for the Amazon S3 bucket where the snapshot is exported to.
- source_arn(Option<String>):
 The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the snapshot exported to Amazon S3.
- export_only(Option<Vec<String>>):
 The data exported from the snapshot. Valid values are the following:
 - database - Export all the data from a specified database.
 - database.table table-name - Export a table of the snapshot. This format is valid only for RDS for MySQL, RDS for MariaDB, and Aurora MySQL.
 - database.schema schema-name - Export a database schema of the snapshot. This format is valid only for RDS for PostgreSQL and Aurora PostgreSQL.
 - database.schema.table table-name - Export a table of the database schema. This format is valid only for RDS for PostgreSQL and Aurora PostgreSQL.
- snapshot_time(Option<DateTime>):
 The time that the snapshot was created.
- task_start_time(Option<DateTime>):
 The time that the snapshot export task started.
- task_end_time(Option<DateTime>):
 The time that the snapshot export task completed.
- s3_bucket(Option<String>):
 The Amazon S3 bucket that the snapshot is exported to.
- s3_prefix(Option<String>):
 The Amazon S3 bucket prefix that is the file name and path of the exported snapshot.
- iam_role_arn(Option<String>):
 The name of the IAM role that is used to write to Amazon S3 when exporting a snapshot.
- kms_key_id(Option<String>):
 The key identifier of the Amazon Web Services KMS key that is used to encrypt the snapshot when it’s exported to Amazon S3. The KMS key identifier is its key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name. The IAM role used for the snapshot export must have encryption and decryption permissions to use this KMS key.
- status(Option<String>):
 The progress status of the export task.
- percent_progress(i32):
 The progress of the snapshot export task as a percentage.
- total_extracted_data_in_gb(i32):
 The total amount of data exported, in gigabytes.
- failure_cause(Option<String>):
 The reason the export failed, if it failed.
- warning_message(Option<String>):
 A warning about the snapshot export task.
On failure, responds with SdkError<CancelExportTaskError>

source

pub fn copy_db_cluster_parameter_group(&self) -> CopyDBClusterParameterGroup

Constructs a fluent builder for the CopyDBClusterParameterGroup operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- source_db_cluster_parameter_group_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_source_db_cluster_parameter_group_identifier(Option<String>):
 The identifier or Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the source DB cluster parameter group. For information about creating an ARN, see Constructing an ARN for Amazon RDS in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must specify a valid DB cluster parameter group.
- target_db_cluster_parameter_group_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_target_db_cluster_parameter_group_identifier(Option<String>):
 The identifier for the copied DB cluster parameter group.
 
 Constraints:
 - Can’t be null, empty, or blank
 - Must contain from 1 to 255 letters, numbers, or hyphens
 - First character must be a letter
 - Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens
 Example: my-cluster-param-group1
- target_db_cluster_parameter_group_description(impl Into<String>) / set_target_db_cluster_parameter_group_description(Option<String>):
 A description for the copied DB cluster parameter group.
- tags(Vec<Tag>) / set_tags(Option<Vec<Tag>>):
 A list of tags. For more information, see Tagging Amazon RDS Resources in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
On success, responds with CopyDbClusterParameterGroupOutput with field(s):
- db_cluster_parameter_group(Option<DbClusterParameterGroup>):
 Contains the details of an Amazon RDS DB cluster parameter group.
 
 This data type is used as a response element in the DescribeDBClusterParameterGroups action.
On failure, responds with SdkError<CopyDBClusterParameterGroupError>

source

pub fn copy_db_cluster_snapshot(&self) -> CopyDBClusterSnapshot

Constructs a fluent builder for the CopyDBClusterSnapshot operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- source_db_cluster_snapshot_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_source_db_cluster_snapshot_identifier(Option<String>):
 The identifier of the DB cluster snapshot to copy. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.
 
 You can’t copy an encrypted, shared DB cluster snapshot from one Amazon Web Services Region to another.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must specify a valid system snapshot in the “available” state.
 - If the source snapshot is in the same Amazon Web Services Region as the copy, specify a valid DB snapshot identifier.
 - If the source snapshot is in a different Amazon Web Services Region than the copy, specify a valid DB cluster snapshot ARN. For more information, go to Copying Snapshots Across Amazon Web Services Regions in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
 Example: my-cluster-snapshot1
- target_db_cluster_snapshot_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_target_db_cluster_snapshot_identifier(Option<String>):
 The identifier of the new DB cluster snapshot to create from the source DB cluster snapshot. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must contain from 1 to 63 letters, numbers, or hyphens.
 - First character must be a letter.
 - Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.
 Example: my-cluster-snapshot2
- kms_key_id(impl Into<String>) / set_kms_key_id(Option<String>):
 The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for an encrypted DB cluster snapshot. The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the Amazon Web Services KMS key.
 
 If you copy an encrypted DB cluster snapshot from your Amazon Web Services account, you can specify a value for KmsKeyId to encrypt the copy with a new KMS key. If you don’t specify a value for KmsKeyId, then the copy of the DB cluster snapshot is encrypted with the same KMS key as the source DB cluster snapshot.
 
 If you copy an encrypted DB cluster snapshot that is shared from another Amazon Web Services account, then you must specify a value for KmsKeyId.
 
 To copy an encrypted DB cluster snapshot to another Amazon Web Services Region, you must set KmsKeyId to the Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier you want to use to encrypt the copy of the DB cluster snapshot in the destination Amazon Web Services Region. KMS keys are specific to the Amazon Web Services Region that they are created in, and you can’t use KMS keys from one Amazon Web Services Region in another Amazon Web Services Region.
 
 If you copy an unencrypted DB cluster snapshot and specify a value for the KmsKeyId parameter, an error is returned.
- pre_signed_url(impl Into<String>) / set_pre_signed_url(Option<String>):
 When you are copying a DB cluster snapshot from one Amazon Web Services GovCloud (US) Region to another, the URL that contains a Signature Version 4 signed request for the CopyDBClusterSnapshot API operation in the Amazon Web Services Region that contains the source DB cluster snapshot to copy. Use the PreSignedUrl parameter when copying an encrypted DB cluster snapshot from another Amazon Web Services Region. Don’t specify PreSignedUrl when copying an encrypted DB cluster snapshot in the same Amazon Web Services Region.
 
 This setting applies only to Amazon Web Services GovCloud (US) Regions. It’s ignored in other Amazon Web Services Regions.
 
 The presigned URL must be a valid request for the CopyDBClusterSnapshot API operation that can run in the source Amazon Web Services Region that contains the encrypted DB cluster snapshot to copy. The presigned URL request must contain the following parameter values:
 - KmsKeyId - The KMS key identifier for the KMS key to use to encrypt the copy of the DB cluster snapshot in the destination Amazon Web Services Region. This is the same identifier for both the CopyDBClusterSnapshot operation that is called in the destination Amazon Web Services Region, and the operation contained in the presigned URL.
 - DestinationRegion - The name of the Amazon Web Services Region that the DB cluster snapshot is to be created in.
 - SourceDBClusterSnapshotIdentifier - The DB cluster snapshot identifier for the encrypted DB cluster snapshot to be copied. This identifier must be in the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) format for the source Amazon Web Services Region. For example, if you are copying an encrypted DB cluster snapshot from the us-west-2 Amazon Web Services Region, then your SourceDBClusterSnapshotIdentifier looks like the following example: arn:aws:rds:us-west-2:123456789012:cluster-snapshot:aurora-cluster1-snapshot-20161115.
 To learn how to generate a Signature Version 4 signed request, see Authenticating Requests: Using Query Parameters (Amazon Web Services Signature Version 4) and Signature Version 4 Signing Process.
 
 If you are using an Amazon Web Services SDK tool or the CLI, you can specify SourceRegion (or –source-region for the CLI) instead of specifying PreSignedUrl manually. Specifying SourceRegion autogenerates a presigned URL that is a valid request for the operation that can run in the source Amazon Web Services Region.
- copy_tags(bool) / set_copy_tags(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether to copy all tags from the source DB cluster snapshot to the target DB cluster snapshot. By default, tags are not copied.
- tags(Vec<Tag>) / set_tags(Option<Vec<Tag>>):
 A list of tags. For more information, see Tagging Amazon RDS Resources in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
On success, responds with CopyDbClusterSnapshotOutput with field(s):
- db_cluster_snapshot(Option<DbClusterSnapshot>):
 Contains the details for an Amazon RDS DB cluster snapshot
 
 This data type is used as a response element in the DescribeDBClusterSnapshots action.
On failure, responds with SdkError<CopyDBClusterSnapshotError>

source

pub fn copy_db_parameter_group(&self) -> CopyDBParameterGroup

Constructs a fluent builder for the CopyDBParameterGroup operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- source_db_parameter_group_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_source_db_parameter_group_identifier(Option<String>):
 The identifier or ARN for the source DB parameter group. For information about creating an ARN, see Constructing an ARN for Amazon RDS in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must specify a valid DB parameter group.
- target_db_parameter_group_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_target_db_parameter_group_identifier(Option<String>):
 The identifier for the copied DB parameter group.
 
 Constraints:
 - Can’t be null, empty, or blank
 - Must contain from 1 to 255 letters, numbers, or hyphens
 - First character must be a letter
 - Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens
 Example: my-db-parameter-group
- target_db_parameter_group_description(impl Into<String>) / set_target_db_parameter_group_description(Option<String>):
 A description for the copied DB parameter group.
- tags(Vec<Tag>) / set_tags(Option<Vec<Tag>>):
 A list of tags. For more information, see Tagging Amazon RDS Resources in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
On success, responds with CopyDbParameterGroupOutput with field(s):
- db_parameter_group(Option<DbParameterGroup>):
 Contains the details of an Amazon RDS DB parameter group.
 
 This data type is used as a response element in the DescribeDBParameterGroups action.
On failure, responds with SdkError<CopyDBParameterGroupError>

source

pub fn copy_db_snapshot(&self) -> CopyDBSnapshot

Constructs a fluent builder for the CopyDBSnapshot operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- source_db_snapshot_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_source_db_snapshot_identifier(Option<String>):
 The identifier for the source DB snapshot.
 
 If the source snapshot is in the same Amazon Web Services Region as the copy, specify a valid DB snapshot identifier. For example, you might specify rds:mysql-instance1-snapshot-20130805.
 
 If the source snapshot is in a different Amazon Web Services Region than the copy, specify a valid DB snapshot ARN. For example, you might specify arn:aws:rds:us-west-2:123456789012:snapshot:mysql-instance1-snapshot-20130805.
 
 If you are copying from a shared manual DB snapshot, this parameter must be the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the shared DB snapshot.
 
 If you are copying an encrypted snapshot this parameter must be in the ARN format for the source Amazon Web Services Region.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must specify a valid system snapshot in the “available” state.
 Example: rds:mydb-2012-04-02-00-01
 
 Example: arn:aws:rds:us-west-2:123456789012:snapshot:mysql-instance1-snapshot-20130805
- target_db_snapshot_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_target_db_snapshot_identifier(Option<String>):
 The identifier for the copy of the snapshot.
 
 Constraints:
 - Can’t be null, empty, or blank
 - Must contain from 1 to 255 letters, numbers, or hyphens
 - First character must be a letter
 - Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens
 Example: my-db-snapshot
- kms_key_id(impl Into<String>) / set_kms_key_id(Option<String>):
 The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for an encrypted DB snapshot. The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key.
 
 If you copy an encrypted DB snapshot from your Amazon Web Services account, you can specify a value for this parameter to encrypt the copy with a new KMS key. If you don’t specify a value for this parameter, then the copy of the DB snapshot is encrypted with the same Amazon Web Services KMS key as the source DB snapshot.
 
 If you copy an encrypted DB snapshot that is shared from another Amazon Web Services account, then you must specify a value for this parameter.
 
 If you specify this parameter when you copy an unencrypted snapshot, the copy is encrypted.
 
 If you copy an encrypted snapshot to a different Amazon Web Services Region, then you must specify an Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for the destination Amazon Web Services Region. KMS keys are specific to the Amazon Web Services Region that they are created in, and you can’t use KMS keys from one Amazon Web Services Region in another Amazon Web Services Region.
- tags(Vec<Tag>) / set_tags(Option<Vec<Tag>>):
 A list of tags. For more information, see Tagging Amazon RDS Resources in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
- copy_tags(bool) / set_copy_tags(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether to copy all tags from the source DB snapshot to the target DB snapshot. By default, tags are not copied.
- pre_signed_url(impl Into<String>) / set_pre_signed_url(Option<String>):
 When you are copying a snapshot from one Amazon Web Services GovCloud (US) Region to another, the URL that contains a Signature Version 4 signed request for the CopyDBSnapshot API operation in the source Amazon Web Services Region that contains the source DB snapshot to copy.
 
 This setting applies only to Amazon Web Services GovCloud (US) Regions. It’s ignored in other Amazon Web Services Regions.
 
 You must specify this parameter when you copy an encrypted DB snapshot from another Amazon Web Services Region by using the Amazon RDS API. Don’t specify PreSignedUrl when you are copying an encrypted DB snapshot in the same Amazon Web Services Region.
 
 The presigned URL must be a valid request for the CopyDBClusterSnapshot API operation that can run in the source Amazon Web Services Region that contains the encrypted DB cluster snapshot to copy. The presigned URL request must contain the following parameter values:
 - DestinationRegion - The Amazon Web Services Region that the encrypted DB snapshot is copied to. This Amazon Web Services Region is the same one where the CopyDBSnapshot operation is called that contains this presigned URL.
 
 For example, if you copy an encrypted DB snapshot from the us-west-2 Amazon Web Services Region to the us-east-1 Amazon Web Services Region, then you call the CopyDBSnapshot operation in the us-east-1 Amazon Web Services Region and provide a presigned URL that contains a call to the CopyDBSnapshot operation in the us-west-2 Amazon Web Services Region. For this example, the DestinationRegion in the presigned URL must be set to the us-east-1 Amazon Web Services Region.
 - KmsKeyId - The KMS key identifier for the KMS key to use to encrypt the copy of the DB snapshot in the destination Amazon Web Services Region. This is the same identifier for both the CopyDBSnapshot operation that is called in the destination Amazon Web Services Region, and the operation contained in the presigned URL.
 - SourceDBSnapshotIdentifier - The DB snapshot identifier for the encrypted snapshot to be copied. This identifier must be in the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) format for the source Amazon Web Services Region. For example, if you are copying an encrypted DB snapshot from the us-west-2 Amazon Web Services Region, then your SourceDBSnapshotIdentifier looks like the following example: arn:aws:rds:us-west-2:123456789012:snapshot:mysql-instance1-snapshot-20161115.
 To learn how to generate a Signature Version 4 signed request, see Authenticating Requests: Using Query Parameters (Amazon Web Services Signature Version 4) and Signature Version 4 Signing Process.
 
 If you are using an Amazon Web Services SDK tool or the CLI, you can specify SourceRegion (or –source-region for the CLI) instead of specifying PreSignedUrl manually. Specifying SourceRegion autogenerates a presigned URL that is a valid request for the operation that can run in the source Amazon Web Services Region.
- option_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_option_group_name(Option<String>):
 The name of an option group to associate with the copy of the snapshot.
 
 Specify this option if you are copying a snapshot from one Amazon Web Services Region to another, and your DB instance uses a nondefault option group. If your source DB instance uses Transparent Data Encryption for Oracle or Microsoft SQL Server, you must specify this option when copying across Amazon Web Services Regions. For more information, see Option group considerations in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
- target_custom_availability_zone(impl Into<String>) / set_target_custom_availability_zone(Option<String>):
 The external custom Availability Zone (CAZ) identifier for the target CAZ.
 
 Example: rds-caz-aiqhTgQv.
On success, responds with CopyDbSnapshotOutput with field(s):
- db_snapshot(Option<DbSnapshot>):
 Contains the details of an Amazon RDS DB snapshot.
 
 This data type is used as a response element in the DescribeDBSnapshots action.
On failure, responds with SdkError<CopyDBSnapshotError>

source

pub fn copy_option_group(&self) -> CopyOptionGroup

Constructs a fluent builder for the CopyOptionGroup operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- source_option_group_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_source_option_group_identifier(Option<String>):
 The identifier for the source option group.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must specify a valid option group.
- target_option_group_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_target_option_group_identifier(Option<String>):
 The identifier for the copied option group.
 
 Constraints:
 - Can’t be null, empty, or blank
 - Must contain from 1 to 255 letters, numbers, or hyphens
 - First character must be a letter
 - Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens
 Example: my-option-group
- target_option_group_description(impl Into<String>) / set_target_option_group_description(Option<String>):
 The description for the copied option group.
- tags(Vec<Tag>) / set_tags(Option<Vec<Tag>>):
 A list of tags. For more information, see Tagging Amazon RDS Resources in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
On success, responds with CopyOptionGroupOutput with field(s):
- option_group(Option<OptionGroup>):
On failure, responds with SdkError<CopyOptionGroupError>

source

pub fn create_custom_db_engine_version(&self) -> CreateCustomDBEngineVersion

Constructs a fluent builder for the CreateCustomDBEngineVersion operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- engine(impl Into<String>) / set_engine(Option<String>):
 The database engine to use for your custom engine version (CEV). The only supported value is custom-oracle-ee.
- engine_version(impl Into<String>) / set_engine_version(Option<String>):
 The name of your CEV. The name format is 19.customized_string . For example, a valid name is 19.my_cev1. This setting is required for RDS Custom for Oracle, but optional for Amazon RDS. The combination of Engine and EngineVersion is unique per customer per Region.
- database_installation_files_s3_bucket_name(impl Into<String>) / set_database_installation_files_s3_bucket_name(Option<String>):
 The name of an Amazon S3 bucket that contains database installation files for your CEV. For example, a valid bucket name is my-custom-installation-files.
- database_installation_files_s3_prefix(impl Into<String>) / set_database_installation_files_s3_prefix(Option<String>):
 The Amazon S3 directory that contains the database installation files for your CEV. For example, a valid bucket name is 123456789012/cev1. If this setting isn’t specified, no prefix is assumed.
- kms_key_id(impl Into<String>) / set_kms_key_id(Option<String>):
 The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for an encrypted CEV. A symmetric KMS key is required for RDS Custom, but optional for Amazon RDS.
 
 If you have an existing symmetric KMS key in your account, you can use it with RDS Custom. No further action is necessary. If you don’t already have a symmetric KMS key in your account, follow the instructions in Creating symmetric KMS keys in the Amazon Web Services Key Management Service Developer Guide.
 
 You can choose the same symmetric key when you create a CEV and a DB instance, or choose different keys.
- description(impl Into<String>) / set_description(Option<String>):
 An optional description of your CEV.
- manifest(impl Into<String>) / set_manifest(Option<String>):
 The CEV manifest, which is a JSON document that describes the installation .zip files stored in Amazon S3. Specify the name/value pairs in a file or a quoted string. RDS Custom applies the patches in the order in which they are listed.
 
 The following JSON fields are valid:
 
 MediaImportTemplateVersion
 
 Version of the CEV manifest. The date is in the format YYYY-MM-DD.
 
 databaseInstallationFileNames
 
 Ordered list of installation files for the CEV.
 
 opatchFileNames
 
 Ordered list of OPatch installers used for the Oracle DB engine.
 
 psuRuPatchFileNames
 
 The PSU and RU patches for this CEV.
 
 OtherPatchFileNames
 
 The patches that are not in the list of PSU and RU patches. Amazon RDS applies these patches after applying the PSU and RU patches.
 
 For more information, see Creating the CEV manifest in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
- tags(Vec<Tag>) / set_tags(Option<Vec<Tag>>):
 A list of tags. For more information, see Tagging Amazon RDS Resources in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
On success, responds with CreateCustomDbEngineVersionOutput with field(s):
- engine(Option<String>):
 The name of the database engine.
- engine_version(Option<String>):
 The version number of the database engine.
- db_parameter_group_family(Option<String>):
 The name of the DB parameter group family for the database engine.
- db_engine_description(Option<String>):
 The description of the database engine.
- db_engine_version_description(Option<String>):
 The description of the database engine version.
- default_character_set(Option<CharacterSet>):
 The default character set for new instances of this engine version, if the CharacterSetName parameter of the CreateDBInstance API isn’t specified.
- supported_character_sets(Option<Vec<CharacterSet>>):
 A list of the character sets supported by this engine for the CharacterSetName parameter of the CreateDBInstance operation.
- supported_nchar_character_sets(Option<Vec<CharacterSet>>):
 A list of the character sets supported by the Oracle DB engine for the NcharCharacterSetName parameter of the CreateDBInstance operation.
- valid_upgrade_target(Option<Vec<UpgradeTarget>>):
 A list of engine versions that this database engine version can be upgraded to.
- supported_timezones(Option<Vec<Timezone>>):
 A list of the time zones supported by this engine for the Timezone parameter of the CreateDBInstance action.
- exportable_log_types(Option<Vec<String>>):
 The types of logs that the database engine has available for export to CloudWatch Logs.
- supports_log_exports_to_cloudwatch_logs(bool):
 A value that indicates whether the engine version supports exporting the log types specified by ExportableLogTypes to CloudWatch Logs.
- supports_read_replica(bool):
 Indicates whether the database engine version supports read replicas.
- supported_engine_modes(Option<Vec<String>>):
 A list of the supported DB engine modes.
- supported_feature_names(Option<Vec<String>>):
 A list of features supported by the DB engine.
 
 The supported features vary by DB engine and DB engine version.
 
 To determine the supported features for a specific DB engine and DB engine version using the CLI, use the following command:
 
 aws rds describe-db-engine-versions –engine <engine_name> –engine-version <engine_version></engine_version> </engine_name>
 
 For example, to determine the supported features for RDS for PostgreSQL version 13.3 using the CLI, use the following command:
 
 aws rds describe-db-engine-versions –engine postgres –engine-version 13.3
 
 The supported features are listed under SupportedFeatureNames in the output.
- status(Option<String>):
 The status of the DB engine version, either available or deprecated.
- supports_parallel_query(bool):
 A value that indicates whether you can use Aurora parallel query with a specific DB engine version.
- supports_global_databases(bool):
 A value that indicates whether you can use Aurora global databases with a specific DB engine version.
- major_engine_version(Option<String>):
 The major engine version of the CEV.
- database_installation_files_s3_bucket_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the Amazon S3 bucket that contains your database installation files.
- database_installation_files_s3_prefix(Option<String>):
 The Amazon S3 directory that contains the database installation files. If not specified, then no prefix is assumed.
- db_engine_version_arn(Option<String>):
 The ARN of the custom engine version.
- kms_key_id(Option<String>):
 The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for an encrypted CEV. This parameter is required for RDS Custom, but optional for Amazon RDS.
- create_time(Option<DateTime>):
 The creation time of the DB engine version.
- tag_list(Option<Vec<Tag>>):
 A list of tags. For more information, see Tagging Amazon RDS Resources in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
- supports_babelfish(bool):
 A value that indicates whether the engine version supports Babelfish for Aurora PostgreSQL.
On failure, responds with SdkError<CreateCustomDBEngineVersionError>

source

pub fn create_db_cluster(&self) -> CreateDBCluster

Constructs a fluent builder for the CreateDBCluster operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- availability_zones(Vec<String>) / set_availability_zones(Option<Vec<String>>):
 A list of Availability Zones (AZs) where DB instances in the DB cluster can be created.
 
 For information on Amazon Web Services Regions and Availability Zones, see Choosing the Regions and Availability Zones in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only
- backup_retention_period(i32) / set_backup_retention_period(Option<i32>):
 The number of days for which automated backups are retained.
 
 Default: 1
 
 Constraints:
 - Must be a value from 1 to 35
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- character_set_name(impl Into<String>) / set_character_set_name(Option<String>):
 A value that indicates that the DB cluster should be associated with the specified CharacterSet.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only
- database_name(impl Into<String>) / set_database_name(Option<String>):
 The name for your database of up to 64 alphanumeric characters. If you do not provide a name, Amazon RDS doesn’t create a database in the DB cluster you are creating.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- db_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>):
 The DB cluster identifier. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must contain from 1 to 63 letters, numbers, or hyphens.
 - First character must be a letter.
 - Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.
 Example: my-cluster1
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- db_cluster_parameter_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_cluster_parameter_group_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the DB cluster parameter group to associate with this DB cluster. If you do not specify a value, then the default DB cluster parameter group for the specified DB engine and version is used.
 
 Constraints:
 - If supplied, must match the name of an existing DB cluster parameter group.
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- vpc_security_group_ids(Vec<String>) / set_vpc_security_group_ids(Option<Vec<String>>):
 A list of EC2 VPC security groups to associate with this DB cluster.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- db_subnet_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_subnet_group_name(Option<String>):
 A DB subnet group to associate with this DB cluster.
 
 This setting is required to create a Multi-AZ DB cluster.
 
 Constraints: Must match the name of an existing DBSubnetGroup. Must not be default.
 
 Example: mydbsubnetgroup
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- engine(impl Into<String>) / set_engine(Option<String>):
 The name of the database engine to be used for this DB cluster.
 
 Valid Values:
 - aurora (for MySQL 5.6-compatible Aurora)
 - aurora-mysql (for MySQL 5.7-compatible and MySQL 8.0-compatible Aurora)
 - aurora-postgresql
 - mysql
 - postgres
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- engine_version(impl Into<String>) / set_engine_version(Option<String>):
 The version number of the database engine to use.
 
 To list all of the available engine versions for MySQL 5.6-compatible Aurora, use the following command:
 
 aws rds describe-db-engine-versions –engine aurora –query “DBEngineVersions[].EngineVersion”
 
 To list all of the available engine versions for MySQL 5.7-compatible and MySQL 8.0-compatible Aurora, use the following command:
 
 aws rds describe-db-engine-versions –engine aurora-mysql –query “DBEngineVersions[].EngineVersion”
 
 To list all of the available engine versions for Aurora PostgreSQL, use the following command:
 
 aws rds describe-db-engine-versions –engine aurora-postgresql –query “DBEngineVersions[].EngineVersion”
 
 To list all of the available engine versions for RDS for MySQL, use the following command:
 
 aws rds describe-db-engine-versions –engine mysql –query “DBEngineVersions[].EngineVersion”
 
 To list all of the available engine versions for RDS for PostgreSQL, use the following command:
 
 aws rds describe-db-engine-versions –engine postgres –query “DBEngineVersions[].EngineVersion”
 
 Aurora MySQL
 
 For information, see MySQL on Amazon RDS Versions in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
 
 Aurora PostgreSQL
 
 For information, see Amazon Aurora PostgreSQL releases and engine versions in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
 
 MySQL
 
 For information, see MySQL on Amazon RDS Versions in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 PostgreSQL
 
 For information, see Amazon RDS for PostgreSQL versions and extensions in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- port(i32) / set_port(Option<i32>):
 The port number on which the instances in the DB cluster accept connections.
 
 RDS for MySQL and Aurora MySQL
 
 Default: 3306
 
 Valid values: 1150-65535
 
 RDS for PostgreSQL and Aurora PostgreSQL
 
 Default: 5432
 
 Valid values: 1150-65535
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- master_username(impl Into<String>) / set_master_username(Option<String>):
 The name of the master user for the DB cluster.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must be 1 to 16 letters or numbers.
 - First character must be a letter.
 - Can’t be a reserved word for the chosen database engine.
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- master_user_password(impl Into<String>) / set_master_user_password(Option<String>):
 The password for the master database user. This password can contain any printable ASCII character except “/”, “”“, or “@”.
 
 Constraints: Must contain from 8 to 41 characters.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- option_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_option_group_name(Option<String>):
 A value that indicates that the DB cluster should be associated with the specified option group.
 
 DB clusters are associated with a default option group that can’t be modified.
- preferred_backup_window(impl Into<String>) / set_preferred_backup_window(Option<String>):
 The daily time range during which automated backups are created if automated backups are enabled using the BackupRetentionPeriod parameter.
 
 The default is a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Web Services Region. To view the time blocks available, see Backup window in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must be in the format hh24:mi-hh24:mi.
 - Must be in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).
 - Must not conflict with the preferred maintenance window.
 - Must be at least 30 minutes.
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- preferred_maintenance_window(impl Into<String>) / set_preferred_maintenance_window(Option<String>):
 The weekly time range during which system maintenance can occur, in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).
 
 Format: ddd:hh24:mi-ddd:hh24:mi
 
 The default is a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Web Services Region, occurring on a random day of the week. To see the time blocks available, see Adjusting the Preferred DB Cluster Maintenance Window in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
 
 Valid Days: Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, Sun.
 
 Constraints: Minimum 30-minute window.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- replication_source_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_replication_source_identifier(Option<String>):
 The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the source DB instance or DB cluster if this DB cluster is created as a read replica.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only
- tags(Vec<Tag>) / set_tags(Option<Vec<Tag>>):
 Tags to assign to the DB cluster.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- storage_encrypted(bool) / set_storage_encrypted(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether the DB cluster is encrypted.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- kms_key_id(impl Into<String>) / set_kms_key_id(Option<String>):
 The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for an encrypted DB cluster.
 
 The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. To use a KMS key in a different Amazon Web Services account, specify the key ARN or alias ARN.
 
 When a KMS key isn’t specified in KmsKeyId:
 - If ReplicationSourceIdentifier identifies an encrypted source, then Amazon RDS will use the KMS key used to encrypt the source. Otherwise, Amazon RDS will use your default KMS key.
 - If the StorageEncrypted parameter is enabled and ReplicationSourceIdentifier isn’t specified, then Amazon RDS will use your default KMS key.
 There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region.
 
 If you create a read replica of an encrypted DB cluster in another Amazon Web Services Region, you must set KmsKeyId to a KMS key identifier that is valid in the destination Amazon Web Services Region. This KMS key is used to encrypt the read replica in that Amazon Web Services Region.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- pre_signed_url(impl Into<String>) / set_pre_signed_url(Option<String>):
 When you are replicating a DB cluster from one Amazon Web Services GovCloud (US) Region to another, an URL that contains a Signature Version 4 signed request for the CreateDBCluster operation to be called in the source Amazon Web Services Region where the DB cluster is replicated from. Specify PreSignedUrl only when you are performing cross-Region replication from an encrypted DB cluster.
 
 The presigned URL must be a valid request for the CreateDBCluster API operation that can run in the source Amazon Web Services Region that contains the encrypted DB cluster to copy.
 
 The presigned URL request must contain the following parameter values:
 - KmsKeyId - The KMS key identifier for the KMS key to use to encrypt the copy of the DB cluster in the destination Amazon Web Services Region. This should refer to the same KMS key for both the CreateDBCluster operation that is called in the destination Amazon Web Services Region, and the operation contained in the presigned URL.
 - DestinationRegion - The name of the Amazon Web Services Region that Aurora read replica will be created in.
 - ReplicationSourceIdentifier - The DB cluster identifier for the encrypted DB cluster to be copied. This identifier must be in the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) format for the source Amazon Web Services Region. For example, if you are copying an encrypted DB cluster from the us-west-2 Amazon Web Services Region, then your ReplicationSourceIdentifier would look like Example: arn:aws:rds:us-west-2:123456789012:cluster:aurora-cluster1.
 To learn how to generate a Signature Version 4 signed request, see Authenticating Requests: Using Query Parameters (Amazon Web Services Signature Version 4) and Signature Version 4 Signing Process.
 
 If you are using an Amazon Web Services SDK tool or the CLI, you can specify SourceRegion (or –source-region for the CLI) instead of specifying PreSignedUrl manually. Specifying SourceRegion autogenerates a presigned URL that is a valid request for the operation that can run in the source Amazon Web Services Region.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only
- enable_iam_database_authentication(bool) / set_enable_iam_database_authentication(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether to enable mapping of Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) accounts to database accounts. By default, mapping isn’t enabled.
 
 For more information, see IAM Database Authentication in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only
- backtrack_window(i64) / set_backtrack_window(Option<i64>):
 The target backtrack window, in seconds. To disable backtracking, set this value to 0.
 
 Default: 0
 
 Constraints:
 - If specified, this value must be set to a number from 0 to 259,200 (72 hours).
 Valid for: Aurora MySQL DB clusters only
- enable_cloudwatch_logs_exports(Vec<String>) / set_enable_cloudwatch_logs_exports(Option<Vec<String>>):
 The list of log types that need to be enabled for exporting to CloudWatch Logs. The values in the list depend on the DB engine being used.
 
 RDS for MySQL
 
 Possible values are error, general, and slowquery.
 
 RDS for PostgreSQL
 
 Possible values are postgresql and upgrade.
 
 Aurora MySQL
 
 Possible values are audit, error, general, and slowquery.
 
 Aurora PostgreSQL
 
 Possible value is postgresql.
 
 For more information about exporting CloudWatch Logs for Amazon RDS, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 For more information about exporting CloudWatch Logs for Amazon Aurora, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- engine_mode(impl Into<String>) / set_engine_mode(Option<String>):
 The DB engine mode of the DB cluster, either provisioned, serverless, parallelquery, global, or multimaster.
 
 The parallelquery engine mode isn’t required for Aurora MySQL version 1.23 and higher 1.x versions, and version 2.09 and higher 2.x versions.
 
 The global engine mode isn’t required for Aurora MySQL version 1.22 and higher 1.x versions, and global engine mode isn’t required for any 2.x versions.
 
 The multimaster engine mode only applies for DB clusters created with Aurora MySQL version 5.6.10a.
 
 The serverless engine mode only applies for Aurora Serverless v1 DB clusters.
 
 For Aurora PostgreSQL, the global engine mode isn’t required, and both the parallelquery and the multimaster engine modes currently aren’t supported.
 
 Limitations and requirements apply to some DB engine modes. For more information, see the following sections in the Amazon Aurora User Guide:
 - Limitations of Aurora Serverless v1
 - Requirements for Aurora Serverless v2
 - Limitations of Parallel Query
 - Limitations of Aurora Global Databases
 - Limitations of Multi-Master Clusters
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only
- scaling_configuration(ScalingConfiguration) / set_scaling_configuration(Option<ScalingConfiguration>):
 For DB clusters in serverless DB engine mode, the scaling properties of the DB cluster.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only
- deletion_protection(bool) / set_deletion_protection(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether the DB cluster has deletion protection enabled. The database can’t be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. By default, deletion protection isn’t enabled.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- global_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_global_cluster_identifier(Option<String>):
 The global cluster ID of an Aurora cluster that becomes the primary cluster in the new global database cluster.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only
- enable_http_endpoint(bool) / set_enable_http_endpoint(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether to enable the HTTP endpoint for an Aurora Serverless v1 DB cluster. By default, the HTTP endpoint is disabled.
 
 When enabled, the HTTP endpoint provides a connectionless web service API for running SQL queries on the Aurora Serverless v1 DB cluster. You can also query your database from inside the RDS console with the query editor.
 
 For more information, see Using the Data API for Aurora Serverless v1 in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only
- copy_tags_to_snapshot(bool) / set_copy_tags_to_snapshot(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether to copy all tags from the DB cluster to snapshots of the DB cluster. The default is not to copy them.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- domain(impl Into<String>) / set_domain(Option<String>):
 The Active Directory directory ID to create the DB cluster in.
 
 For Amazon Aurora DB clusters, Amazon RDS can use Kerberos authentication to authenticate users that connect to the DB cluster.
 
 For more information, see Kerberos authentication in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only
- domain_iam_role_name(impl Into<String>) / set_domain_iam_role_name(Option<String>):
 Specify the name of the IAM role to be used when making API calls to the Directory Service.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only
- enable_global_write_forwarding(bool) / set_enable_global_write_forwarding(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether to enable this DB cluster to forward write operations to the primary cluster of an Aurora global database (GlobalCluster). By default, write operations are not allowed on Aurora DB clusters that are secondary clusters in an Aurora global database.
 
 You can set this value only on Aurora DB clusters that are members of an Aurora global database. With this parameter enabled, a secondary cluster can forward writes to the current primary cluster and the resulting changes are replicated back to this cluster. For the primary DB cluster of an Aurora global database, this value is used immediately if the primary is demoted by the FailoverGlobalCluster API operation, but it does nothing until then.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only
- db_cluster_instance_class(impl Into<String>) / set_db_cluster_instance_class(Option<String>):
 The compute and memory capacity of each DB instance in the Multi-AZ DB cluster, for example db.m6g.xlarge. Not all DB instance classes are available in all Amazon Web Services Regions, or for all database engines.
 
 For the full list of DB instance classes and availability for your engine, see DB instance class in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 This setting is required to create a Multi-AZ DB cluster.
 
 Valid for: Multi-AZ DB clusters only
- allocated_storage(i32) / set_allocated_storage(Option<i32>):
 The amount of storage in gibibytes (GiB) to allocate to each DB instance in the Multi-AZ DB cluster.
 
 This setting is required to create a Multi-AZ DB cluster.
 
 Valid for: Multi-AZ DB clusters only
- storage_type(impl Into<String>) / set_storage_type(Option<String>):
 Specifies the storage type to be associated with the DB cluster.
 
 This setting is required to create a Multi-AZ DB cluster.
 
 Valid values: io1
 
 When specified, a value for the Iops parameter is required.
 
 Default: io1
 
 Valid for: Multi-AZ DB clusters only
- iops(i32) / set_iops(Option<i32>):
 The amount of Provisioned IOPS (input/output operations per second) to be initially allocated for each DB instance in the Multi-AZ DB cluster.
 
 For information about valid Iops values, see Amazon RDS Provisioned IOPS storage to improve performance in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 This setting is required to create a Multi-AZ DB cluster.
 
 Constraints: Must be a multiple between .5 and 50 of the storage amount for the DB cluster.
 
 Valid for: Multi-AZ DB clusters only
- publicly_accessible(bool) / set_publicly_accessible(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether the DB cluster is publicly accessible.
 
 When the DB cluster is publicly accessible, its Domain Name System (DNS) endpoint resolves to the private IP address from within the DB cluster’s virtual private cloud (VPC). It resolves to the public IP address from outside of the DB cluster’s VPC. Access to the DB cluster is ultimately controlled by the security group it uses. That public access isn’t permitted if the security group assigned to the DB cluster doesn’t permit it.
 
 When the DB cluster isn’t publicly accessible, it is an internal DB cluster with a DNS name that resolves to a private IP address.
 
 Default: The default behavior varies depending on whether DBSubnetGroupName is specified.
 
 If DBSubnetGroupName isn’t specified, and PubliclyAccessible isn’t specified, the following applies:
 - If the default VPC in the target Region doesn’t have an internet gateway attached to it, the DB cluster is private.
 - If the default VPC in the target Region has an internet gateway attached to it, the DB cluster is public.
 If DBSubnetGroupName is specified, and PubliclyAccessible isn’t specified, the following applies:
 - If the subnets are part of a VPC that doesn’t have an internet gateway attached to it, the DB cluster is private.
 - If the subnets are part of a VPC that has an internet gateway attached to it, the DB cluster is public.
 Valid for: Multi-AZ DB clusters only
- auto_minor_version_upgrade(bool) / set_auto_minor_version_upgrade(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether minor engine upgrades are applied automatically to the DB cluster during the maintenance window. By default, minor engine upgrades are applied automatically.
 
 Valid for: Multi-AZ DB clusters only
- monitoring_interval(i32) / set_monitoring_interval(Option<i32>):
 The interval, in seconds, between points when Enhanced Monitoring metrics are collected for the DB cluster. To turn off collecting Enhanced Monitoring metrics, specify 0. The default is 0.
 
 If MonitoringRoleArn is specified, also set MonitoringInterval to a value other than 0.
 
 Valid Values: 0, 1, 5, 10, 15, 30, 60
 
 Valid for: Multi-AZ DB clusters only
- monitoring_role_arn(impl Into<String>) / set_monitoring_role_arn(Option<String>):
 The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the IAM role that permits RDS to send Enhanced Monitoring metrics to Amazon CloudWatch Logs. An example is arn:aws:iam:123456789012:role/emaccess. For information on creating a monitoring role, see Setting up and enabling Enhanced Monitoring in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 If MonitoringInterval is set to a value other than 0, supply a MonitoringRoleArn value.
 
 Valid for: Multi-AZ DB clusters only
- enable_performance_insights(bool) / set_enable_performance_insights(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether to turn on Performance Insights for the DB cluster.
 
 For more information, see Using Amazon Performance Insights in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 Valid for: Multi-AZ DB clusters only
- performance_insights_kms_key_id(impl Into<String>) / set_performance_insights_kms_key_id(Option<String>):
 The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for encryption of Performance Insights data.
 
 The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key.
 
 If you don’t specify a value for PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId, then Amazon RDS uses your default KMS key. There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region.
 
 Valid for: Multi-AZ DB clusters only
- performance_insights_retention_period(i32) / set_performance_insights_retention_period(Option<i32>):
 The number of days to retain Performance Insights data. The default is 7 days. The following values are valid:
 - 7
 - month * 31, where month is a number of months from 1-23
 - 731
 For example, the following values are valid:
 - 93 (3 months * 31)
 - 341 (11 months * 31)
 - 589 (19 months * 31)
 - 731
 If you specify a retention period such as 94, which isn’t a valid value, RDS issues an error.
 
 Valid for: Multi-AZ DB clusters only
- serverless_v2_scaling_configuration(ServerlessV2ScalingConfiguration) / set_serverless_v2_scaling_configuration(Option<ServerlessV2ScalingConfiguration>):
 Contains the scaling configuration of an Aurora Serverless v2 DB cluster.
 
 For more information, see Using Amazon Aurora Serverless v2 in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
- network_type(impl Into<String>) / set_network_type(Option<String>):
 The network type of the DB cluster.
 
 Valid values:
 - IPV4
 - DUAL
 The network type is determined by the DBSubnetGroup specified for the DB cluster. A DBSubnetGroup can support only the IPv4 protocol or the IPv4 and the IPv6 protocols (DUAL).
 
 For more information, see Working with a DB instance in a VPC in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only
On success, responds with CreateDbClusterOutput with field(s):
- db_cluster(Option<DbCluster>):
 Contains the details of an Amazon Aurora DB cluster or Multi-AZ DB cluster.
 
 For an Amazon Aurora DB cluster, this data type is used as a response element in the operations CreateDBCluster, DeleteDBCluster, DescribeDBClusters, FailoverDBCluster, ModifyDBCluster, PromoteReadReplicaDBCluster, RestoreDBClusterFromS3, RestoreDBClusterFromSnapshot, RestoreDBClusterToPointInTime, StartDBCluster, and StopDBCluster.
 
 For a Multi-AZ DB cluster, this data type is used as a response element in the operations CreateDBCluster, DeleteDBCluster, DescribeDBClusters, FailoverDBCluster, ModifyDBCluster, RebootDBCluster, RestoreDBClusterFromSnapshot, and RestoreDBClusterToPointInTime.
 
 For more information on Amazon Aurora DB clusters, see What is Amazon Aurora? in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
 
 For more information on Multi-AZ DB clusters, see Multi-AZ deployments with two readable standby DB instances in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
On failure, responds with SdkError<CreateDBClusterError>

source

pub fn create_db_cluster_endpoint(&self) -> CreateDBClusterEndpoint

Constructs a fluent builder for the CreateDBClusterEndpoint operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>):
 The DB cluster identifier of the DB cluster associated with the endpoint. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.
- db_cluster_endpoint_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_cluster_endpoint_identifier(Option<String>):
 The identifier to use for the new endpoint. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.
- endpoint_type(impl Into<String>) / set_endpoint_type(Option<String>):
 The type of the endpoint, one of: READER, WRITER, ANY.
- static_members(Vec<String>) / set_static_members(Option<Vec<String>>):
 List of DB instance identifiers that are part of the custom endpoint group.
- excluded_members(Vec<String>) / set_excluded_members(Option<Vec<String>>):
 List of DB instance identifiers that aren’t part of the custom endpoint group. All other eligible instances are reachable through the custom endpoint. This parameter is relevant only if the list of static members is empty.
- tags(Vec<Tag>) / set_tags(Option<Vec<Tag>>):
 The tags to be assigned to the Amazon RDS resource.
On success, responds with CreateDbClusterEndpointOutput with field(s):
- db_cluster_endpoint_identifier(Option<String>):
 The identifier associated with the endpoint. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.
- db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>):
 The DB cluster identifier of the DB cluster associated with the endpoint. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.
- db_cluster_endpoint_resource_identifier(Option<String>):
 A unique system-generated identifier for an endpoint. It remains the same for the whole life of the endpoint.
- endpoint(Option<String>):
 The DNS address of the endpoint.
- status(Option<String>):
 The current status of the endpoint. One of: creating, available, deleting, inactive, modifying. The inactive state applies to an endpoint that can’t be used for a certain kind of cluster, such as a writer endpoint for a read-only secondary cluster in a global database.
- endpoint_type(Option<String>):
 The type of the endpoint. One of: READER, WRITER, CUSTOM.
- custom_endpoint_type(Option<String>):
 The type associated with a custom endpoint. One of: READER, WRITER, ANY.
- static_members(Option<Vec<String>>):
 List of DB instance identifiers that are part of the custom endpoint group.
- excluded_members(Option<Vec<String>>):
 List of DB instance identifiers that aren’t part of the custom endpoint group. All other eligible instances are reachable through the custom endpoint. Only relevant if the list of static members is empty.
- db_cluster_endpoint_arn(Option<String>):
 The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the endpoint.
On failure, responds with SdkError<CreateDBClusterEndpointError>

source

pub fn create_db_cluster_parameter_group(&self) -> CreateDBClusterParameterGroup

Constructs a fluent builder for the CreateDBClusterParameterGroup operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_cluster_parameter_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_cluster_parameter_group_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the DB cluster parameter group.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must not match the name of an existing DB cluster parameter group.
 This value is stored as a lowercase string.
- db_parameter_group_family(impl Into<String>) / set_db_parameter_group_family(Option<String>):
 The DB cluster parameter group family name. A DB cluster parameter group can be associated with one and only one DB cluster parameter group family, and can be applied only to a DB cluster running a database engine and engine version compatible with that DB cluster parameter group family.
 
 Aurora MySQL
 
 Example: aurora5.6, aurora-mysql5.7, aurora-mysql8.0
 
 Aurora PostgreSQL
 
 Example: aurora-postgresql9.6
 
 RDS for MySQL
 
 Example: mysql8.0
 
 RDS for PostgreSQL
 
 Example: postgres12
 
 To list all of the available parameter group families for a DB engine, use the following command:
 
 aws rds describe-db-engine-versions –query “DBEngineVersions[].DBParameterGroupFamily” –engine
 
 For example, to list all of the available parameter group families for the Aurora PostgreSQL DB engine, use the following command:
 
 aws rds describe-db-engine-versions –query “DBEngineVersions[].DBParameterGroupFamily” –engine aurora-postgresql
 
 The output contains duplicates.
 
 The following are the valid DB engine values:
 - aurora (for MySQL 5.6-compatible Aurora)
 - aurora-mysql (for MySQL 5.7-compatible and MySQL 8.0-compatible Aurora)
 - aurora-postgresql
 - mysql
 - postgres
- description(impl Into<String>) / set_description(Option<String>):
 The description for the DB cluster parameter group.
- tags(Vec<Tag>) / set_tags(Option<Vec<Tag>>):
 Tags to assign to the DB cluster parameter group.
On success, responds with CreateDbClusterParameterGroupOutput with field(s):
- db_cluster_parameter_group(Option<DbClusterParameterGroup>):
 Contains the details of an Amazon RDS DB cluster parameter group.
 
 This data type is used as a response element in the DescribeDBClusterParameterGroups action.
On failure, responds with SdkError<CreateDBClusterParameterGroupError>

source

pub fn create_db_cluster_snapshot(&self) -> CreateDBClusterSnapshot

Constructs a fluent builder for the CreateDBClusterSnapshot operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_cluster_snapshot_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_cluster_snapshot_identifier(Option<String>):
 The identifier of the DB cluster snapshot. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must contain from 1 to 63 letters, numbers, or hyphens.
 - First character must be a letter.
 - Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.
 Example: my-cluster1-snapshot1
- db_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>):
 The identifier of the DB cluster to create a snapshot for. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must match the identifier of an existing DBCluster.
 Example: my-cluster1
- tags(Vec<Tag>) / set_tags(Option<Vec<Tag>>):
 The tags to be assigned to the DB cluster snapshot.
On success, responds with CreateDbClusterSnapshotOutput with field(s):
- db_cluster_snapshot(Option<DbClusterSnapshot>):
 Contains the details for an Amazon RDS DB cluster snapshot
 
 This data type is used as a response element in the DescribeDBClusterSnapshots action.
On failure, responds with SdkError<CreateDBClusterSnapshotError>

source

pub fn create_db_instance(&self) -> CreateDBInstance

Constructs a fluent builder for the CreateDBInstance operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_name(Option<String>):
 The meaning of this parameter differs according to the database engine you use.
 
 MySQL
 
 The name of the database to create when the DB instance is created. If this parameter isn’t specified, no database is created in the DB instance.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must contain 1 to 64 letters or numbers.
 - Must begin with a letter. Subsequent characters can be letters, underscores, or digits (0-9).
 - Can’t be a word reserved by the specified database engine
 MariaDB
 
 The name of the database to create when the DB instance is created. If this parameter isn’t specified, no database is created in the DB instance.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must contain 1 to 64 letters or numbers.
 - Must begin with a letter. Subsequent characters can be letters, underscores, or digits (0-9).
 - Can’t be a word reserved by the specified database engine
 PostgreSQL
 
 The name of the database to create when the DB instance is created. If this parameter isn’t specified, a database named postgres is created in the DB instance.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must contain 1 to 63 letters, numbers, or underscores.
 - Must begin with a letter. Subsequent characters can be letters, underscores, or digits (0-9).
 - Can’t be a word reserved by the specified database engine
 Oracle
 
 The Oracle System ID (SID) of the created DB instance. If you specify null, the default value ORCL is used. You can’t specify the string NULL, or any other reserved word, for DBName.
 
 Default: ORCL
 
 Constraints:
 - Can’t be longer than 8 characters
 Amazon RDS Custom for Oracle
 
 The Oracle System ID (SID) of the created RDS Custom DB instance. If you don’t specify a value, the default value is ORCL.
 
 Default: ORCL
 
 Constraints:
 - It must contain 1 to 8 alphanumeric characters.
 - It must contain a letter.
 - It can’t be a word reserved by the database engine.
 Amazon RDS Custom for SQL Server
 
 Not applicable. Must be null.
 
 SQL Server
 
 Not applicable. Must be null.
 
 Amazon Aurora MySQL
 
 The name of the database to create when the primary DB instance of the Aurora MySQL DB cluster is created. If this parameter isn’t specified for an Aurora MySQL DB cluster, no database is created in the DB cluster.
 
 Constraints:
 - It must contain 1 to 64 alphanumeric characters.
 - It can’t be a word reserved by the database engine.
 Amazon Aurora PostgreSQL
 
 The name of the database to create when the primary DB instance of the Aurora PostgreSQL DB cluster is created. If this parameter isn’t specified for an Aurora PostgreSQL DB cluster, a database named postgres is created in the DB cluster.
 
 Constraints:
 - It must contain 1 to 63 alphanumeric characters.
 - It must begin with a letter or an underscore. Subsequent characters can be letters, underscores, or digits (0 to 9).
 - It can’t be a word reserved by the database engine.
- db_instance_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_instance_identifier(Option<String>):
 The DB instance identifier. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must contain from 1 to 63 letters, numbers, or hyphens.
 - First character must be a letter.
 - Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.
 Example: mydbinstance
- allocated_storage(i32) / set_allocated_storage(Option<i32>):
 The amount of storage in gibibytes (GiB) to allocate for the DB instance.
 
 Type: Integer
 
 Amazon Aurora
 
 Not applicable. Aurora cluster volumes automatically grow as the amount of data in your database increases, though you are only charged for the space that you use in an Aurora cluster volume.
 
 Amazon RDS Custom
 
 Constraints to the amount of storage for each storage type are the following:
 - General Purpose (SSD) storage (gp2): Must be an integer from 40 to 65536 for RDS Custom for Oracle, 16384 for RDS Custom for SQL Server.
 - Provisioned IOPS storage (io1): Must be an integer from 40 to 65536 for RDS Custom for Oracle, 16384 for RDS Custom for SQL Server.
 MySQL
 
 Constraints to the amount of storage for each storage type are the following:
 - General Purpose (SSD) storage (gp2): Must be an integer from 20 to 65536.
 - Provisioned IOPS storage (io1): Must be an integer from 100 to 65536.
 - Magnetic storage (standard): Must be an integer from 5 to 3072.
 MariaDB
 
 Constraints to the amount of storage for each storage type are the following:
 - General Purpose (SSD) storage (gp2): Must be an integer from 20 to 65536.
 - Provisioned IOPS storage (io1): Must be an integer from 100 to 65536.
 - Magnetic storage (standard): Must be an integer from 5 to 3072.
 PostgreSQL
 
 Constraints to the amount of storage for each storage type are the following:
 - General Purpose (SSD) storage (gp2): Must be an integer from 20 to 65536.
 - Provisioned IOPS storage (io1): Must be an integer from 100 to 65536.
 - Magnetic storage (standard): Must be an integer from 5 to 3072.
 Oracle
 
 Constraints to the amount of storage for each storage type are the following:
 - General Purpose (SSD) storage (gp2): Must be an integer from 20 to 65536.
 - Provisioned IOPS storage (io1): Must be an integer from 100 to 65536.
 - Magnetic storage (standard): Must be an integer from 10 to 3072.
 SQL Server
 
 Constraints to the amount of storage for each storage type are the following:
 - General Purpose (SSD) storage (gp2):
 - Enterprise and Standard editions: Must be an integer from 20 to 16384.
 - Web and Express editions: Must be an integer from 20 to 16384.
 - Provisioned IOPS storage (io1):
 - Enterprise and Standard editions: Must be an integer from 100 to 16384.
 - Web and Express editions: Must be an integer from 100 to 16384.
 - Magnetic storage (standard):
 - Enterprise and Standard editions: Must be an integer from 20 to 1024.
 - Web and Express editions: Must be an integer from 20 to 1024.
- db_instance_class(impl Into<String>) / set_db_instance_class(Option<String>):
 The compute and memory capacity of the DB instance, for example db.m5.large. Not all DB instance classes are available in all Amazon Web Services Regions, or for all database engines. For the full list of DB instance classes, and availability for your engine, see DB instance classes in the Amazon RDS User Guide or Aurora DB instance classes in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
- engine(impl Into<String>) / set_engine(Option<String>):
 The name of the database engine to be used for this instance.
 
 Not every database engine is available for every Amazon Web Services Region.
 
 Valid Values:
 - aurora (for MySQL 5.6-compatible Aurora)
 - aurora-mysql (for MySQL 5.7-compatible and MySQL 8.0-compatible Aurora)
 - aurora-postgresql
 - custom-oracle-ee (for RDS Custom for Oracle instances)
 - custom-sqlserver-ee (for RDS Custom for SQL Server instances)
 - custom-sqlserver-se (for RDS Custom for SQL Server instances)
 - custom-sqlserver-web (for RDS Custom for SQL Server instances)
 - mariadb
 - mysql
 - oracle-ee
 - oracle-ee-cdb
 - oracle-se2
 - oracle-se2-cdb
 - postgres
 - sqlserver-ee
 - sqlserver-se
 - sqlserver-ex
 - sqlserver-web
- master_username(impl Into<String>) / set_master_username(Option<String>):
 The name for the master user.
 
 Amazon Aurora
 
 Not applicable. The name for the master user is managed by the DB cluster.
 
 Amazon RDS
 
 Constraints:
 - Required.
 - Must be 1 to 16 letters, numbers, or underscores.
 - First character must be a letter.
 - Can’t be a reserved word for the chosen database engine.
- master_user_password(impl Into<String>) / set_master_user_password(Option<String>):
 The password for the master user. The password can include any printable ASCII character except “/”, “”“, or “@”.
 
 Amazon Aurora
 
 Not applicable. The password for the master user is managed by the DB cluster.
 
 MariaDB
 
 Constraints: Must contain from 8 to 41 characters.
 
 Microsoft SQL Server
 
 Constraints: Must contain from 8 to 128 characters.
 
 MySQL
 
 Constraints: Must contain from 8 to 41 characters.
 
 Oracle
 
 Constraints: Must contain from 8 to 30 characters.
 
 PostgreSQL
 
 Constraints: Must contain from 8 to 128 characters.
- db_security_groups(Vec<String>) / set_db_security_groups(Option<Vec<String>>):
 A list of DB security groups to associate with this DB instance.
 
 This setting applies to the legacy EC2-Classic platform, which is no longer used to create new DB instances. Use the VpcSecurityGroupIds setting instead.
- vpc_security_group_ids(Vec<String>) / set_vpc_security_group_ids(Option<Vec<String>>):
 A list of Amazon EC2 VPC security groups to associate with this DB instance.
 
 Amazon Aurora
 
 Not applicable. The associated list of EC2 VPC security groups is managed by the DB cluster.
 
 Default: The default EC2 VPC security group for the DB subnet group’s VPC.
- availability_zone(impl Into<String>) / set_availability_zone(Option<String>):
 The Availability Zone (AZ) where the database will be created. For information on Amazon Web Services Regions and Availability Zones, see Regions and Availability Zones.
 
 Amazon Aurora
 
 Each Aurora DB cluster hosts copies of its storage in three separate Availability Zones. Specify one of these Availability Zones. Aurora automatically chooses an appropriate Availability Zone if you don’t specify one.
 
 Default: A random, system-chosen Availability Zone in the endpoint’s Amazon Web Services Region.
 
 Example: us-east-1d
 
 Constraint: The AvailabilityZone parameter can’t be specified if the DB instance is a Multi-AZ deployment. The specified Availability Zone must be in the same Amazon Web Services Region as the current endpoint.
- db_subnet_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_subnet_group_name(Option<String>):
 A DB subnet group to associate with this DB instance.
 
 Constraints: Must match the name of an existing DBSubnetGroup. Must not be default.
 
 Example: mydbsubnetgroup
- preferred_maintenance_window(impl Into<String>) / set_preferred_maintenance_window(Option<String>):
 The time range each week during which system maintenance can occur, in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC). For more information, see Amazon RDS Maintenance Window.
 
 Format: ddd:hh24:mi-ddd:hh24:mi
 
 The default is a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Web Services Region, occurring on a random day of the week.
 
 Valid Days: Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, Sun.
 
 Constraints: Minimum 30-minute window.
- db_parameter_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_parameter_group_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the DB parameter group to associate with this DB instance. If you do not specify a value, then the default DB parameter group for the specified DB engine and version is used.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must be 1 to 255 letters, numbers, or hyphens.
 - First character must be a letter
 - Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens
- backup_retention_period(i32) / set_backup_retention_period(Option<i32>):
 The number of days for which automated backups are retained. Setting this parameter to a positive number enables backups. Setting this parameter to 0 disables automated backups.
 
 Amazon Aurora
 
 Not applicable. The retention period for automated backups is managed by the DB cluster.
 
 Default: 1
 
 Constraints:
 - Must be a value from 0 to 35
 - Can’t be set to 0 if the DB instance is a source to read replicas
 - Can’t be set to 0 for an RDS Custom for Oracle DB instance
- preferred_backup_window(impl Into<String>) / set_preferred_backup_window(Option<String>):
 The daily time range during which automated backups are created if automated backups are enabled, using the BackupRetentionPeriod parameter. The default is a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Web Services Region. For more information, see Backup window in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 Amazon Aurora
 
 Not applicable. The daily time range for creating automated backups is managed by the DB cluster.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must be in the format hh24:mi-hh24:mi.
 - Must be in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).
 - Must not conflict with the preferred maintenance window.
 - Must be at least 30 minutes.
- port(i32) / set_port(Option<i32>):
 The port number on which the database accepts connections.
 
 MySQL
 
 Default: 3306
 
 Valid values: 1150-65535
 
 Type: Integer
 
 MariaDB
 
 Default: 3306
 
 Valid values: 1150-65535
 
 Type: Integer
 
 PostgreSQL
 
 Default: 5432
 
 Valid values: 1150-65535
 
 Type: Integer
 
 Oracle
 
 Default: 1521
 
 Valid values: 1150-65535
 
 SQL Server
 
 Default: 1433
 
 Valid values: 1150-65535 except 1234, 1434, 3260, 3343, 3389, 47001, and 49152-49156.
 
 Amazon Aurora
 
 Default: 3306
 
 Valid values: 1150-65535
 
 Type: Integer
- multi_az(bool) / set_multi_az(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether the DB instance is a Multi-AZ deployment. You can’t set the AvailabilityZone parameter if the DB instance is a Multi-AZ deployment.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
 
 Amazon Aurora
 
 Not applicable. DB instance Availability Zones (AZs) are managed by the DB cluster.
- engine_version(impl Into<String>) / set_engine_version(Option<String>):
 The version number of the database engine to use.
 
 For a list of valid engine versions, use the DescribeDBEngineVersions operation.
 
 The following are the database engines and links to information about the major and minor versions that are available with Amazon RDS. Not every database engine is available for every Amazon Web Services Region.
 
 Amazon Aurora
 
 Not applicable. The version number of the database engine to be used by the DB instance is managed by the DB cluster.
 
 Amazon RDS Custom for Oracle
 
 A custom engine version (CEV) that you have previously created. This setting is required for RDS Custom for Oracle. The CEV name has the following format: 19.customized_string . An example identifier is 19.my_cev1. For more information, see Creating an RDS Custom for Oracle DB instance in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 Amazon RDS Custom for SQL Server
 
 See RDS Custom for SQL Server general requirements in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 MariaDB
 
 For information, see MariaDB on Amazon RDS Versions in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 Microsoft SQL Server
 
 For information, see Microsoft SQL Server Versions on Amazon RDS in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 MySQL
 
 For information, see MySQL on Amazon RDS Versions in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 Oracle
 
 For information, see Oracle Database Engine Release Notes in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 PostgreSQL
 
 For information, see Amazon RDS for PostgreSQL versions and extensions in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
- auto_minor_version_upgrade(bool) / set_auto_minor_version_upgrade(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether minor engine upgrades are applied automatically to the DB instance during the maintenance window. By default, minor engine upgrades are applied automatically.
 
 If you create an RDS Custom DB instance, you must set AutoMinorVersionUpgrade to false.
- license_model(impl Into<String>) / set_license_model(Option<String>):
 License model information for this DB instance.
 
 Valid values: license-included | bring-your-own-license | general-public-license
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
 
 Amazon Aurora
 
 Not applicable.
- iops(i32) / set_iops(Option<i32>):
 The amount of Provisioned IOPS (input/output operations per second) to be initially allocated for the DB instance. For information about valid Iops values, see Amazon RDS Provisioned IOPS storage to improve performance in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 Constraints: For MariaDB, MySQL, Oracle, and PostgreSQL DB instances, must be a multiple between .5 and 50 of the storage amount for the DB instance. For SQL Server DB instances, must be a multiple between 1 and 50 of the storage amount for the DB instance.
 
 Amazon Aurora
 
 Not applicable. Storage is managed by the DB cluster.
- option_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_option_group_name(Option<String>):
 A value that indicates that the DB instance should be associated with the specified option group.
 
 Permanent options, such as the TDE option for Oracle Advanced Security TDE, can’t be removed from an option group. Also, that option group can’t be removed from a DB instance after it is associated with a DB instance.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
 
 Amazon Aurora
 
 Not applicable.
- character_set_name(impl Into<String>) / set_character_set_name(Option<String>):
 For supported engines, this value indicates that the DB instance should be associated with the specified CharacterSet.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom. However, if you need to change the character set, you can change it on the database itself.
 
 Amazon Aurora
 
 Not applicable. The character set is managed by the DB cluster. For more information, see CreateDBCluster.
- nchar_character_set_name(impl Into<String>) / set_nchar_character_set_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the NCHAR character set for the Oracle DB instance.
 
 This parameter doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- publicly_accessible(bool) / set_publicly_accessible(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether the DB instance is publicly accessible.
 
 When the DB instance is publicly accessible, its Domain Name System (DNS) endpoint resolves to the private IP address from within the DB instance’s virtual private cloud (VPC). It resolves to the public IP address from outside of the DB instance’s VPC. Access to the DB instance is ultimately controlled by the security group it uses. That public access is not permitted if the security group assigned to the DB instance doesn’t permit it.
 
 When the DB instance isn’t publicly accessible, it is an internal DB instance with a DNS name that resolves to a private IP address.
 
 Default: The default behavior varies depending on whether DBSubnetGroupName is specified.
 
 If DBSubnetGroupName isn’t specified, and PubliclyAccessible isn’t specified, the following applies:
 - If the default VPC in the target Region doesn’t have an internet gateway attached to it, the DB instance is private.
 - If the default VPC in the target Region has an internet gateway attached to it, the DB instance is public.
 If DBSubnetGroupName is specified, and PubliclyAccessible isn’t specified, the following applies:
 - If the subnets are part of a VPC that doesn’t have an internet gateway attached to it, the DB instance is private.
 - If the subnets are part of a VPC that has an internet gateway attached to it, the DB instance is public.
- tags(Vec<Tag>) / set_tags(Option<Vec<Tag>>):
 Tags to assign to the DB instance.
- db_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>):
 The identifier of the DB cluster that the instance will belong to.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- storage_type(impl Into<String>) / set_storage_type(Option<String>):
 Specifies the storage type to be associated with the DB instance.
 
 Valid values: standard | gp2 | io1
 
 If you specify io1, you must also include a value for the Iops parameter.
 
 Default: io1 if the Iops parameter is specified, otherwise gp2
 
 Amazon Aurora
 
 Not applicable. Storage is managed by the DB cluster.
- tde_credential_arn(impl Into<String>) / set_tde_credential_arn(Option<String>):
 The ARN from the key store with which to associate the instance for TDE encryption.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
 
 Amazon Aurora
 
 Not applicable.
- tde_credential_password(impl Into<String>) / set_tde_credential_password(Option<String>):
 The password for the given ARN from the key store in order to access the device.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- storage_encrypted(bool) / set_storage_encrypted(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether the DB instance is encrypted. By default, it isn’t encrypted.
 
 For RDS Custom instances, either set this parameter to true or leave it unset. If you set this parameter to false, RDS reports an error.
 
 Amazon Aurora
 
 Not applicable. The encryption for DB instances is managed by the DB cluster.
- kms_key_id(impl Into<String>) / set_kms_key_id(Option<String>):
 The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for an encrypted DB instance.
 
 The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. To use a KMS key in a different Amazon Web Services account, specify the key ARN or alias ARN.
 
 Amazon Aurora
 
 Not applicable. The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is managed by the DB cluster. For more information, see CreateDBCluster.
 
 If StorageEncrypted is enabled, and you do not specify a value for the KmsKeyId parameter, then Amazon RDS uses your default KMS key. There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region.
 
 Amazon RDS Custom
 
 A KMS key is required for RDS Custom instances. For most RDS engines, if you leave this parameter empty while enabling StorageEncrypted, the engine uses the default KMS key. However, RDS Custom doesn’t use the default key when this parameter is empty. You must explicitly specify a key.
- domain(impl Into<String>) / set_domain(Option<String>):
 The Active Directory directory ID to create the DB instance in. Currently, only MySQL, Microsoft SQL Server, Oracle, and PostgreSQL DB instances can be created in an Active Directory Domain.
 
 For more information, see Kerberos Authentication in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
 
 Amazon Aurora
 
 Not applicable. The domain is managed by the DB cluster.
- copy_tags_to_snapshot(bool) / set_copy_tags_to_snapshot(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether to copy tags from the DB instance to snapshots of the DB instance. By default, tags are not copied.
 
 Amazon Aurora
 
 Not applicable. Copying tags to snapshots is managed by the DB cluster. Setting this value for an Aurora DB instance has no effect on the DB cluster setting.
- monitoring_interval(i32) / set_monitoring_interval(Option<i32>):
 The interval, in seconds, between points when Enhanced Monitoring metrics are collected for the DB instance. To disable collection of Enhanced Monitoring metrics, specify 0. The default is 0.
 
 If MonitoringRoleArn is specified, then you must set MonitoringInterval to a value other than 0.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
 
 Valid Values: 0, 1, 5, 10, 15, 30, 60
- monitoring_role_arn(impl Into<String>) / set_monitoring_role_arn(Option<String>):
 The ARN for the IAM role that permits RDS to send enhanced monitoring metrics to Amazon CloudWatch Logs. For example, arn:aws:iam:123456789012:role/emaccess. For information on creating a monitoring role, see Setting Up and Enabling Enhanced Monitoring in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 If MonitoringInterval is set to a value other than 0, then you must supply a MonitoringRoleArn value.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- domain_iam_role_name(impl Into<String>) / set_domain_iam_role_name(Option<String>):
 Specify the name of the IAM role to be used when making API calls to the Directory Service.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
 
 Amazon Aurora
 
 Not applicable. The domain is managed by the DB cluster.
- promotion_tier(i32) / set_promotion_tier(Option<i32>):
 A value that specifies the order in which an Aurora Replica is promoted to the primary instance after a failure of the existing primary instance. For more information, see Fault Tolerance for an Aurora DB Cluster in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
 
 Default: 1
 
 Valid Values: 0 - 15
- timezone(impl Into<String>) / set_timezone(Option<String>):
 The time zone of the DB instance. The time zone parameter is currently supported only by Microsoft SQL Server.
- enable_iam_database_authentication(bool) / set_enable_iam_database_authentication(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether to enable mapping of Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) accounts to database accounts. By default, mapping isn’t enabled.
 
 For more information, see IAM Database Authentication for MySQL and PostgreSQL in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
 
 Amazon Aurora
 
 Not applicable. Mapping Amazon Web Services IAM accounts to database accounts is managed by the DB cluster.
- enable_performance_insights(bool) / set_enable_performance_insights(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether to enable Performance Insights for the DB instance. For more information, see Using Amazon Performance Insights in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- performance_insights_kms_key_id(impl Into<String>) / set_performance_insights_kms_key_id(Option<String>):
 The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for encryption of Performance Insights data.
 
 The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key.
 
 If you do not specify a value for PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId, then Amazon RDS uses your default KMS key. There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- performance_insights_retention_period(i32) / set_performance_insights_retention_period(Option<i32>):
 The number of days to retain Performance Insights data. The default is 7 days. The following values are valid:
 - 7
 - month * 31, where month is a number of months from 1-23
 - 731
 For example, the following values are valid:
 - 93 (3 months * 31)
 - 341 (11 months * 31)
 - 589 (19 months * 31)
 - 731
 If you specify a retention period such as 94, which isn’t a valid value, RDS issues an error.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- enable_cloudwatch_logs_exports(Vec<String>) / set_enable_cloudwatch_logs_exports(Option<Vec<String>>):
 The list of log types that need to be enabled for exporting to CloudWatch Logs. The values in the list depend on the DB engine. For more information, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 Amazon Aurora
 
 Not applicable. CloudWatch Logs exports are managed by the DB cluster.
 
 RDS Custom
 
 Not applicable.
 
 MariaDB
 
 Possible values are audit, error, general, and slowquery.
 
 Microsoft SQL Server
 
 Possible values are agent and error.
 
 MySQL
 
 Possible values are audit, error, general, and slowquery.
 
 Oracle
 
 Possible values are alert, audit, listener, trace, and oemagent.
 
 PostgreSQL
 
 Possible values are postgresql and upgrade.
- processor_features(Vec<ProcessorFeature>) / set_processor_features(Option<Vec<ProcessorFeature>>):
 The number of CPU cores and the number of threads per core for the DB instance class of the DB instance.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
 
 Amazon Aurora
 
 Not applicable.
- deletion_protection(bool) / set_deletion_protection(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether the DB instance has deletion protection enabled. The database can’t be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. By default, deletion protection isn’t enabled. For more information, see Deleting a DB Instance.
 
 Amazon Aurora
 
 Not applicable. You can enable or disable deletion protection for the DB cluster. For more information, see CreateDBCluster. DB instances in a DB cluster can be deleted even when deletion protection is enabled for the DB cluster.
- max_allocated_storage(i32) / set_max_allocated_storage(Option<i32>):
 The upper limit in gibibytes (GiB) to which Amazon RDS can automatically scale the storage of the DB instance.
 
 For more information about this setting, including limitations that apply to it, see Managing capacity automatically with Amazon RDS storage autoscaling in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
 
 Amazon Aurora
 
 Not applicable. Storage is managed by the DB cluster.
- enable_customer_owned_ip(bool) / set_enable_customer_owned_ip(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether to enable a customer-owned IP address (CoIP) for an RDS on Outposts DB instance.
 
 A CoIP provides local or external connectivity to resources in your Outpost subnets through your on-premises network. For some use cases, a CoIP can provide lower latency for connections to the DB instance from outside of its virtual private cloud (VPC) on your local network.
 
 For more information about RDS on Outposts, see Working with Amazon RDS on Amazon Web Services Outposts in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 For more information about CoIPs, see Customer-owned IP addresses in the Amazon Web Services Outposts User Guide.
- custom_iam_instance_profile(impl Into<String>) / set_custom_iam_instance_profile(Option<String>):
 The instance profile associated with the underlying Amazon EC2 instance of an RDS Custom DB instance. The instance profile must meet the following requirements:
 - The profile must exist in your account.
 - The profile must have an IAM role that Amazon EC2 has permissions to assume.
 - The instance profile name and the associated IAM role name must start with the prefix AWSRDSCustom.
 For the list of permissions required for the IAM role, see Configure IAM and your VPC in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 This setting is required for RDS Custom.
- backup_target(impl Into<String>) / set_backup_target(Option<String>):
 Specifies where automated backups and manual snapshots are stored.
 
 Possible values are outposts (Amazon Web Services Outposts) and region (Amazon Web Services Region). The default is region.
 
 For more information, see Working with Amazon RDS on Amazon Web Services Outposts in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
- network_type(impl Into<String>) / set_network_type(Option<String>):
 The network type of the DB instance.
 
 Valid values:
 - IPV4
 - DUAL
 The network type is determined by the DBSubnetGroup specified for the DB instance. A DBSubnetGroup can support only the IPv4 protocol or the IPv4 and the IPv6 protocols (DUAL).
 
 For more information, see Working with a DB instance in a VPC in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
On success, responds with CreateDbInstanceOutput with field(s):
- db_instance(Option<DbInstance>):
 Contains the details of an Amazon RDS DB instance.
 
 This data type is used as a response element in the operations CreateDBInstance, CreateDBInstanceReadReplica, DeleteDBInstance, DescribeDBInstances, ModifyDBInstance, PromoteReadReplica, RebootDBInstance, RestoreDBInstanceFromDBSnapshot, RestoreDBInstanceFromS3, RestoreDBInstanceToPointInTime, StartDBInstance, and StopDBInstance.
On failure, responds with SdkError<CreateDBInstanceError>

source

pub fn create_db_instance_read_replica(&self) -> CreateDBInstanceReadReplica

Constructs a fluent builder for the CreateDBInstanceReadReplica operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_instance_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_instance_identifier(Option<String>):
 The DB instance identifier of the read replica. This identifier is the unique key that identifies a DB instance. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.
- source_db_instance_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_source_db_instance_identifier(Option<String>):
 The identifier of the DB instance that will act as the source for the read replica. Each DB instance can have up to five read replicas.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must be the identifier of an existing MySQL, MariaDB, Oracle, PostgreSQL, or SQL Server DB instance.
 - Can specify a DB instance that is a MySQL read replica only if the source is running MySQL 5.6 or later.
 - For the limitations of Oracle read replicas, see Read Replica Limitations with Oracle in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 - For the limitations of SQL Server read replicas, see Read Replica Limitations with Microsoft SQL Server in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 - Can specify a PostgreSQL DB instance only if the source is running PostgreSQL 9.3.5 or later (9.4.7 and higher for cross-Region replication).
 - The specified DB instance must have automatic backups enabled, that is, its backup retention period must be greater than 0.
 - If the source DB instance is in the same Amazon Web Services Region as the read replica, specify a valid DB instance identifier.
 - If the source DB instance is in a different Amazon Web Services Region from the read replica, specify a valid DB instance ARN. For more information, see Constructing an ARN for Amazon RDS in the Amazon RDS User Guide. This doesn’t apply to SQL Server or RDS Custom, which don’t support cross-Region replicas.
- db_instance_class(impl Into<String>) / set_db_instance_class(Option<String>):
 The compute and memory capacity of the read replica, for example db.m4.large. Not all DB instance classes are available in all Amazon Web Services Regions, or for all database engines. For the full list of DB instance classes, and availability for your engine, see DB Instance Class in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 Default: Inherits from the source DB instance.
- availability_zone(impl Into<String>) / set_availability_zone(Option<String>):
 The Availability Zone (AZ) where the read replica will be created.
 
 Default: A random, system-chosen Availability Zone in the endpoint’s Amazon Web Services Region.
 
 Example: us-east-1d
- port(i32) / set_port(Option<i32>):
 The port number that the DB instance uses for connections.
 
 Default: Inherits from the source DB instance
 
 Valid Values: 1150-65535
- multi_az(bool) / set_multi_az(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether the read replica is in a Multi-AZ deployment.
 
 You can create a read replica as a Multi-AZ DB instance. RDS creates a standby of your replica in another Availability Zone for failover support for the replica. Creating your read replica as a Multi-AZ DB instance is independent of whether the source database is a Multi-AZ DB instance.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- auto_minor_version_upgrade(bool) / set_auto_minor_version_upgrade(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether minor engine upgrades are applied automatically to the read replica during the maintenance window.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
 
 Default: Inherits from the source DB instance
- iops(i32) / set_iops(Option<i32>):
 The amount of Provisioned IOPS (input/output operations per second) to be initially allocated for the DB instance.
- option_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_option_group_name(Option<String>):
 The option group the DB instance is associated with. If omitted, the option group associated with the source instance is used.
 
 For SQL Server, you must use the option group associated with the source instance.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- db_parameter_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_parameter_group_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the DB parameter group to associate with this DB instance.
 
 If you do not specify a value for DBParameterGroupName, then Amazon RDS uses the DBParameterGroup of source DB instance for a same Region read replica, or the default DBParameterGroup for the specified DB engine for a cross-Region read replica.
 
 Specifying a parameter group for this operation is only supported for MySQL and Oracle DB instances. It isn’t supported for RDS Custom.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must be 1 to 255 letters, numbers, or hyphens.
 - First character must be a letter
 - Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens
- publicly_accessible(bool) / set_publicly_accessible(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether the DB instance is publicly accessible.
 
 When the DB cluster is publicly accessible, its Domain Name System (DNS) endpoint resolves to the private IP address from within the DB cluster’s virtual private cloud (VPC). It resolves to the public IP address from outside of the DB cluster’s VPC. Access to the DB cluster is ultimately controlled by the security group it uses. That public access isn’t permitted if the security group assigned to the DB cluster doesn’t permit it.
 
 When the DB instance isn’t publicly accessible, it is an internal DB instance with a DNS name that resolves to a private IP address.
 
 For more information, see CreateDBInstance.
- tags(Vec<Tag>) / set_tags(Option<Vec<Tag>>):
 A list of tags. For more information, see Tagging Amazon RDS Resources in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
- db_subnet_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_subnet_group_name(Option<String>):
 Specifies a DB subnet group for the DB instance. The new DB instance is created in the VPC associated with the DB subnet group. If no DB subnet group is specified, then the new DB instance isn’t created in a VPC.
 
 Constraints:
 - Can only be specified if the source DB instance identifier specifies a DB instance in another Amazon Web Services Region.
 - If supplied, must match the name of an existing DBSubnetGroup.
 - The specified DB subnet group must be in the same Amazon Web Services Region in which the operation is running.
 - All read replicas in one Amazon Web Services Region that are created from the same source DB instance must either:>
 - Specify DB subnet groups from the same VPC. All these read replicas are created in the same VPC.
 - Not specify a DB subnet group. All these read replicas are created outside of any VPC.
 Example: mydbsubnetgroup
- vpc_security_group_ids(Vec<String>) / set_vpc_security_group_ids(Option<Vec<String>>):
 A list of Amazon EC2 VPC security groups to associate with the read replica.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
 
 Default: The default EC2 VPC security group for the DB subnet group’s VPC.
- storage_type(impl Into<String>) / set_storage_type(Option<String>):
 Specifies the storage type to be associated with the read replica.
 
 Valid values: standard | gp2 | io1
 
 If you specify io1, you must also include a value for the Iops parameter.
 
 Default: io1 if the Iops parameter is specified, otherwise gp2
- copy_tags_to_snapshot(bool) / set_copy_tags_to_snapshot(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether to copy all tags from the read replica to snapshots of the read replica. By default, tags are not copied.
- monitoring_interval(i32) / set_monitoring_interval(Option<i32>):
 The interval, in seconds, between points when Enhanced Monitoring metrics are collected for the read replica. To disable collecting Enhanced Monitoring metrics, specify 0. The default is 0.
 
 If MonitoringRoleArn is specified, then you must also set MonitoringInterval to a value other than 0.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
 
 Valid Values: 0, 1, 5, 10, 15, 30, 60
- monitoring_role_arn(impl Into<String>) / set_monitoring_role_arn(Option<String>):
 The ARN for the IAM role that permits RDS to send enhanced monitoring metrics to Amazon CloudWatch Logs. For example, arn:aws:iam:123456789012:role/emaccess. For information on creating a monitoring role, go to To create an IAM role for Amazon RDS Enhanced Monitoring in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 If MonitoringInterval is set to a value other than 0, then you must supply a MonitoringRoleArn value.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- kms_key_id(impl Into<String>) / set_kms_key_id(Option<String>):
 The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for an encrypted read replica.
 
 The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key.
 
 If you create an encrypted read replica in the same Amazon Web Services Region as the source DB instance, then do not specify a value for this parameter. A read replica in the same Amazon Web Services Region is always encrypted with the same KMS key as the source DB instance.
 
 If you create an encrypted read replica in a different Amazon Web Services Region, then you must specify a KMS key identifier for the destination Amazon Web Services Region. KMS keys are specific to the Amazon Web Services Region that they are created in, and you can’t use KMS keys from one Amazon Web Services Region in another Amazon Web Services Region.
 
 You can’t create an encrypted read replica from an unencrypted DB instance.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom, which uses the same KMS key as the primary replica.
- pre_signed_url(impl Into<String>) / set_pre_signed_url(Option<String>):
 When you are creating a read replica from one Amazon Web Services GovCloud (US) Region to another or from one China Amazon Web Services Region to another, the URL that contains a Signature Version 4 signed request for the CreateDBInstanceReadReplica API operation in the source Amazon Web Services Region that contains the source DB instance.
 
 This setting applies only to Amazon Web Services GovCloud (US) Regions and China Amazon Web Services Regions. It’s ignored in other Amazon Web Services Regions.
 
 You must specify this parameter when you create an encrypted read replica from another Amazon Web Services Region by using the Amazon RDS API. Don’t specify PreSignedUrl when you are creating an encrypted read replica in the same Amazon Web Services Region.
 
 The presigned URL must be a valid request for the CreateDBInstanceReadReplica API operation that can run in the source Amazon Web Services Region that contains the encrypted source DB instance. The presigned URL request must contain the following parameter values:
 - DestinationRegion - The Amazon Web Services Region that the encrypted read replica is created in. This Amazon Web Services Region is the same one where the CreateDBInstanceReadReplica operation is called that contains this presigned URL.
 
 For example, if you create an encrypted DB instance in the us-west-1 Amazon Web Services Region, from a source DB instance in the us-east-2 Amazon Web Services Region, then you call the CreateDBInstanceReadReplica operation in the us-east-1 Amazon Web Services Region and provide a presigned URL that contains a call to the CreateDBInstanceReadReplica operation in the us-west-2 Amazon Web Services Region. For this example, the DestinationRegion in the presigned URL must be set to the us-east-1 Amazon Web Services Region.
 - KmsKeyId - The KMS key identifier for the key to use to encrypt the read replica in the destination Amazon Web Services Region. This is the same identifier for both the CreateDBInstanceReadReplica operation that is called in the destination Amazon Web Services Region, and the operation contained in the presigned URL.
 - SourceDBInstanceIdentifier - The DB instance identifier for the encrypted DB instance to be replicated. This identifier must be in the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) format for the source Amazon Web Services Region. For example, if you are creating an encrypted read replica from a DB instance in the us-west-2 Amazon Web Services Region, then your SourceDBInstanceIdentifier looks like the following example: arn:aws:rds:us-west-2:123456789012:instance:mysql-instance1-20161115.
 To learn how to generate a Signature Version 4 signed request, see Authenticating Requests: Using Query Parameters (Amazon Web Services Signature Version 4) and Signature Version 4 Signing Process.
 
 If you are using an Amazon Web Services SDK tool or the CLI, you can specify SourceRegion (or –source-region for the CLI) instead of specifying PreSignedUrl manually. Specifying SourceRegion autogenerates a presigned URL that is a valid request for the operation that can run in the source Amazon Web Services Region.
 
 SourceRegion isn’t supported for SQL Server, because Amazon RDS for SQL Server doesn’t support cross-Region read replicas.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- enable_iam_database_authentication(bool) / set_enable_iam_database_authentication(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether to enable mapping of Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) accounts to database accounts. By default, mapping isn’t enabled.
 
 For more information about IAM database authentication, see IAM Database Authentication for MySQL and PostgreSQL in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- enable_performance_insights(bool) / set_enable_performance_insights(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether to enable Performance Insights for the read replica.
 
 For more information, see Using Amazon Performance Insights in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- performance_insights_kms_key_id(impl Into<String>) / set_performance_insights_kms_key_id(Option<String>):
 The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for encryption of Performance Insights data.
 
 The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key.
 
 If you do not specify a value for PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId, then Amazon RDS uses your default KMS key. There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- performance_insights_retention_period(i32) / set_performance_insights_retention_period(Option<i32>):
 The number of days to retain Performance Insights data. The default is 7 days. The following values are valid:
 - 7
 - month * 31, where month is a number of months from 1-23
 - 731
 For example, the following values are valid:
 - 93 (3 months * 31)
 - 341 (11 months * 31)
 - 589 (19 months * 31)
 - 731
 If you specify a retention period such as 94, which isn’t a valid value, RDS issues an error.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- enable_cloudwatch_logs_exports(Vec<String>) / set_enable_cloudwatch_logs_exports(Option<Vec<String>>):
 The list of logs that the new DB instance is to export to CloudWatch Logs. The values in the list depend on the DB engine being used. For more information, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- processor_features(Vec<ProcessorFeature>) / set_processor_features(Option<Vec<ProcessorFeature>>):
 The number of CPU cores and the number of threads per core for the DB instance class of the DB instance.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- use_default_processor_features(bool) / set_use_default_processor_features(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether the DB instance class of the DB instance uses its default processor features.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- deletion_protection(bool) / set_deletion_protection(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether the DB instance has deletion protection enabled. The database can’t be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. By default, deletion protection isn’t enabled. For more information, see Deleting a DB Instance.
- domain(impl Into<String>) / set_domain(Option<String>):
 The Active Directory directory ID to create the DB instance in. Currently, only MySQL, Microsoft SQL Server, Oracle, and PostgreSQL DB instances can be created in an Active Directory Domain.
 
 For more information, see Kerberos Authentication in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- domain_iam_role_name(impl Into<String>) / set_domain_iam_role_name(Option<String>):
 Specify the name of the IAM role to be used when making API calls to the Directory Service.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- replica_mode(ReplicaMode) / set_replica_mode(Option<ReplicaMode>):
 The open mode of the replica database: mounted or read-only.
 
 This parameter is only supported for Oracle DB instances.
 
 Mounted DB replicas are included in Oracle Database Enterprise Edition. The main use case for mounted replicas is cross-Region disaster recovery. The primary database doesn’t use Active Data Guard to transmit information to the mounted replica. Because it doesn’t accept user connections, a mounted replica can’t serve a read-only workload.
 
 You can create a combination of mounted and read-only DB replicas for the same primary DB instance. For more information, see Working with Oracle Read Replicas for Amazon RDS in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 For RDS Custom, you must specify this parameter and set it to mounted. The value won’t be set by default. After replica creation, you can manage the open mode manually.
- max_allocated_storage(i32) / set_max_allocated_storage(Option<i32>):
 The upper limit in gibibytes (GiB) to which Amazon RDS can automatically scale the storage of the DB instance.
 
 For more information about this setting, including limitations that apply to it, see Managing capacity automatically with Amazon RDS storage autoscaling in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
- custom_iam_instance_profile(impl Into<String>) / set_custom_iam_instance_profile(Option<String>):
 The instance profile associated with the underlying Amazon EC2 instance of an RDS Custom DB instance. The instance profile must meet the following requirements:
 - The profile must exist in your account.
 - The profile must have an IAM role that Amazon EC2 has permissions to assume.
 - The instance profile name and the associated IAM role name must start with the prefix AWSRDSCustom.
 For the list of permissions required for the IAM role, see Configure IAM and your VPC in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 This setting is required for RDS Custom.
- network_type(impl Into<String>) / set_network_type(Option<String>):
 The network type of the DB instance.
 
 Valid values:
 - IPV4
 - DUAL
 The network type is determined by the DBSubnetGroup specified for read replica. A DBSubnetGroup can support only the IPv4 protocol or the IPv4 and the IPv6 protocols (DUAL).
 
 For more information, see Working with a DB instance in a VPC in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
On success, responds with CreateDbInstanceReadReplicaOutput with field(s):
- db_instance(Option<DbInstance>):
 Contains the details of an Amazon RDS DB instance.
 
 This data type is used as a response element in the operations CreateDBInstance, CreateDBInstanceReadReplica, DeleteDBInstance, DescribeDBInstances, ModifyDBInstance, PromoteReadReplica, RebootDBInstance, RestoreDBInstanceFromDBSnapshot, RestoreDBInstanceFromS3, RestoreDBInstanceToPointInTime, StartDBInstance, and StopDBInstance.
On failure, responds with SdkError<CreateDBInstanceReadReplicaError>

source

pub fn create_db_parameter_group(&self) -> CreateDBParameterGroup

Constructs a fluent builder for the CreateDBParameterGroup operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_parameter_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_parameter_group_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the DB parameter group.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must be 1 to 255 letters, numbers, or hyphens.
 - First character must be a letter
 - Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens
 This value is stored as a lowercase string.
- db_parameter_group_family(impl Into<String>) / set_db_parameter_group_family(Option<String>):
 The DB parameter group family name. A DB parameter group can be associated with one and only one DB parameter group family, and can be applied only to a DB instance running a database engine and engine version compatible with that DB parameter group family.
 
 To list all of the available parameter group families for a DB engine, use the following command:
 
 aws rds describe-db-engine-versions –query “DBEngineVersions[].DBParameterGroupFamily” –engine
 
 For example, to list all of the available parameter group families for the MySQL DB engine, use the following command:
 
 aws rds describe-db-engine-versions –query “DBEngineVersions[].DBParameterGroupFamily” –engine mysql
 
 The output contains duplicates.
 
 The following are the valid DB engine values:
 - aurora (for MySQL 5.6-compatible Aurora)
 - aurora-mysql (for MySQL 5.7-compatible and MySQL 8.0-compatible Aurora)
 - aurora-postgresql
 - mariadb
 - mysql
 - oracle-ee
 - oracle-ee-cdb
 - oracle-se2
 - oracle-se2-cdb
 - postgres
 - sqlserver-ee
 - sqlserver-se
 - sqlserver-ex
 - sqlserver-web
- description(impl Into<String>) / set_description(Option<String>):
 The description for the DB parameter group.
- tags(Vec<Tag>) / set_tags(Option<Vec<Tag>>):
 Tags to assign to the DB parameter group.
On success, responds with CreateDbParameterGroupOutput with field(s):
- db_parameter_group(Option<DbParameterGroup>):
 Contains the details of an Amazon RDS DB parameter group.
 
 This data type is used as a response element in the DescribeDBParameterGroups action.
On failure, responds with SdkError<CreateDBParameterGroupError>

source

pub fn create_db_proxy(&self) -> CreateDBProxy

Constructs a fluent builder for the CreateDBProxy operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_proxy_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_proxy_name(Option<String>):
 The identifier for the proxy. This name must be unique for all proxies owned by your Amazon Web Services account in the specified Amazon Web Services Region. An identifier must begin with a letter and must contain only ASCII letters, digits, and hyphens; it can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.
- engine_family(EngineFamily) / set_engine_family(Option<EngineFamily>):
 The kinds of databases that the proxy can connect to. This value determines which database network protocol the proxy recognizes when it interprets network traffic to and from the database. For Aurora MySQL, RDS for MariaDB, and RDS for MySQL databases, specify MYSQL. For Aurora PostgreSQL and RDS for PostgreSQL databases, specify POSTGRESQL.
- auth(Vec<UserAuthConfig>) / set_auth(Option<Vec<UserAuthConfig>>):
 The authorization mechanism that the proxy uses.
- role_arn(impl Into<String>) / set_role_arn(Option<String>):
 The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role that the proxy uses to access secrets in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager.
- vpc_subnet_ids(Vec<String>) / set_vpc_subnet_ids(Option<Vec<String>>):
 One or more VPC subnet IDs to associate with the new proxy.
- vpc_security_group_ids(Vec<String>) / set_vpc_security_group_ids(Option<Vec<String>>):
 One or more VPC security group IDs to associate with the new proxy.
- require_tls(bool) / set_require_tls(bool):
 A Boolean parameter that specifies whether Transport Layer Security (TLS) encryption is required for connections to the proxy. By enabling this setting, you can enforce encrypted TLS connections to the proxy.
- idle_client_timeout(i32) / set_idle_client_timeout(Option<i32>):
 The number of seconds that a connection to the proxy can be inactive before the proxy disconnects it. You can set this value higher or lower than the connection timeout limit for the associated database.
- debug_logging(bool) / set_debug_logging(bool):
 Whether the proxy includes detailed information about SQL statements in its logs. This information helps you to debug issues involving SQL behavior or the performance and scalability of the proxy connections. The debug information includes the text of SQL statements that you submit through the proxy. Thus, only enable this setting when needed for debugging, and only when you have security measures in place to safeguard any sensitive information that appears in the logs.
- tags(Vec<Tag>) / set_tags(Option<Vec<Tag>>):
 An optional set of key-value pairs to associate arbitrary data of your choosing with the proxy.
On success, responds with CreateDbProxyOutput with field(s):
- db_proxy(Option<DbProxy>):
 The DBProxy structure corresponding to the new proxy.
On failure, responds with SdkError<CreateDBProxyError>

source

pub fn create_db_proxy_endpoint(&self) -> CreateDBProxyEndpoint

Constructs a fluent builder for the CreateDBProxyEndpoint operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_proxy_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_proxy_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the DB proxy associated with the DB proxy endpoint that you create.
- db_proxy_endpoint_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_proxy_endpoint_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the DB proxy endpoint to create.
- vpc_subnet_ids(Vec<String>) / set_vpc_subnet_ids(Option<Vec<String>>):
 The VPC subnet IDs for the DB proxy endpoint that you create. You can specify a different set of subnet IDs than for the original DB proxy.
- vpc_security_group_ids(Vec<String>) / set_vpc_security_group_ids(Option<Vec<String>>):
 The VPC security group IDs for the DB proxy endpoint that you create. You can specify a different set of security group IDs than for the original DB proxy. The default is the default security group for the VPC.
- target_role(DbProxyEndpointTargetRole) / set_target_role(Option<DbProxyEndpointTargetRole>):
 A value that indicates whether the DB proxy endpoint can be used for read/write or read-only operations. The default is READ_WRITE.
- tags(Vec<Tag>) / set_tags(Option<Vec<Tag>>):
 A list of tags. For more information, see Tagging Amazon RDS Resources in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
On success, responds with CreateDbProxyEndpointOutput with field(s):
- db_proxy_endpoint(Option<DbProxyEndpoint>):
 The DBProxyEndpoint object that is created by the API operation. The DB proxy endpoint that you create might provide capabilities such as read/write or read-only operations, or using a different VPC than the proxy’s default VPC.
On failure, responds with SdkError<CreateDBProxyEndpointError>

source

pub fn create_db_security_group(&self) -> CreateDBSecurityGroup

Constructs a fluent builder for the CreateDBSecurityGroup operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_security_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_security_group_name(Option<String>):
 The name for the DB security group. This value is stored as a lowercase string.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must be 1 to 255 letters, numbers, or hyphens.
 - First character must be a letter
 - Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens
 - Must not be “Default”
 Example: mysecuritygroup
- db_security_group_description(impl Into<String>) / set_db_security_group_description(Option<String>):
 The description for the DB security group.
- tags(Vec<Tag>) / set_tags(Option<Vec<Tag>>):
 Tags to assign to the DB security group.
On success, responds with CreateDbSecurityGroupOutput with field(s):
- db_security_group(Option<DbSecurityGroup>):
 Contains the details for an Amazon RDS DB security group.
 
 This data type is used as a response element in the DescribeDBSecurityGroups action.
On failure, responds with SdkError<CreateDBSecurityGroupError>

source

pub fn create_db_snapshot(&self) -> CreateDBSnapshot

Constructs a fluent builder for the CreateDBSnapshot operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_snapshot_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_snapshot_identifier(Option<String>):
 The identifier for the DB snapshot.
 
 Constraints:
 - Can’t be null, empty, or blank
 - Must contain from 1 to 255 letters, numbers, or hyphens
 - First character must be a letter
 - Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens
 Example: my-snapshot-id
- db_instance_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_instance_identifier(Option<String>):
 The identifier of the DB instance that you want to create the snapshot of.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must match the identifier of an existing DBInstance.
- tags(Vec<Tag>) / set_tags(Option<Vec<Tag>>):
 A list of tags. For more information, see Tagging Amazon RDS Resources in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
On success, responds with CreateDbSnapshotOutput with field(s):
- db_snapshot(Option<DbSnapshot>):
 Contains the details of an Amazon RDS DB snapshot.
 
 This data type is used as a response element in the DescribeDBSnapshots action.
On failure, responds with SdkError<CreateDBSnapshotError>

source

pub fn create_db_subnet_group(&self) -> CreateDBSubnetGroup

Constructs a fluent builder for the CreateDBSubnetGroup operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_subnet_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_subnet_group_name(Option<String>):
 The name for the DB subnet group. This value is stored as a lowercase string.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must contain no more than 255 letters, numbers, periods, underscores, spaces, or hyphens.
 - Must not be default.
 - First character must be a letter.
 Example: mydbsubnetgroup
- db_subnet_group_description(impl Into<String>) / set_db_subnet_group_description(Option<String>):
 The description for the DB subnet group.
- subnet_ids(Vec<String>) / set_subnet_ids(Option<Vec<String>>):
 The EC2 Subnet IDs for the DB subnet group.
- tags(Vec<Tag>) / set_tags(Option<Vec<Tag>>):
 Tags to assign to the DB subnet group.
On success, responds with CreateDbSubnetGroupOutput with field(s):
- db_subnet_group(Option<DbSubnetGroup>):
 Contains the details of an Amazon RDS DB subnet group.
 
 This data type is used as a response element in the DescribeDBSubnetGroups action.
On failure, responds with SdkError<CreateDBSubnetGroupError>

source

pub fn create_event_subscription(&self) -> CreateEventSubscription

Constructs a fluent builder for the CreateEventSubscription operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- subscription_name(impl Into<String>) / set_subscription_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the subscription.
 
 Constraints: The name must be less than 255 characters.
- sns_topic_arn(impl Into<String>) / set_sns_topic_arn(Option<String>):
 The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the SNS topic created for event notification. The ARN is created by Amazon SNS when you create a topic and subscribe to it.
- source_type(impl Into<String>) / set_source_type(Option<String>):
 The type of source that is generating the events. For example, if you want to be notified of events generated by a DB instance, you set this parameter to db-instance. For RDS Proxy events, specify db-proxy. If this value isn’t specified, all events are returned.
 
 Valid values: db-instance | db-cluster | db-parameter-group | db-security-group | db-snapshot | db-cluster-snapshot | db-proxy
- event_categories(Vec<String>) / set_event_categories(Option<Vec<String>>):
 A list of event categories for a particular source type (SourceType) that you want to subscribe to. You can see a list of the categories for a given source type in the “Amazon RDS event categories and event messages” section of the Amazon RDS User Guide or the Amazon Aurora User Guide . You can also see this list by using the DescribeEventCategories operation.
- source_ids(Vec<String>) / set_source_ids(Option<Vec<String>>):
 The list of identifiers of the event sources for which events are returned. If not specified, then all sources are included in the response. An identifier must begin with a letter and must contain only ASCII letters, digits, and hyphens. It can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.
 
 Constraints:
 - If SourceIds are supplied, SourceType must also be provided.
 - If the source type is a DB instance, a DBInstanceIdentifier value must be supplied.
 - If the source type is a DB cluster, a DBClusterIdentifier value must be supplied.
 - If the source type is a DB parameter group, a DBParameterGroupName value must be supplied.
 - If the source type is a DB security group, a DBSecurityGroupName value must be supplied.
 - If the source type is a DB snapshot, a DBSnapshotIdentifier value must be supplied.
 - If the source type is a DB cluster snapshot, a DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier value must be supplied.
 - If the source type is an RDS Proxy, a DBProxyName value must be supplied.
- enabled(bool) / set_enabled(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether to activate the subscription. If the event notification subscription isn’t activated, the subscription is created but not active.
- tags(Vec<Tag>) / set_tags(Option<Vec<Tag>>):
 A list of tags. For more information, see Tagging Amazon RDS Resources in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
On success, responds with CreateEventSubscriptionOutput with field(s):
- event_subscription(Option<EventSubscription>):
 Contains the results of a successful invocation of the DescribeEventSubscriptions action.
On failure, responds with SdkError<CreateEventSubscriptionError>

source

pub fn create_global_cluster(&self) -> CreateGlobalCluster

Constructs a fluent builder for the CreateGlobalCluster operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- global_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_global_cluster_identifier(Option<String>):
 The cluster identifier of the new global database cluster.
- source_db_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_source_db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>):
 The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) to use as the primary cluster of the global database. This parameter is optional.
- engine(impl Into<String>) / set_engine(Option<String>):
 The name of the database engine to be used for this DB cluster.
- engine_version(impl Into<String>) / set_engine_version(Option<String>):
 The engine version of the Aurora global database.
- deletion_protection(bool) / set_deletion_protection(Option<bool>):
 The deletion protection setting for the new global database. The global database can’t be deleted when deletion protection is enabled.
- database_name(impl Into<String>) / set_database_name(Option<String>):
 The name for your database of up to 64 alphanumeric characters. If you do not provide a name, Amazon Aurora will not create a database in the global database cluster you are creating.
- storage_encrypted(bool) / set_storage_encrypted(Option<bool>):
 The storage encryption setting for the new global database cluster.
On success, responds with CreateGlobalClusterOutput with field(s):
- global_cluster(Option<GlobalCluster>):
 A data type representing an Aurora global database.
On failure, responds with SdkError<CreateGlobalClusterError>

source

pub fn create_option_group(&self) -> CreateOptionGroup

Constructs a fluent builder for the CreateOptionGroup operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- option_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_option_group_name(Option<String>):
 Specifies the name of the option group to be created.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must be 1 to 255 letters, numbers, or hyphens
 - First character must be a letter
 - Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens
 Example: myoptiongroup
- engine_name(impl Into<String>) / set_engine_name(Option<String>):
 Specifies the name of the engine that this option group should be associated with.
 
 Valid Values:
 - mariadb
 - mysql
 - oracle-ee
 - oracle-ee-cdb
 - oracle-se2
 - oracle-se2-cdb
 - postgres
 - sqlserver-ee
 - sqlserver-se
 - sqlserver-ex
 - sqlserver-web
- major_engine_version(impl Into<String>) / set_major_engine_version(Option<String>):
 Specifies the major version of the engine that this option group should be associated with.
- option_group_description(impl Into<String>) / set_option_group_description(Option<String>):
 The description of the option group.
- tags(Vec<Tag>) / set_tags(Option<Vec<Tag>>):
 Tags to assign to the option group.
On success, responds with CreateOptionGroupOutput with field(s):
- option_group(Option<OptionGroup>):
On failure, responds with SdkError<CreateOptionGroupError>

source

pub fn delete_custom_db_engine_version(&self) -> DeleteCustomDBEngineVersion

Constructs a fluent builder for the DeleteCustomDBEngineVersion operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- engine(impl Into<String>) / set_engine(Option<String>):
 The database engine. The only supported engine is custom-oracle-ee.
- engine_version(impl Into<String>) / set_engine_version(Option<String>):
 The custom engine version (CEV) for your DB instance. This option is required for RDS Custom, but optional for Amazon RDS. The combination of Engine and EngineVersion is unique per customer per Amazon Web Services Region.
On success, responds with DeleteCustomDbEngineVersionOutput with field(s):
- engine(Option<String>):
 The name of the database engine.
- engine_version(Option<String>):
 The version number of the database engine.
- db_parameter_group_family(Option<String>):
 The name of the DB parameter group family for the database engine.
- db_engine_description(Option<String>):
 The description of the database engine.
- db_engine_version_description(Option<String>):
 The description of the database engine version.
- default_character_set(Option<CharacterSet>):
 The default character set for new instances of this engine version, if the CharacterSetName parameter of the CreateDBInstance API isn’t specified.
- supported_character_sets(Option<Vec<CharacterSet>>):
 A list of the character sets supported by this engine for the CharacterSetName parameter of the CreateDBInstance operation.
- supported_nchar_character_sets(Option<Vec<CharacterSet>>):
 A list of the character sets supported by the Oracle DB engine for the NcharCharacterSetName parameter of the CreateDBInstance operation.
- valid_upgrade_target(Option<Vec<UpgradeTarget>>):
 A list of engine versions that this database engine version can be upgraded to.
- supported_timezones(Option<Vec<Timezone>>):
 A list of the time zones supported by this engine for the Timezone parameter of the CreateDBInstance action.
- exportable_log_types(Option<Vec<String>>):
 The types of logs that the database engine has available for export to CloudWatch Logs.
- supports_log_exports_to_cloudwatch_logs(bool):
 A value that indicates whether the engine version supports exporting the log types specified by ExportableLogTypes to CloudWatch Logs.
- supports_read_replica(bool):
 Indicates whether the database engine version supports read replicas.
- supported_engine_modes(Option<Vec<String>>):
 A list of the supported DB engine modes.
- supported_feature_names(Option<Vec<String>>):
 A list of features supported by the DB engine.
 
 The supported features vary by DB engine and DB engine version.
 
 To determine the supported features for a specific DB engine and DB engine version using the CLI, use the following command:
 
 aws rds describe-db-engine-versions –engine <engine_name> –engine-version <engine_version></engine_version> </engine_name>
 
 For example, to determine the supported features for RDS for PostgreSQL version 13.3 using the CLI, use the following command:
 
 aws rds describe-db-engine-versions –engine postgres –engine-version 13.3
 
 The supported features are listed under SupportedFeatureNames in the output.
- status(Option<String>):
 The status of the DB engine version, either available or deprecated.
- supports_parallel_query(bool):
 A value that indicates whether you can use Aurora parallel query with a specific DB engine version.
- supports_global_databases(bool):
 A value that indicates whether you can use Aurora global databases with a specific DB engine version.
- major_engine_version(Option<String>):
 The major engine version of the CEV.
- database_installation_files_s3_bucket_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the Amazon S3 bucket that contains your database installation files.
- database_installation_files_s3_prefix(Option<String>):
 The Amazon S3 directory that contains the database installation files. If not specified, then no prefix is assumed.
- db_engine_version_arn(Option<String>):
 The ARN of the custom engine version.
- kms_key_id(Option<String>):
 The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for an encrypted CEV. This parameter is required for RDS Custom, but optional for Amazon RDS.
- create_time(Option<DateTime>):
 The creation time of the DB engine version.
- tag_list(Option<Vec<Tag>>):
 A list of tags. For more information, see Tagging Amazon RDS Resources in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
- supports_babelfish(bool):
 A value that indicates whether the engine version supports Babelfish for Aurora PostgreSQL.
On failure, responds with SdkError<DeleteCustomDBEngineVersionError>

source

pub fn delete_db_cluster(&self) -> DeleteDBCluster

Constructs a fluent builder for the DeleteDBCluster operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>):
 The DB cluster identifier for the DB cluster to be deleted. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must match an existing DBClusterIdentifier.
- skip_final_snapshot(bool) / set_skip_final_snapshot(bool):
 A value that indicates whether to skip the creation of a final DB cluster snapshot before the DB cluster is deleted. If skip is specified, no DB cluster snapshot is created. If skip isn’t specified, a DB cluster snapshot is created before the DB cluster is deleted. By default, skip isn’t specified, and the DB cluster snapshot is created. By default, this parameter is disabled.
 
 You must specify a FinalDBSnapshotIdentifier parameter if SkipFinalSnapshot is disabled.
- final_db_snapshot_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_final_db_snapshot_identifier(Option<String>):
 The DB cluster snapshot identifier of the new DB cluster snapshot created when SkipFinalSnapshot is disabled.
 
 Specifying this parameter and also skipping the creation of a final DB cluster snapshot with the SkipFinalShapshot parameter results in an error.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must be 1 to 255 letters, numbers, or hyphens.
 - First character must be a letter
 - Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens
On success, responds with DeleteDbClusterOutput with field(s):
- db_cluster(Option<DbCluster>):
 Contains the details of an Amazon Aurora DB cluster or Multi-AZ DB cluster.
 
 For an Amazon Aurora DB cluster, this data type is used as a response element in the operations CreateDBCluster, DeleteDBCluster, DescribeDBClusters, FailoverDBCluster, ModifyDBCluster, PromoteReadReplicaDBCluster, RestoreDBClusterFromS3, RestoreDBClusterFromSnapshot, RestoreDBClusterToPointInTime, StartDBCluster, and StopDBCluster.
 
 For a Multi-AZ DB cluster, this data type is used as a response element in the operations CreateDBCluster, DeleteDBCluster, DescribeDBClusters, FailoverDBCluster, ModifyDBCluster, RebootDBCluster, RestoreDBClusterFromSnapshot, and RestoreDBClusterToPointInTime.
 
 For more information on Amazon Aurora DB clusters, see What is Amazon Aurora? in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
 
 For more information on Multi-AZ DB clusters, see Multi-AZ deployments with two readable standby DB instances in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
On failure, responds with SdkError<DeleteDBClusterError>

source

pub fn delete_db_cluster_endpoint(&self) -> DeleteDBClusterEndpoint

Constructs a fluent builder for the DeleteDBClusterEndpoint operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_cluster_endpoint_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_cluster_endpoint_identifier(Option<String>):
 The identifier associated with the custom endpoint. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.
On success, responds with DeleteDbClusterEndpointOutput with field(s):
- db_cluster_endpoint_identifier(Option<String>):
 The identifier associated with the endpoint. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.
- db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>):
 The DB cluster identifier of the DB cluster associated with the endpoint. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.
- db_cluster_endpoint_resource_identifier(Option<String>):
 A unique system-generated identifier for an endpoint. It remains the same for the whole life of the endpoint.
- endpoint(Option<String>):
 The DNS address of the endpoint.
- status(Option<String>):
 The current status of the endpoint. One of: creating, available, deleting, inactive, modifying. The inactive state applies to an endpoint that can’t be used for a certain kind of cluster, such as a writer endpoint for a read-only secondary cluster in a global database.
- endpoint_type(Option<String>):
 The type of the endpoint. One of: READER, WRITER, CUSTOM.
- custom_endpoint_type(Option<String>):
 The type associated with a custom endpoint. One of: READER, WRITER, ANY.
- static_members(Option<Vec<String>>):
 List of DB instance identifiers that are part of the custom endpoint group.
- excluded_members(Option<Vec<String>>):
 List of DB instance identifiers that aren’t part of the custom endpoint group. All other eligible instances are reachable through the custom endpoint. Only relevant if the list of static members is empty.
- db_cluster_endpoint_arn(Option<String>):
 The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the endpoint.
On failure, responds with SdkError<DeleteDBClusterEndpointError>

source

pub fn delete_db_cluster_parameter_group(&self) -> DeleteDBClusterParameterGroup

Constructs a fluent builder for the DeleteDBClusterParameterGroup operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_cluster_parameter_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_cluster_parameter_group_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the DB cluster parameter group.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must be the name of an existing DB cluster parameter group.
 - You can’t delete a default DB cluster parameter group.
 - Can’t be associated with any DB clusters.
On success, responds with DeleteDbClusterParameterGroupOutput
On failure, responds with SdkError<DeleteDBClusterParameterGroupError>

source

pub fn delete_db_cluster_snapshot(&self) -> DeleteDBClusterSnapshot

Constructs a fluent builder for the DeleteDBClusterSnapshot operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_cluster_snapshot_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_cluster_snapshot_identifier(Option<String>):
 The identifier of the DB cluster snapshot to delete.
 
 Constraints: Must be the name of an existing DB cluster snapshot in the available state.
On success, responds with DeleteDbClusterSnapshotOutput with field(s):
- db_cluster_snapshot(Option<DbClusterSnapshot>):
 Contains the details for an Amazon RDS DB cluster snapshot
 
 This data type is used as a response element in the DescribeDBClusterSnapshots action.
On failure, responds with SdkError<DeleteDBClusterSnapshotError>

source

pub fn delete_db_instance(&self) -> DeleteDBInstance

Constructs a fluent builder for the DeleteDBInstance operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_instance_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_instance_identifier(Option<String>):
 The DB instance identifier for the DB instance to be deleted. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must match the name of an existing DB instance.
- skip_final_snapshot(bool) / set_skip_final_snapshot(bool):
 A value that indicates whether to skip the creation of a final DB snapshot before deleting the instance. If you enable this parameter, RDS doesn’t create a DB snapshot. If you don’t enable this parameter, RDS creates a DB snapshot before the DB instance is deleted. By default, skip isn’t enabled, and the DB snapshot is created.
 
 If you don’t enable this parameter, you must specify the FinalDBSnapshotIdentifier parameter.
 
 When a DB instance is in a failure state and has a status of failed, incompatible-restore, or incompatible-network, RDS can delete the instance only if you enable this parameter.
 
 If you delete a read replica or an RDS Custom instance, you must enable this setting.
 
 This setting is required for RDS Custom.
- final_db_snapshot_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_final_db_snapshot_identifier(Option<String>):
 The DBSnapshotIdentifier of the new DBSnapshot created when the SkipFinalSnapshot parameter is disabled.
 
 If you enable this parameter and also enable SkipFinalShapshot, the command results in an error.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must be 1 to 255 letters or numbers.
 - First character must be a letter.
 - Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.
 - Can’t be specified when deleting a read replica.
- delete_automated_backups(bool) / set_delete_automated_backups(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether to remove automated backups immediately after the DB instance is deleted. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive. The default is to remove automated backups immediately after the DB instance is deleted.
On success, responds with DeleteDbInstanceOutput with field(s):
- db_instance(Option<DbInstance>):
 Contains the details of an Amazon RDS DB instance.
 
 This data type is used as a response element in the operations CreateDBInstance, CreateDBInstanceReadReplica, DeleteDBInstance, DescribeDBInstances, ModifyDBInstance, PromoteReadReplica, RebootDBInstance, RestoreDBInstanceFromDBSnapshot, RestoreDBInstanceFromS3, RestoreDBInstanceToPointInTime, StartDBInstance, and StopDBInstance.
On failure, responds with SdkError<DeleteDBInstanceError>

source

pub fn delete_db_instance_automated_backup(
&self
) -> DeleteDBInstanceAutomatedBackup

Constructs a fluent builder for the DeleteDBInstanceAutomatedBackup operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- dbi_resource_id(impl Into<String>) / set_dbi_resource_id(Option<String>):
 The identifier for the source DB instance, which can’t be changed and which is unique to an Amazon Web Services Region.
- db_instance_automated_backups_arn(impl Into<String>) / set_db_instance_automated_backups_arn(Option<String>):
 The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the automated backups to delete, for example, arn:aws:rds:us-east-1:123456789012:auto-backup:ab-L2IJCEXJP7XQ7HOJ4SIEXAMPLE.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
On success, responds with DeleteDbInstanceAutomatedBackupOutput with field(s):
- db_instance_automated_backup(Option<DbInstanceAutomatedBackup>):
 An automated backup of a DB instance. It consists of system backups, transaction logs, and the database instance properties that existed at the time you deleted the source instance.
On failure, responds with SdkError<DeleteDBInstanceAutomatedBackupError>

source

pub fn delete_db_parameter_group(&self) -> DeleteDBParameterGroup

Constructs a fluent builder for the DeleteDBParameterGroup operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_parameter_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_parameter_group_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the DB parameter group.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must be the name of an existing DB parameter group
 - You can’t delete a default DB parameter group
 - Can’t be associated with any DB instances
On success, responds with DeleteDbParameterGroupOutput
On failure, responds with SdkError<DeleteDBParameterGroupError>

source

pub fn delete_db_proxy(&self) -> DeleteDBProxy

Constructs a fluent builder for the DeleteDBProxy operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_proxy_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_proxy_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the DB proxy to delete.
On success, responds with DeleteDbProxyOutput with field(s):
- db_proxy(Option<DbProxy>):
 The data structure representing the details of the DB proxy that you delete.
On failure, responds with SdkError<DeleteDBProxyError>

source

pub fn delete_db_proxy_endpoint(&self) -> DeleteDBProxyEndpoint

Constructs a fluent builder for the DeleteDBProxyEndpoint operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_proxy_endpoint_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_proxy_endpoint_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the DB proxy endpoint to delete.
On success, responds with DeleteDbProxyEndpointOutput with field(s):
- db_proxy_endpoint(Option<DbProxyEndpoint>):
 The data structure representing the details of the DB proxy endpoint that you delete.
On failure, responds with SdkError<DeleteDBProxyEndpointError>

source

pub fn delete_db_security_group(&self) -> DeleteDBSecurityGroup

Constructs a fluent builder for the DeleteDBSecurityGroup operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_security_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_security_group_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the DB security group to delete.
 
 You can’t delete the default DB security group.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must be 1 to 255 letters, numbers, or hyphens.
 - First character must be a letter
 - Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens
 - Must not be “Default”
On success, responds with DeleteDbSecurityGroupOutput
On failure, responds with SdkError<DeleteDBSecurityGroupError>

source

pub fn delete_db_snapshot(&self) -> DeleteDBSnapshot

Constructs a fluent builder for the DeleteDBSnapshot operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_snapshot_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_snapshot_identifier(Option<String>):
 The DB snapshot identifier.
 
 Constraints: Must be the name of an existing DB snapshot in the available state.
On success, responds with DeleteDbSnapshotOutput with field(s):
- db_snapshot(Option<DbSnapshot>):
 Contains the details of an Amazon RDS DB snapshot.
 
 This data type is used as a response element in the DescribeDBSnapshots action.
On failure, responds with SdkError<DeleteDBSnapshotError>

source

pub fn delete_db_subnet_group(&self) -> DeleteDBSubnetGroup

Constructs a fluent builder for the DeleteDBSubnetGroup operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_subnet_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_subnet_group_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the database subnet group to delete.
 
 You can’t delete the default subnet group.
 
 Constraints: Must match the name of an existing DBSubnetGroup. Must not be default.
 
 Example: mydbsubnetgroup
On success, responds with DeleteDbSubnetGroupOutput
On failure, responds with SdkError<DeleteDBSubnetGroupError>

source

pub fn delete_event_subscription(&self) -> DeleteEventSubscription

Constructs a fluent builder for the DeleteEventSubscription operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- subscription_name(impl Into<String>) / set_subscription_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the RDS event notification subscription you want to delete.
On success, responds with DeleteEventSubscriptionOutput with field(s):
- event_subscription(Option<EventSubscription>):
 Contains the results of a successful invocation of the DescribeEventSubscriptions action.
On failure, responds with SdkError<DeleteEventSubscriptionError>

source

pub fn delete_global_cluster(&self) -> DeleteGlobalCluster

Constructs a fluent builder for the DeleteGlobalCluster operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- global_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_global_cluster_identifier(Option<String>):
 The cluster identifier of the global database cluster being deleted.
On success, responds with DeleteGlobalClusterOutput with field(s):
- global_cluster(Option<GlobalCluster>):
 A data type representing an Aurora global database.
On failure, responds with SdkError<DeleteGlobalClusterError>

source

pub fn delete_option_group(&self) -> DeleteOptionGroup

Constructs a fluent builder for the DeleteOptionGroup operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- option_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_option_group_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the option group to be deleted.
 
 You can’t delete default option groups.
On success, responds with DeleteOptionGroupOutput
On failure, responds with SdkError<DeleteOptionGroupError>

source

pub fn deregister_db_proxy_targets(&self) -> DeregisterDBProxyTargets

Constructs a fluent builder for the DeregisterDBProxyTargets operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_proxy_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_proxy_name(Option<String>):
 The identifier of the DBProxy that is associated with the DBProxyTargetGroup.
- target_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_target_group_name(Option<String>):
 The identifier of the DBProxyTargetGroup.
- db_instance_identifiers(Vec<String>) / set_db_instance_identifiers(Option<Vec<String>>):
 One or more DB instance identifiers.
- db_cluster_identifiers(Vec<String>) / set_db_cluster_identifiers(Option<Vec<String>>):
 One or more DB cluster identifiers.
On success, responds with DeregisterDbProxyTargetsOutput
On failure, responds with SdkError<DeregisterDBProxyTargetsError>

source

pub fn describe_account_attributes(&self) -> DescribeAccountAttributes

Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeAccountAttributes operation.

The fluent builder takes no input, just send it.
On success, responds with DescribeAccountAttributesOutput with field(s):
- account_quotas(Option<Vec<AccountQuota>>):
 A list of AccountQuota objects. Within this list, each quota has a name, a count of usage toward the quota maximum, and a maximum value for the quota.
On failure, responds with SdkError<DescribeAccountAttributesError>

source

pub fn describe_certificates(&self) -> DescribeCertificates

Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeCertificates operation. This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator().

The fluent builder is configurable:
- certificate_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_certificate_identifier(Option<String>):
 The user-supplied certificate identifier. If this parameter is specified, information for only the identified certificate is returned. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must match an existing CertificateIdentifier.
- filters(Vec<Filter>) / set_filters(Option<Vec<Filter>>):
 This parameter isn’t currently supported.
- max_records(i32) / set_max_records(Option<i32>):
 The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so you can retrieve the remaining results.
 
 Default: 100
 
 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
- marker(impl Into<String>) / set_marker(Option<String>):
 An optional pagination token provided by a previous DescribeCertificates request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.
On success, responds with DescribeCertificatesOutput with field(s):
- certificates(Option<Vec<Certificate>>):
 The list of Certificate objects for the Amazon Web Services account.
- marker(Option<String>):
 An optional pagination token provided by a previous DescribeCertificates request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords .
On failure, responds with SdkError<DescribeCertificatesError>

source

pub fn describe_db_cluster_backtracks(&self) -> DescribeDBClusterBacktracks

Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeDBClusterBacktracks operation. This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator().

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>):
 The DB cluster identifier of the DB cluster to be described. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must contain from 1 to 63 alphanumeric characters or hyphens.
 - First character must be a letter.
 - Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.
 Example: my-cluster1
- backtrack_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_backtrack_identifier(Option<String>):
 If specified, this value is the backtrack identifier of the backtrack to be described.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must contain a valid universally unique identifier (UUID). For more information about UUIDs, see A Universally Unique Identifier (UUID) URN Namespace.
 Example: 123e4567-e89b-12d3-a456-426655440000
- filters(Vec<Filter>) / set_filters(Option<Vec<Filter>>):
 A filter that specifies one or more DB clusters to describe. Supported filters include the following:
 - db-cluster-backtrack-id - Accepts backtrack identifiers. The results list includes information about only the backtracks identified by these identifiers.
 - db-cluster-backtrack-status - Accepts any of the following backtrack status values:
 - applying
 - completed
 - failed
 - pending
 The results list includes information about only the backtracks identified by these values.
- max_records(i32) / set_max_records(Option<i32>):
 The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so you can retrieve the remaining results.
 
 Default: 100
 
 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
- marker(impl Into<String>) / set_marker(Option<String>):
 An optional pagination token provided by a previous DescribeDBClusterBacktracks request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.
On success, responds with DescribeDbClusterBacktracksOutput with field(s):
- marker(Option<String>):
 A pagination token that can be used in a later DescribeDBClusterBacktracks request.
- db_cluster_backtracks(Option<Vec<DbClusterBacktrack>>):
 Contains a list of backtracks for the user.
On failure, responds with SdkError<DescribeDBClusterBacktracksError>

source

pub fn describe_db_cluster_endpoints(&self) -> DescribeDBClusterEndpoints

Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeDBClusterEndpoints operation. This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator().

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>):
 The DB cluster identifier of the DB cluster associated with the endpoint. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.
- db_cluster_endpoint_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_cluster_endpoint_identifier(Option<String>):
 The identifier of the endpoint to describe. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.
- filters(Vec<Filter>) / set_filters(Option<Vec<Filter>>):
 A set of name-value pairs that define which endpoints to include in the output. The filters are specified as name-value pairs, in the format Name=endpoint_type,Values=endpoint_type1,endpoint_type2,…. Name can be one of: db-cluster-endpoint-type, db-cluster-endpoint-custom-type, db-cluster-endpoint-id, db-cluster-endpoint-status. Values for the db-cluster-endpoint-type filter can be one or more of: reader, writer, custom. Values for the db-cluster-endpoint-custom-type filter can be one or more of: reader, any. Values for the db-cluster-endpoint-status filter can be one or more of: available, creating, deleting, inactive, modifying.
- max_records(i32) / set_max_records(Option<i32>):
 The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so you can retrieve the remaining results.
 
 Default: 100
 
 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
- marker(impl Into<String>) / set_marker(Option<String>):
 An optional pagination token provided by a previous DescribeDBClusterEndpoints request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.
On success, responds with DescribeDbClusterEndpointsOutput with field(s):
- marker(Option<String>):
 An optional pagination token provided by a previous DescribeDBClusterEndpoints request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.
- db_cluster_endpoints(Option<Vec<DbClusterEndpoint>>):
 Contains the details of the endpoints associated with the cluster and matching any filter conditions.
On failure, responds with SdkError<DescribeDBClusterEndpointsError>

source

pub fn describe_db_cluster_parameter_groups(
&self
) -> DescribeDBClusterParameterGroups

Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeDBClusterParameterGroups operation. This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator().

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_cluster_parameter_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_cluster_parameter_group_name(Option<String>):
 The name of a specific DB cluster parameter group to return details for.
 
 Constraints:
 - If supplied, must match the name of an existing DBClusterParameterGroup.
- filters(Vec<Filter>) / set_filters(Option<Vec<Filter>>):
 This parameter isn’t currently supported.
- max_records(i32) / set_max_records(Option<i32>):
 The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so you can retrieve the remaining results.
 
 Default: 100
 
 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
- marker(impl Into<String>) / set_marker(Option<String>):
 An optional pagination token provided by a previous DescribeDBClusterParameterGroups request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.
On success, responds with DescribeDbClusterParameterGroupsOutput with field(s):
- marker(Option<String>):
 An optional pagination token provided by a previous DescribeDBClusterParameterGroups request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.
- db_cluster_parameter_groups(Option<Vec<DbClusterParameterGroup>>):
 A list of DB cluster parameter groups.
On failure, responds with SdkError<DescribeDBClusterParameterGroupsError>

source

pub fn describe_db_cluster_parameters(&self) -> DescribeDBClusterParameters

Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeDBClusterParameters operation. This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator().

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_cluster_parameter_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_cluster_parameter_group_name(Option<String>):
 The name of a specific DB cluster parameter group to return parameter details for.
 
 Constraints:
 - If supplied, must match the name of an existing DBClusterParameterGroup.
- source(impl Into<String>) / set_source(Option<String>):
 A value that indicates to return only parameters for a specific source. Parameter sources can be engine, service, or customer.
- filters(Vec<Filter>) / set_filters(Option<Vec<Filter>>):
 This parameter isn’t currently supported.
- max_records(i32) / set_max_records(Option<i32>):
 The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so you can retrieve the remaining results.
 
 Default: 100
 
 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
- marker(impl Into<String>) / set_marker(Option<String>):
 An optional pagination token provided by a previous DescribeDBClusterParameters request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.
On success, responds with DescribeDbClusterParametersOutput with field(s):
- parameters(Option<Vec<Parameter>>):
 Provides a list of parameters for the DB cluster parameter group.
- marker(Option<String>):
 An optional pagination token provided by a previous DescribeDBClusterParameters request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.
On failure, responds with SdkError<DescribeDBClusterParametersError>

source

pub fn describe_db_clusters(&self) -> DescribeDBClusters

Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeDBClusters operation. This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator().

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>):
 The user-supplied DB cluster identifier. If this parameter is specified, information from only the specific DB cluster is returned. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.
 
 Constraints:
 - If supplied, must match an existing DBClusterIdentifier.
- filters(Vec<Filter>) / set_filters(Option<Vec<Filter>>):
 A filter that specifies one or more DB clusters to describe.
 
 Supported filters:
 - clone-group-id - Accepts clone group identifiers. The results list only includes information about the DB clusters associated with these clone groups.
 - db-cluster-id - Accepts DB cluster identifiers and DB cluster Amazon Resource Names (ARNs). The results list only includes information about the DB clusters identified by these ARNs.
 - domain - Accepts Active Directory directory IDs. The results list only includes information about the DB clusters associated with these domains.
 - engine - Accepts engine names. The results list only includes information about the DB clusters for these engines.
- max_records(i32) / set_max_records(Option<i32>):
 The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so you can retrieve the remaining results.
 
 Default: 100
 
 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
- marker(impl Into<String>) / set_marker(Option<String>):
 An optional pagination token provided by a previous DescribeDBClusters request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.
- include_shared(bool) / set_include_shared(bool):
 Optional Boolean parameter that specifies whether the output includes information about clusters shared from other Amazon Web Services accounts.
On success, responds with DescribeDbClustersOutput with field(s):
- marker(Option<String>):
 A pagination token that can be used in a later DescribeDBClusters request.
- db_clusters(Option<Vec<DbCluster>>):
 Contains a list of DB clusters for the user.
On failure, responds with SdkError<DescribeDBClustersError>

source

pub fn describe_db_cluster_snapshot_attributes(
&self
) -> DescribeDBClusterSnapshotAttributes

Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeDBClusterSnapshotAttributes operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_cluster_snapshot_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_cluster_snapshot_identifier(Option<String>):
 The identifier for the DB cluster snapshot to describe the attributes for.
On success, responds with DescribeDbClusterSnapshotAttributesOutput with field(s):
- db_cluster_snapshot_attributes_result(Option<DbClusterSnapshotAttributesResult>):
 Contains the results of a successful call to the DescribeDBClusterSnapshotAttributes API action.
 
 Manual DB cluster snapshot attributes are used to authorize other Amazon Web Services accounts to copy or restore a manual DB cluster snapshot. For more information, see the ModifyDBClusterSnapshotAttribute API action.
On failure, responds with SdkError<DescribeDBClusterSnapshotAttributesError>

source

pub fn describe_db_cluster_snapshots(&self) -> DescribeDBClusterSnapshots

Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeDBClusterSnapshots operation. This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator().

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>):
 The ID of the DB cluster to retrieve the list of DB cluster snapshots for. This parameter can’t be used in conjunction with the DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier parameter. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.
 
 Constraints:
 - If supplied, must match the identifier of an existing DBCluster.
- db_cluster_snapshot_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_cluster_snapshot_identifier(Option<String>):
 A specific DB cluster snapshot identifier to describe. This parameter can’t be used in conjunction with the DBClusterIdentifier parameter. This value is stored as a lowercase string.
 
 Constraints:
 - If supplied, must match the identifier of an existing DBClusterSnapshot.
 - If this identifier is for an automated snapshot, the SnapshotType parameter must also be specified.
- snapshot_type(impl Into<String>) / set_snapshot_type(Option<String>):
 The type of DB cluster snapshots to be returned. You can specify one of the following values:
 - automated - Return all DB cluster snapshots that have been automatically taken by Amazon RDS for my Amazon Web Services account.
 - manual - Return all DB cluster snapshots that have been taken by my Amazon Web Services account.
 - shared - Return all manual DB cluster snapshots that have been shared to my Amazon Web Services account.
 - public - Return all DB cluster snapshots that have been marked as public.
 If you don’t specify a SnapshotType value, then both automated and manual DB cluster snapshots are returned. You can include shared DB cluster snapshots with these results by enabling the IncludeShared parameter. You can include public DB cluster snapshots with these results by enabling the IncludePublic parameter.
 
 The IncludeShared and IncludePublic parameters don’t apply for SnapshotType values of manual or automated. The IncludePublic parameter doesn’t apply when SnapshotType is set to shared. The IncludeShared parameter doesn’t apply when SnapshotType is set to public.
- filters(Vec<Filter>) / set_filters(Option<Vec<Filter>>):
 A filter that specifies one or more DB cluster snapshots to describe.
 
 Supported filters:
 - db-cluster-id - Accepts DB cluster identifiers and DB cluster Amazon Resource Names (ARNs).
 - db-cluster-snapshot-id - Accepts DB cluster snapshot identifiers.
 - snapshot-type - Accepts types of DB cluster snapshots.
 - engine - Accepts names of database engines.
- max_records(i32) / set_max_records(Option<i32>):
 The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so you can retrieve the remaining results.
 
 Default: 100
 
 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
- marker(impl Into<String>) / set_marker(Option<String>):
 An optional pagination token provided by a previous DescribeDBClusterSnapshots request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.
- include_shared(bool) / set_include_shared(bool):
 A value that indicates whether to include shared manual DB cluster snapshots from other Amazon Web Services accounts that this Amazon Web Services account has been given permission to copy or restore. By default, these snapshots are not included.
 
 You can give an Amazon Web Services account permission to restore a manual DB cluster snapshot from another Amazon Web Services account by the ModifyDBClusterSnapshotAttribute API action.
- include_public(bool) / set_include_public(bool):
 A value that indicates whether to include manual DB cluster snapshots that are public and can be copied or restored by any Amazon Web Services account. By default, the public snapshots are not included.
 
 You can share a manual DB cluster snapshot as public by using the ModifyDBClusterSnapshotAttribute API action.
On success, responds with DescribeDbClusterSnapshotsOutput with field(s):
- marker(Option<String>):
 An optional pagination token provided by a previous DescribeDBClusterSnapshots request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.
- db_cluster_snapshots(Option<Vec<DbClusterSnapshot>>):
 Provides a list of DB cluster snapshots for the user.
On failure, responds with SdkError<DescribeDBClusterSnapshotsError>

source

pub fn describe_db_engine_versions(&self) -> DescribeDBEngineVersions

Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeDBEngineVersions operation. This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator().

The fluent builder is configurable:
- engine(impl Into<String>) / set_engine(Option<String>):
 The database engine to return.
 
 Valid Values:
 - aurora (for MySQL 5.6-compatible Aurora)
 - aurora-mysql (for MySQL 5.7-compatible and MySQL 8.0-compatible Aurora)
 - aurora-postgresql
 - mariadb
 - mysql
 - oracle-ee
 - oracle-ee-cdb
 - oracle-se2
 - oracle-se2-cdb
 - postgres
 - sqlserver-ee
 - sqlserver-se
 - sqlserver-ex
 - sqlserver-web
- engine_version(impl Into<String>) / set_engine_version(Option<String>):
 The database engine version to return.
 
 Example: 5.1.49
- db_parameter_group_family(impl Into<String>) / set_db_parameter_group_family(Option<String>):
 The name of a specific DB parameter group family to return details for.
 
 Constraints:
 - If supplied, must match an existing DBParameterGroupFamily.
- filters(Vec<Filter>) / set_filters(Option<Vec<Filter>>):
 A filter that specifies one or more DB engine versions to describe.
 
 Supported filters:
 - db-parameter-group-family - Accepts parameter groups family names. The results list only includes information about the DB engine versions for these parameter group families.
 - engine - Accepts engine names. The results list only includes information about the DB engine versions for these engines.
 - engine-mode - Accepts DB engine modes. The results list only includes information about the DB engine versions for these engine modes. Valid DB engine modes are the following:
 - global
 - multimaster
 - parallelquery
 - provisioned
 - serverless
 - engine-version - Accepts engine versions. The results list only includes information about the DB engine versions for these engine versions.
 - status - Accepts engine version statuses. The results list only includes information about the DB engine versions for these statuses. Valid statuses are the following:
 - available
 - deprecated
- max_records(i32) / set_max_records(Option<i32>):
 The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more than the MaxRecords value is available, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so you can retrieve the remaining results.
 
 Default: 100
 
 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
- marker(impl Into<String>) / set_marker(Option<String>):
 An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.
- default_only(bool) / set_default_only(bool):
 A value that indicates whether only the default version of the specified engine or engine and major version combination is returned.
- list_supported_character_sets(bool) / set_list_supported_character_sets(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether to list the supported character sets for each engine version.
 
 If this parameter is enabled and the requested engine supports the CharacterSetName parameter for CreateDBInstance, the response includes a list of supported character sets for each engine version.
 
 For RDS Custom, the default is not to list supported character sets. If you set ListSupportedCharacterSets to true, RDS Custom returns no results.
- list_supported_timezones(bool) / set_list_supported_timezones(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether to list the supported time zones for each engine version.
 
 If this parameter is enabled and the requested engine supports the TimeZone parameter for CreateDBInstance, the response includes a list of supported time zones for each engine version.
 
 For RDS Custom, the default is not to list supported time zones. If you set ListSupportedTimezones to true, RDS Custom returns no results.
- include_all(bool) / set_include_all(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether to include engine versions that aren’t available in the list. The default is to list only available engine versions.
On success, responds with DescribeDbEngineVersionsOutput with field(s):
- marker(Option<String>):
 An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.
- db_engine_versions(Option<Vec<DbEngineVersion>>):
 A list of DBEngineVersion elements.
On failure, responds with SdkError<DescribeDBEngineVersionsError>

source

pub fn describe_db_instance_automated_backups(
&self
) -> DescribeDBInstanceAutomatedBackups

Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeDBInstanceAutomatedBackups operation. This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator().

The fluent builder is configurable:
- dbi_resource_id(impl Into<String>) / set_dbi_resource_id(Option<String>):
 The resource ID of the DB instance that is the source of the automated backup. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.
- db_instance_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_instance_identifier(Option<String>):
 (Optional) The user-supplied instance identifier. If this parameter is specified, it must match the identifier of an existing DB instance. It returns information from the specific DB instance’ automated backup. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.
- filters(Vec<Filter>) / set_filters(Option<Vec<Filter>>):
 A filter that specifies which resources to return based on status.
 
 Supported filters are the following:
 - status
 - active - automated backups for current instances
 - retained - automated backups for deleted instances and after backup replication is stopped
 - creating - automated backups that are waiting for the first automated snapshot to be available
 - db-instance-id - Accepts DB instance identifiers and Amazon Resource Names (ARNs). The results list includes only information about the DB instance automated backups identified by these ARNs.
 - dbi-resource-id - Accepts DB resource identifiers and Amazon Resource Names (ARNs). The results list includes only information about the DB instance resources identified by these ARNs.
 Returns all resources by default. The status for each resource is specified in the response.
- max_records(i32) / set_max_records(Option<i32>):
 The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that you can retrieve the remaining results.
- marker(impl Into<String>) / set_marker(Option<String>):
 The pagination token provided in the previous request. If this parameter is specified the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to MaxRecords.
- db_instance_automated_backups_arn(impl Into<String>) / set_db_instance_automated_backups_arn(Option<String>):
 The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the replicated automated backups, for example, arn:aws:rds:us-east-1:123456789012:auto-backup:ab-L2IJCEXJP7XQ7HOJ4SIEXAMPLE.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
On success, responds with DescribeDbInstanceAutomatedBackupsOutput with field(s):
- marker(Option<String>):
 An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.
- db_instance_automated_backups(Option<Vec<DbInstanceAutomatedBackup>>):
 A list of DBInstanceAutomatedBackup instances.
On failure, responds with SdkError<DescribeDBInstanceAutomatedBackupsError>

source

pub fn describe_db_instances(&self) -> DescribeDBInstances

Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeDBInstances operation. This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator().

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_instance_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_instance_identifier(Option<String>):
 The user-supplied instance identifier. If this parameter is specified, information from only the specific DB instance is returned. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.
 
 Constraints:
 - If supplied, must match the identifier of an existing DBInstance.
- filters(Vec<Filter>) / set_filters(Option<Vec<Filter>>):
 A filter that specifies one or more DB instances to describe.
 
 Supported filters:
 - db-cluster-id - Accepts DB cluster identifiers and DB cluster Amazon Resource Names (ARNs). The results list only includes information about the DB instances associated with the DB clusters identified by these ARNs.
 - db-instance-id - Accepts DB instance identifiers and DB instance Amazon Resource Names (ARNs). The results list only includes information about the DB instances identified by these ARNs.
 - dbi-resource-id - Accepts DB instance resource identifiers. The results list will only include information about the DB instances identified by these DB instance resource identifiers.
 - domain - Accepts Active Directory directory IDs. The results list only includes information about the DB instances associated with these domains.
 - engine - Accepts engine names. The results list only includes information about the DB instances for these engines.
- max_records(i32) / set_max_records(Option<i32>):
 The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that you can retrieve the remaining results.
 
 Default: 100
 
 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
- marker(impl Into<String>) / set_marker(Option<String>):
 An optional pagination token provided by a previous DescribeDBInstances request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.
On success, responds with DescribeDbInstancesOutput with field(s):
- marker(Option<String>):
 An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords .
- db_instances(Option<Vec<DbInstance>>):
 A list of DBInstance instances.
On failure, responds with SdkError<DescribeDBInstancesError>

source

pub fn describe_db_log_files(&self) -> DescribeDBLogFiles

Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeDBLogFiles operation. This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator().

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_instance_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_instance_identifier(Option<String>):
 The customer-assigned name of the DB instance that contains the log files you want to list.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must match the identifier of an existing DBInstance.
- filename_contains(impl Into<String>) / set_filename_contains(Option<String>):
 Filters the available log files for log file names that contain the specified string.
- file_last_written(i64) / set_file_last_written(i64):
 Filters the available log files for files written since the specified date, in POSIX timestamp format with milliseconds.
- file_size(i64) / set_file_size(i64):
 Filters the available log files for files larger than the specified size.
- filters(Vec<Filter>) / set_filters(Option<Vec<Filter>>):
 This parameter isn’t currently supported.
- max_records(i32) / set_max_records(Option<i32>):
 The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so you can retrieve the remaining results.
- marker(impl Into<String>) / set_marker(Option<String>):
 The pagination token provided in the previous request. If this parameter is specified the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to MaxRecords.
On success, responds with DescribeDbLogFilesOutput with field(s):
- describe_db_log_files(Option<Vec<DescribeDbLogFilesDetails>>):
 The DB log files returned.
- marker(Option<String>):
 A pagination token that can be used in a later DescribeDBLogFiles request.
On failure, responds with SdkError<DescribeDBLogFilesError>

source

pub fn describe_db_parameter_groups(&self) -> DescribeDBParameterGroups

Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeDBParameterGroups operation. This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator().

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_parameter_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_parameter_group_name(Option<String>):
 The name of a specific DB parameter group to return details for.
 
 Constraints:
 - If supplied, must match the name of an existing DBClusterParameterGroup.
- filters(Vec<Filter>) / set_filters(Option<Vec<Filter>>):
 This parameter isn’t currently supported.
- max_records(i32) / set_max_records(Option<i32>):
 The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that you can retrieve the remaining results.
 
 Default: 100
 
 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
- marker(impl Into<String>) / set_marker(Option<String>):
 An optional pagination token provided by a previous DescribeDBParameterGroups request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.
On success, responds with DescribeDbParameterGroupsOutput with field(s):
- marker(Option<String>):
 An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.
- db_parameter_groups(Option<Vec<DbParameterGroup>>):
 A list of DBParameterGroup instances.
On failure, responds with SdkError<DescribeDBParameterGroupsError>

source

pub fn describe_db_parameters(&self) -> DescribeDBParameters

Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeDBParameters operation. This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator().

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_parameter_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_parameter_group_name(Option<String>):
 The name of a specific DB parameter group to return details for.
 
 Constraints:
 - If supplied, must match the name of an existing DBParameterGroup.
- source(impl Into<String>) / set_source(Option<String>):
 The parameter types to return.
 
 Default: All parameter types returned
 
 Valid Values: user | system | engine-default
- filters(Vec<Filter>) / set_filters(Option<Vec<Filter>>):
 This parameter isn’t currently supported.
- max_records(i32) / set_max_records(Option<i32>):
 The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that you can retrieve the remaining results.
 
 Default: 100
 
 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
- marker(impl Into<String>) / set_marker(Option<String>):
 An optional pagination token provided by a previous DescribeDBParameters request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.
On success, responds with DescribeDbParametersOutput with field(s):
- parameters(Option<Vec<Parameter>>):
 A list of Parameter values.
- marker(Option<String>):
 An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.
On failure, responds with SdkError<DescribeDBParametersError>

source

pub fn describe_db_proxies(&self) -> DescribeDBProxies

Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeDBProxies operation. This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator().

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_proxy_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_proxy_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the DB proxy. If you omit this parameter, the output includes information about all DB proxies owned by your Amazon Web Services account ID.
- filters(Vec<Filter>) / set_filters(Option<Vec<Filter>>):
 This parameter is not currently supported.
- marker(impl Into<String>) / set_marker(Option<String>):
 An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.
- max_records(i32) / set_max_records(Option<i32>):
 The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.
 
 Default: 100
 
 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
On success, responds with DescribeDbProxiesOutput with field(s):
- db_proxies(Option<Vec<DbProxy>>):
 A return value representing an arbitrary number of DBProxy data structures.
- marker(Option<String>):
 An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.
On failure, responds with SdkError<DescribeDBProxiesError>

source

pub fn describe_db_proxy_endpoints(&self) -> DescribeDBProxyEndpoints

Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeDBProxyEndpoints operation. This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator().

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_proxy_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_proxy_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the DB proxy whose endpoints you want to describe. If you omit this parameter, the output includes information about all DB proxy endpoints associated with all your DB proxies.
- db_proxy_endpoint_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_proxy_endpoint_name(Option<String>):
 The name of a DB proxy endpoint to describe. If you omit this parameter, the output includes information about all DB proxy endpoints associated with the specified proxy.
- filters(Vec<Filter>) / set_filters(Option<Vec<Filter>>):
 This parameter is not currently supported.
- marker(impl Into<String>) / set_marker(Option<String>):
 An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.
- max_records(i32) / set_max_records(Option<i32>):
 The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.
 
 Default: 100
 
 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
On success, responds with DescribeDbProxyEndpointsOutput with field(s):
- db_proxy_endpoints(Option<Vec<DbProxyEndpoint>>):
 The list of ProxyEndpoint objects returned by the API operation.
- marker(Option<String>):
 An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.
On failure, responds with SdkError<DescribeDBProxyEndpointsError>

source

pub fn describe_db_proxy_target_groups(&self) -> DescribeDBProxyTargetGroups

Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeDBProxyTargetGroups operation. This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator().

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_proxy_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_proxy_name(Option<String>):
 The identifier of the DBProxy associated with the target group.
- target_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_target_group_name(Option<String>):
 The identifier of the DBProxyTargetGroup to describe.
- filters(Vec<Filter>) / set_filters(Option<Vec<Filter>>):
 This parameter is not currently supported.
- marker(impl Into<String>) / set_marker(Option<String>):
 An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.
- max_records(i32) / set_max_records(Option<i32>):
 The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.
 
 Default: 100
 
 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
On success, responds with DescribeDbProxyTargetGroupsOutput with field(s):
- target_groups(Option<Vec<DbProxyTargetGroup>>):
 An arbitrary number of DBProxyTargetGroup objects, containing details of the corresponding target groups.
- marker(Option<String>):
 An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.
On failure, responds with SdkError<DescribeDBProxyTargetGroupsError>

source

pub fn describe_db_proxy_targets(&self) -> DescribeDBProxyTargets

Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeDBProxyTargets operation. This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator().

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_proxy_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_proxy_name(Option<String>):
 The identifier of the DBProxyTarget to describe.
- target_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_target_group_name(Option<String>):
 The identifier of the DBProxyTargetGroup to describe.
- filters(Vec<Filter>) / set_filters(Option<Vec<Filter>>):
 This parameter is not currently supported.
- marker(impl Into<String>) / set_marker(Option<String>):
 An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.
- max_records(i32) / set_max_records(Option<i32>):
 The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.
 
 Default: 100
 
 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
On success, responds with DescribeDbProxyTargetsOutput with field(s):
- targets(Option<Vec<DbProxyTarget>>):
 An arbitrary number of DBProxyTarget objects, containing details of the corresponding targets.
- marker(Option<String>):
 An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.
On failure, responds with SdkError<DescribeDBProxyTargetsError>

source

pub fn describe_db_security_groups(&self) -> DescribeDBSecurityGroups

Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeDBSecurityGroups operation. This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator().

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_security_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_security_group_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the DB security group to return details for.
- filters(Vec<Filter>) / set_filters(Option<Vec<Filter>>):
 This parameter isn’t currently supported.
- max_records(i32) / set_max_records(Option<i32>):
 The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that you can retrieve the remaining results.
 
 Default: 100
 
 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
- marker(impl Into<String>) / set_marker(Option<String>):
 An optional pagination token provided by a previous DescribeDBSecurityGroups request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.
On success, responds with DescribeDbSecurityGroupsOutput with field(s):
- marker(Option<String>):
 An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.
- db_security_groups(Option<Vec<DbSecurityGroup>>):
 A list of DBSecurityGroup instances.
On failure, responds with SdkError<DescribeDBSecurityGroupsError>

source

pub fn describe_db_snapshot_attributes(&self) -> DescribeDBSnapshotAttributes

Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeDBSnapshotAttributes operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_snapshot_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_snapshot_identifier(Option<String>):
 The identifier for the DB snapshot to describe the attributes for.
On success, responds with DescribeDbSnapshotAttributesOutput with field(s):
- db_snapshot_attributes_result(Option<DbSnapshotAttributesResult>):
 Contains the results of a successful call to the DescribeDBSnapshotAttributes API action.
 
 Manual DB snapshot attributes are used to authorize other Amazon Web Services accounts to copy or restore a manual DB snapshot. For more information, see the ModifyDBSnapshotAttribute API action.
On failure, responds with SdkError<DescribeDBSnapshotAttributesError>

source

pub fn describe_db_snapshots(&self) -> DescribeDBSnapshots

Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeDBSnapshots operation. This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator().

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_instance_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_instance_identifier(Option<String>):
 The ID of the DB instance to retrieve the list of DB snapshots for. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.
 
 Constraints:
 - If supplied, must match the identifier of an existing DBInstance.
- db_snapshot_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_snapshot_identifier(Option<String>):
 A specific DB snapshot identifier to describe. This value is stored as a lowercase string.
 
 Constraints:
 - If supplied, must match the identifier of an existing DBSnapshot.
 - If this identifier is for an automated snapshot, the SnapshotType parameter must also be specified.
- snapshot_type(impl Into<String>) / set_snapshot_type(Option<String>):
 The type of snapshots to be returned. You can specify one of the following values:
 - automated - Return all DB snapshots that have been automatically taken by Amazon RDS for my Amazon Web Services account.
 - manual - Return all DB snapshots that have been taken by my Amazon Web Services account.
 - shared - Return all manual DB snapshots that have been shared to my Amazon Web Services account.
 - public - Return all DB snapshots that have been marked as public.
 - awsbackup - Return the DB snapshots managed by the Amazon Web Services Backup service.
 
 For information about Amazon Web Services Backup, see the Amazon Web Services Backup Developer Guide.
 
 The awsbackup type does not apply to Aurora.
 If you don’t specify a SnapshotType value, then both automated and manual snapshots are returned. Shared and public DB snapshots are not included in the returned results by default. You can include shared snapshots with these results by enabling the IncludeShared parameter. You can include public snapshots with these results by enabling the IncludePublic parameter.
 
 The IncludeShared and IncludePublic parameters don’t apply for SnapshotType values of manual or automated. The IncludePublic parameter doesn’t apply when SnapshotType is set to shared. The IncludeShared parameter doesn’t apply when SnapshotType is set to public.
- filters(Vec<Filter>) / set_filters(Option<Vec<Filter>>):
 A filter that specifies one or more DB snapshots to describe.
 
 Supported filters:
 - db-instance-id - Accepts DB instance identifiers and DB instance Amazon Resource Names (ARNs).
 - db-snapshot-id - Accepts DB snapshot identifiers.
 - dbi-resource-id - Accepts identifiers of source DB instances.
 - snapshot-type - Accepts types of DB snapshots.
 - engine - Accepts names of database engines.
- max_records(i32) / set_max_records(Option<i32>):
 The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that you can retrieve the remaining results.
 
 Default: 100
 
 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
- marker(impl Into<String>) / set_marker(Option<String>):
 An optional pagination token provided by a previous DescribeDBSnapshots request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.
- include_shared(bool) / set_include_shared(bool):
 A value that indicates whether to include shared manual DB cluster snapshots from other Amazon Web Services accounts that this Amazon Web Services account has been given permission to copy or restore. By default, these snapshots are not included.
 
 You can give an Amazon Web Services account permission to restore a manual DB snapshot from another Amazon Web Services account by using the ModifyDBSnapshotAttribute API action.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- include_public(bool) / set_include_public(bool):
 A value that indicates whether to include manual DB cluster snapshots that are public and can be copied or restored by any Amazon Web Services account. By default, the public snapshots are not included.
 
 You can share a manual DB snapshot as public by using the ModifyDBSnapshotAttribute API.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- dbi_resource_id(impl Into<String>) / set_dbi_resource_id(Option<String>):
 A specific DB resource ID to describe.
On success, responds with DescribeDbSnapshotsOutput with field(s):
- marker(Option<String>):
 An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.
- db_snapshots(Option<Vec<DbSnapshot>>):
 A list of DBSnapshot instances.
On failure, responds with SdkError<DescribeDBSnapshotsError>

source

pub fn describe_db_subnet_groups(&self) -> DescribeDBSubnetGroups

Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeDBSubnetGroups operation. This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator().

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_subnet_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_subnet_group_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the DB subnet group to return details for.
- filters(Vec<Filter>) / set_filters(Option<Vec<Filter>>):
 This parameter isn’t currently supported.
- max_records(i32) / set_max_records(Option<i32>):
 The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that you can retrieve the remaining results.
 
 Default: 100
 
 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
- marker(impl Into<String>) / set_marker(Option<String>):
 An optional pagination token provided by a previous DescribeDBSubnetGroups request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.
On success, responds with DescribeDbSubnetGroupsOutput with field(s):
- marker(Option<String>):
 An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.
- db_subnet_groups(Option<Vec<DbSubnetGroup>>):
 A list of DBSubnetGroup instances.
On failure, responds with SdkError<DescribeDBSubnetGroupsError>

source

pub fn describe_engine_default_cluster_parameters(
&self
) -> DescribeEngineDefaultClusterParameters

Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeEngineDefaultClusterParameters operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_parameter_group_family(impl Into<String>) / set_db_parameter_group_family(Option<String>):
 The name of the DB cluster parameter group family to return engine parameter information for.
- filters(Vec<Filter>) / set_filters(Option<Vec<Filter>>):
 This parameter isn’t currently supported.
- max_records(i32) / set_max_records(Option<i32>):
 The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so you can retrieve the remaining results.
 
 Default: 100
 
 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
- marker(impl Into<String>) / set_marker(Option<String>):
 An optional pagination token provided by a previous DescribeEngineDefaultClusterParameters request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.
On success, responds with DescribeEngineDefaultClusterParametersOutput with field(s):
- engine_defaults(Option<EngineDefaults>):
 Contains the result of a successful invocation of the DescribeEngineDefaultParameters action.
On failure, responds with SdkError<DescribeEngineDefaultClusterParametersError>

source

pub fn describe_engine_default_parameters(
&self
) -> DescribeEngineDefaultParameters

Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeEngineDefaultParameters operation. This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator().

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_parameter_group_family(impl Into<String>) / set_db_parameter_group_family(Option<String>):
 The name of the DB parameter group family.
 
 Valid Values:
 - aurora5.6
 - aurora-mysql5.7
 - aurora-mysql8.0
 - aurora-postgresql10
 - aurora-postgresql11
 - aurora-postgresql12
 - aurora-postgresql13
 - mariadb10.2
 - mariadb10.3
 - mariadb10.4
 - mariadb10.5
 - mariadb10.6
 - mysql5.7
 - mysql8.0
 - postgres10
 - postgres11
 - postgres12
 - postgres13
 - postgres14
 - sqlserver-ee-11.0
 - sqlserver-ee-12.0
 - sqlserver-ee-13.0
 - sqlserver-ee-14.0
 - sqlserver-ee-15.0
 - sqlserver-ex-11.0
 - sqlserver-ex-12.0
 - sqlserver-ex-13.0
 - sqlserver-ex-14.0
 - sqlserver-ex-15.0
 - sqlserver-se-11.0
 - sqlserver-se-12.0
 - sqlserver-se-13.0
 - sqlserver-se-14.0
 - sqlserver-se-15.0
 - sqlserver-web-11.0
 - sqlserver-web-12.0
 - sqlserver-web-13.0
 - sqlserver-web-14.0
 - sqlserver-web-15.0
- filters(Vec<Filter>) / set_filters(Option<Vec<Filter>>):
 This parameter isn’t currently supported.
- max_records(i32) / set_max_records(Option<i32>):
 The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so you can retrieve the remaining results.
 
 Default: 100
 
 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
- marker(impl Into<String>) / set_marker(Option<String>):
 An optional pagination token provided by a previous DescribeEngineDefaultParameters request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.
On success, responds with DescribeEngineDefaultParametersOutput with field(s):
- engine_defaults(Option<EngineDefaults>):
 Contains the result of a successful invocation of the DescribeEngineDefaultParameters action.
On failure, responds with SdkError<DescribeEngineDefaultParametersError>

source

pub fn describe_event_categories(&self) -> DescribeEventCategories

Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeEventCategories operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- source_type(impl Into<String>) / set_source_type(Option<String>):
 The type of source that is generating the events. For RDS Proxy events, specify db-proxy.
 
 Valid values: db-instance | db-cluster | db-parameter-group | db-security-group | db-snapshot | db-cluster-snapshot | db-proxy
- filters(Vec<Filter>) / set_filters(Option<Vec<Filter>>):
 This parameter isn’t currently supported.
On success, responds with DescribeEventCategoriesOutput with field(s):
- event_categories_map_list(Option<Vec<EventCategoriesMap>>):
 A list of EventCategoriesMap data types.
On failure, responds with SdkError<DescribeEventCategoriesError>

source

pub fn describe_events(&self) -> DescribeEvents

Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeEvents operation. This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator().

The fluent builder is configurable:
- source_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_source_identifier(Option<String>):
 The identifier of the event source for which events are returned. If not specified, then all sources are included in the response.
 
 Constraints:
 - If SourceIdentifier is supplied, SourceType must also be provided.
 - If the source type is a DB instance, a DBInstanceIdentifier value must be supplied.
 - If the source type is a DB cluster, a DBClusterIdentifier value must be supplied.
 - If the source type is a DB parameter group, a DBParameterGroupName value must be supplied.
 - If the source type is a DB security group, a DBSecurityGroupName value must be supplied.
 - If the source type is a DB snapshot, a DBSnapshotIdentifier value must be supplied.
 - If the source type is a DB cluster snapshot, a DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier value must be supplied.
 - If the source type is an RDS Proxy, a DBProxyName value must be supplied.
 - Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.
- source_type(SourceType) / set_source_type(Option<SourceType>):
 The event source to retrieve events for. If no value is specified, all events are returned.
- start_time(DateTime) / set_start_time(Option<DateTime>):
 The beginning of the time interval to retrieve events for, specified in ISO 8601 format. For more information about ISO 8601, go to the ISO8601 Wikipedia page.
 
 Example: 2009-07-08T18:00Z
- end_time(DateTime) / set_end_time(Option<DateTime>):
 The end of the time interval for which to retrieve events, specified in ISO 8601 format. For more information about ISO 8601, go to the ISO8601 Wikipedia page.
 
 Example: 2009-07-08T18:00Z
- duration(i32) / set_duration(Option<i32>):
 The number of minutes to retrieve events for.
 
 Default: 60
- event_categories(Vec<String>) / set_event_categories(Option<Vec<String>>):
 A list of event categories that trigger notifications for a event notification subscription.
- filters(Vec<Filter>) / set_filters(Option<Vec<Filter>>):
 This parameter isn’t currently supported.
- max_records(i32) / set_max_records(Option<i32>):
 The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that you can retrieve the remaining results.
 
 Default: 100
 
 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
- marker(impl Into<String>) / set_marker(Option<String>):
 An optional pagination token provided by a previous DescribeEvents request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.
On success, responds with DescribeEventsOutput with field(s):
- marker(Option<String>):
 An optional pagination token provided by a previous Events request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.
- events(Option<Vec<Event>>):
 A list of Event instances.
On failure, responds with SdkError<DescribeEventsError>

source

pub fn describe_event_subscriptions(&self) -> DescribeEventSubscriptions

Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeEventSubscriptions operation. This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator().

The fluent builder is configurable:
- subscription_name(impl Into<String>) / set_subscription_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the RDS event notification subscription you want to describe.
- filters(Vec<Filter>) / set_filters(Option<Vec<Filter>>):
 This parameter isn’t currently supported.
- max_records(i32) / set_max_records(Option<i32>):
 The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that you can retrieve the remaining results.
 
 Default: 100
 
 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
- marker(impl Into<String>) / set_marker(Option<String>):
 An optional pagination token provided by a previous DescribeOrderableDBInstanceOptions request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords .
On success, responds with DescribeEventSubscriptionsOutput with field(s):
- marker(Option<String>):
 An optional pagination token provided by a previous DescribeOrderableDBInstanceOptions request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.
- event_subscriptions_list(Option<Vec<EventSubscription>>):
 A list of EventSubscriptions data types.
On failure, responds with SdkError<DescribeEventSubscriptionsError>

source

pub fn describe_export_tasks(&self) -> DescribeExportTasks

Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeExportTasks operation. This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator().

The fluent builder is configurable:
- export_task_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_export_task_identifier(Option<String>):
 The identifier of the snapshot export task to be described.
- source_arn(impl Into<String>) / set_source_arn(Option<String>):
 The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the snapshot exported to Amazon S3.
- filters(Vec<Filter>) / set_filters(Option<Vec<Filter>>):
 Filters specify one or more snapshot exports to describe. The filters are specified as name-value pairs that define what to include in the output. Filter names and values are case-sensitive.
 
 Supported filters include the following:
 - export-task-identifier - An identifier for the snapshot export task.
 - s3-bucket - The Amazon S3 bucket the snapshot is exported to.
 - source-arn - The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the snapshot exported to Amazon S3
 - status - The status of the export task. Must be lowercase. Valid statuses are the following:
 - canceled
 - canceling
 - complete
 - failed
 - in_progress
 - starting
- marker(impl Into<String>) / set_marker(Option<String>):
 An optional pagination token provided by a previous DescribeExportTasks request. If you specify this parameter, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by the MaxRecords parameter.
- max_records(i32) / set_max_records(Option<i32>):
 The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response. You can use the marker in a later DescribeExportTasks request to retrieve the remaining results.
 
 Default: 100
 
 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
On success, responds with DescribeExportTasksOutput with field(s):
- marker(Option<String>):
 A pagination token that can be used in a later DescribeExportTasks request. A marker is used for pagination to identify the location to begin output for the next response of DescribeExportTasks.
- export_tasks(Option<Vec<ExportTask>>):
 Information about an export of a snapshot to Amazon S3.
On failure, responds with SdkError<DescribeExportTasksError>

source

pub fn describe_global_clusters(&self) -> DescribeGlobalClusters

Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeGlobalClusters operation. This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator().

The fluent builder is configurable:
- global_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_global_cluster_identifier(Option<String>):
 The user-supplied DB cluster identifier. If this parameter is specified, information from only the specific DB cluster is returned. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.
 
 Constraints:
 - If supplied, must match an existing DBClusterIdentifier.
- filters(Vec<Filter>) / set_filters(Option<Vec<Filter>>):
 This parameter isn’t currently supported.
- max_records(i32) / set_max_records(Option<i32>):
 The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that you can retrieve the remaining results.
 
 Default: 100
 
 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
- marker(impl Into<String>) / set_marker(Option<String>):
 An optional pagination token provided by a previous DescribeGlobalClusters request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.
On success, responds with DescribeGlobalClustersOutput with field(s):
- marker(Option<String>):
 An optional pagination token provided by a previous DescribeGlobalClusters request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.
- global_clusters(Option<Vec<GlobalCluster>>):
 The list of global clusters returned by this request.
On failure, responds with SdkError<DescribeGlobalClustersError>

source

pub fn describe_option_group_options(&self) -> DescribeOptionGroupOptions

Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeOptionGroupOptions operation. This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator().

The fluent builder is configurable:
- engine_name(impl Into<String>) / set_engine_name(Option<String>):
 A required parameter. Options available for the given engine name are described.
 
 Valid Values:
 - mariadb
 - mysql
 - oracle-ee
 - oracle-ee-cdb
 - oracle-se2
 - oracle-se2-cdb
 - postgres
 - sqlserver-ee
 - sqlserver-se
 - sqlserver-ex
 - sqlserver-web
- major_engine_version(impl Into<String>) / set_major_engine_version(Option<String>):
 If specified, filters the results to include only options for the specified major engine version.
- filters(Vec<Filter>) / set_filters(Option<Vec<Filter>>):
 This parameter isn’t currently supported.
- max_records(i32) / set_max_records(Option<i32>):
 The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that you can retrieve the remaining results.
 
 Default: 100
 
 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
- marker(impl Into<String>) / set_marker(Option<String>):
 An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.
On success, responds with DescribeOptionGroupOptionsOutput with field(s):
- option_group_options(Option<Vec<OptionGroupOption>>):
 List of available option group options.
- marker(Option<String>):
 An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.
On failure, responds with SdkError<DescribeOptionGroupOptionsError>

source

pub fn describe_option_groups(&self) -> DescribeOptionGroups

Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeOptionGroups operation. This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator().

The fluent builder is configurable:
- option_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_option_group_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the option group to describe. Can’t be supplied together with EngineName or MajorEngineVersion.
- filters(Vec<Filter>) / set_filters(Option<Vec<Filter>>):
 This parameter isn’t currently supported.
- marker(impl Into<String>) / set_marker(Option<String>):
 An optional pagination token provided by a previous DescribeOptionGroups request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.
- max_records(i32) / set_max_records(Option<i32>):
 The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that you can retrieve the remaining results.
 
 Default: 100
 
 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
- engine_name(impl Into<String>) / set_engine_name(Option<String>):
 Filters the list of option groups to only include groups associated with a specific database engine.
 
 Valid Values:
 - mariadb
 - mysql
 - oracle-ee
 - oracle-ee-cdb
 - oracle-se2
 - oracle-se2-cdb
 - postgres
 - sqlserver-ee
 - sqlserver-se
 - sqlserver-ex
 - sqlserver-web
- major_engine_version(impl Into<String>) / set_major_engine_version(Option<String>):
 Filters the list of option groups to only include groups associated with a specific database engine version. If specified, then EngineName must also be specified.
On success, responds with DescribeOptionGroupsOutput with field(s):
- option_groups_list(Option<Vec<OptionGroup>>):
 List of option groups.
- marker(Option<String>):
 An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.
On failure, responds with SdkError<DescribeOptionGroupsError>

source

pub fn describe_orderable_db_instance_options(
&self
) -> DescribeOrderableDBInstanceOptions

Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeOrderableDBInstanceOptions operation. This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator().

The fluent builder is configurable:
- engine(impl Into<String>) / set_engine(Option<String>):
 The name of the engine to retrieve DB instance options for.
 
 Valid Values:
 - aurora (for MySQL 5.6-compatible Aurora)
 - aurora-mysql (for MySQL 5.7-compatible and MySQL 8.0-compatible Aurora)
 - aurora-postgresql
 - mariadb
 - mysql
 - oracle-ee
 - oracle-ee-cdb
 - oracle-se2
 - oracle-se2-cdb
 - postgres
 - sqlserver-ee
 - sqlserver-se
 - sqlserver-ex
 - sqlserver-web
- engine_version(impl Into<String>) / set_engine_version(Option<String>):
 The engine version filter value. Specify this parameter to show only the available offerings matching the specified engine version.
- db_instance_class(impl Into<String>) / set_db_instance_class(Option<String>):
 The DB instance class filter value. Specify this parameter to show only the available offerings matching the specified DB instance class.
- license_model(impl Into<String>) / set_license_model(Option<String>):
 The license model filter value. Specify this parameter to show only the available offerings matching the specified license model.
 
 RDS Custom supports only the BYOL licensing model.
- availability_zone_group(impl Into<String>) / set_availability_zone_group(Option<String>):
 The Availability Zone group associated with a Local Zone. Specify this parameter to retrieve available offerings for the Local Zones in the group.
 
 Omit this parameter to show the available offerings in the specified Amazon Web Services Region.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- vpc(bool) / set_vpc(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether to show only VPC or non-VPC offerings. RDS Custom supports only VPC offerings.
 
 RDS Custom supports only VPC offerings. If you describe non-VPC offerings for RDS Custom, the output shows VPC offerings.
- filters(Vec<Filter>) / set_filters(Option<Vec<Filter>>):
 This parameter isn’t currently supported.
- max_records(i32) / set_max_records(Option<i32>):
 The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that you can retrieve the remaining results.
 
 Default: 100
 
 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 10000.
- marker(impl Into<String>) / set_marker(Option<String>):
 An optional pagination token provided by a previous DescribeOrderableDBInstanceOptions request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.
On success, responds with DescribeOrderableDbInstanceOptionsOutput with field(s):
- orderable_db_instance_options(Option<Vec<OrderableDbInstanceOption>>):
 An OrderableDBInstanceOption structure containing information about orderable options for the DB instance.
- marker(Option<String>):
 An optional pagination token provided by a previous OrderableDBInstanceOptions request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.
On failure, responds with SdkError<DescribeOrderableDBInstanceOptionsError>

source

pub fn describe_pending_maintenance_actions(
&self
) -> DescribePendingMaintenanceActions

Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribePendingMaintenanceActions operation. This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator().

The fluent builder is configurable:
- resource_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_resource_identifier(Option<String>):
 The ARN of a resource to return pending maintenance actions for.
- filters(Vec<Filter>) / set_filters(Option<Vec<Filter>>):
 A filter that specifies one or more resources to return pending maintenance actions for.
 
 Supported filters:
 - db-cluster-id - Accepts DB cluster identifiers and DB cluster Amazon Resource Names (ARNs). The results list only includes pending maintenance actions for the DB clusters identified by these ARNs.
 - db-instance-id - Accepts DB instance identifiers and DB instance ARNs. The results list only includes pending maintenance actions for the DB instances identified by these ARNs.
- marker(impl Into<String>) / set_marker(Option<String>):
 An optional pagination token provided by a previous DescribePendingMaintenanceActions request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to a number of records specified by MaxRecords.
- max_records(i32) / set_max_records(Option<i32>):
 The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that you can retrieve the remaining results.
 
 Default: 100
 
 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
On success, responds with DescribePendingMaintenanceActionsOutput with field(s):
- pending_maintenance_actions(Option<Vec<ResourcePendingMaintenanceActions>>):
 A list of the pending maintenance actions for the resource.
- marker(Option<String>):
 An optional pagination token provided by a previous DescribePendingMaintenanceActions request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to a number of records specified by MaxRecords.
On failure, responds with SdkError<DescribePendingMaintenanceActionsError>

source

pub fn describe_reserved_db_instances(&self) -> DescribeReservedDBInstances

Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeReservedDBInstances operation. This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator().

The fluent builder is configurable:
- reserved_db_instance_id(impl Into<String>) / set_reserved_db_instance_id(Option<String>):
 The reserved DB instance identifier filter value. Specify this parameter to show only the reservation that matches the specified reservation ID.
- reserved_db_instances_offering_id(impl Into<String>) / set_reserved_db_instances_offering_id(Option<String>):
 The offering identifier filter value. Specify this parameter to show only purchased reservations matching the specified offering identifier.
- db_instance_class(impl Into<String>) / set_db_instance_class(Option<String>):
 The DB instance class filter value. Specify this parameter to show only those reservations matching the specified DB instances class.
- duration(impl Into<String>) / set_duration(Option<String>):
 The duration filter value, specified in years or seconds. Specify this parameter to show only reservations for this duration.
 
 Valid Values: 1 | 3 | 31536000 | 94608000
- product_description(impl Into<String>) / set_product_description(Option<String>):
 The product description filter value. Specify this parameter to show only those reservations matching the specified product description.
- offering_type(impl Into<String>) / set_offering_type(Option<String>):
 The offering type filter value. Specify this parameter to show only the available offerings matching the specified offering type.
 
 Valid Values: “Partial Upfront” | “All Upfront” | “No Upfront”
- multi_az(bool) / set_multi_az(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether to show only those reservations that support Multi-AZ.
- lease_id(impl Into<String>) / set_lease_id(Option<String>):
 The lease identifier filter value. Specify this parameter to show only the reservation that matches the specified lease ID.
 
 Amazon Web Services Support might request the lease ID for an issue related to a reserved DB instance.
- filters(Vec<Filter>) / set_filters(Option<Vec<Filter>>):
 This parameter isn’t currently supported.
- max_records(i32) / set_max_records(Option<i32>):
 The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more than the MaxRecords value is available, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so you can retrieve the remaining results.
 
 Default: 100
 
 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
- marker(impl Into<String>) / set_marker(Option<String>):
 An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.
On success, responds with DescribeReservedDbInstancesOutput with field(s):
- marker(Option<String>):
 An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.
- reserved_db_instances(Option<Vec<ReservedDbInstance>>):
 A list of reserved DB instances.
On failure, responds with SdkError<DescribeReservedDBInstancesError>

source

pub fn describe_reserved_db_instances_offerings(
&self
) -> DescribeReservedDBInstancesOfferings

Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeReservedDBInstancesOfferings operation. This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator().

The fluent builder is configurable:
- reserved_db_instances_offering_id(impl Into<String>) / set_reserved_db_instances_offering_id(Option<String>):
 The offering identifier filter value. Specify this parameter to show only the available offering that matches the specified reservation identifier.
 
 Example: 438012d3-4052-4cc7-b2e3-8d3372e0e706
- db_instance_class(impl Into<String>) / set_db_instance_class(Option<String>):
 The DB instance class filter value. Specify this parameter to show only the available offerings matching the specified DB instance class.
- duration(impl Into<String>) / set_duration(Option<String>):
 Duration filter value, specified in years or seconds. Specify this parameter to show only reservations for this duration.
 
 Valid Values: 1 | 3 | 31536000 | 94608000
- product_description(impl Into<String>) / set_product_description(Option<String>):
 Product description filter value. Specify this parameter to show only the available offerings that contain the specified product description.
 
 The results show offerings that partially match the filter value.
- offering_type(impl Into<String>) / set_offering_type(Option<String>):
 The offering type filter value. Specify this parameter to show only the available offerings matching the specified offering type.
 
 Valid Values: “Partial Upfront” | “All Upfront” | “No Upfront”
- multi_az(bool) / set_multi_az(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether to show only those reservations that support Multi-AZ.
- filters(Vec<Filter>) / set_filters(Option<Vec<Filter>>):
 This parameter isn’t currently supported.
- max_records(i32) / set_max_records(Option<i32>):
 The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more than the MaxRecords value is available, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so you can retrieve the remaining results.
 
 Default: 100
 
 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
- marker(impl Into<String>) / set_marker(Option<String>):
 An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.
On success, responds with DescribeReservedDbInstancesOfferingsOutput with field(s):
- marker(Option<String>):
 An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.
- reserved_db_instances_offerings(Option<Vec<ReservedDbInstancesOffering>>):
 A list of reserved DB instance offerings.
On failure, responds with SdkError<DescribeReservedDBInstancesOfferingsError>

source

pub fn describe_source_regions(&self) -> DescribeSourceRegions

Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeSourceRegions operation. This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator().

The fluent builder is configurable:
- region_name(impl Into<String>) / set_region_name(Option<String>):
 The source Amazon Web Services Region name. For example, us-east-1.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must specify a valid Amazon Web Services Region name.
- max_records(i32) / set_max_records(Option<i32>):
 The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so you can retrieve the remaining results.
 
 Default: 100
 
 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.
- marker(impl Into<String>) / set_marker(Option<String>):
 An optional pagination token provided by a previous DescribeSourceRegions request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.
- filters(Vec<Filter>) / set_filters(Option<Vec<Filter>>):
 This parameter isn’t currently supported.
On success, responds with DescribeSourceRegionsOutput with field(s):
- marker(Option<String>):
 An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.
- source_regions(Option<Vec<SourceRegion>>):
 A list of SourceRegion instances that contains each source Amazon Web Services Region that the current Amazon Web Services Region can get a read replica or a DB snapshot from.
On failure, responds with SdkError<DescribeSourceRegionsError>

source

pub fn describe_valid_db_instance_modifications(
&self
) -> DescribeValidDBInstanceModifications

Constructs a fluent builder for the DescribeValidDBInstanceModifications operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_instance_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_instance_identifier(Option<String>):
 The customer identifier or the ARN of your DB instance.
On success, responds with DescribeValidDbInstanceModificationsOutput with field(s):
- valid_db_instance_modifications_message(Option<ValidDbInstanceModificationsMessage>):
 Information about valid modifications that you can make to your DB instance. Contains the result of a successful call to the DescribeValidDBInstanceModifications action. You can use this information when you call ModifyDBInstance.
On failure, responds with SdkError<DescribeValidDBInstanceModificationsError>

source

pub fn download_db_log_file_portion(&self) -> DownloadDBLogFilePortion

Constructs a fluent builder for the DownloadDBLogFilePortion operation. This operation supports pagination; See into_paginator().

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_instance_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_instance_identifier(Option<String>):
 The customer-assigned name of the DB instance that contains the log files you want to list.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must match the identifier of an existing DBInstance.
- log_file_name(impl Into<String>) / set_log_file_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the log file to be downloaded.
- marker(impl Into<String>) / set_marker(Option<String>):
 The pagination token provided in the previous request or “0”. If the Marker parameter is specified the response includes only records beyond the marker until the end of the file or up to NumberOfLines.
- number_of_lines(i32) / set_number_of_lines(i32):
 The number of lines to download. If the number of lines specified results in a file over 1 MB in size, the file is truncated at 1 MB in size.
 
 If the NumberOfLines parameter is specified, then the block of lines returned can be from the beginning or the end of the log file, depending on the value of the Marker parameter.
 - If neither Marker or NumberOfLines are specified, the entire log file is returned up to a maximum of 10000 lines, starting with the most recent log entries first.
 - If NumberOfLines is specified and Marker isn’t specified, then the most recent lines from the end of the log file are returned.
 - If Marker is specified as “0”, then the specified number of lines from the beginning of the log file are returned.
 - You can download the log file in blocks of lines by specifying the size of the block using the NumberOfLines parameter, and by specifying a value of “0” for the Marker parameter in your first request. Include the Marker value returned in the response as the Marker value for the next request, continuing until the AdditionalDataPending response element returns false.
On success, responds with DownloadDbLogFilePortionOutput with field(s):
- log_file_data(Option<String>):
 Entries from the specified log file.
- marker(Option<String>):
 A pagination token that can be used in a later DownloadDBLogFilePortion request.
- additional_data_pending(bool):
 Boolean value that if true, indicates there is more data to be downloaded.
On failure, responds with SdkError<DownloadDBLogFilePortionError>

source

pub fn failover_db_cluster(&self) -> FailoverDBCluster

Constructs a fluent builder for the FailoverDBCluster operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>):
 A DB cluster identifier to force a failover for. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must match the identifier of an existing DBCluster.
- target_db_instance_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_target_db_instance_identifier(Option<String>):
 The name of the DB instance to promote to the primary DB instance.
 
 Specify the DB instance identifier for an Aurora Replica or a Multi-AZ readable standby in the DB cluster, for example mydbcluster-replica1.
 
 This setting isn’t supported for RDS for MySQL Multi-AZ DB clusters.
On success, responds with FailoverDbClusterOutput with field(s):
- db_cluster(Option<DbCluster>):
 Contains the details of an Amazon Aurora DB cluster or Multi-AZ DB cluster.
 
 For an Amazon Aurora DB cluster, this data type is used as a response element in the operations CreateDBCluster, DeleteDBCluster, DescribeDBClusters, FailoverDBCluster, ModifyDBCluster, PromoteReadReplicaDBCluster, RestoreDBClusterFromS3, RestoreDBClusterFromSnapshot, RestoreDBClusterToPointInTime, StartDBCluster, and StopDBCluster.
 
 For a Multi-AZ DB cluster, this data type is used as a response element in the operations CreateDBCluster, DeleteDBCluster, DescribeDBClusters, FailoverDBCluster, ModifyDBCluster, RebootDBCluster, RestoreDBClusterFromSnapshot, and RestoreDBClusterToPointInTime.
 
 For more information on Amazon Aurora DB clusters, see What is Amazon Aurora? in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
 
 For more information on Multi-AZ DB clusters, see Multi-AZ deployments with two readable standby DB instances in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
On failure, responds with SdkError<FailoverDBClusterError>

source

pub fn failover_global_cluster(&self) -> FailoverGlobalCluster

Constructs a fluent builder for the FailoverGlobalCluster operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- global_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_global_cluster_identifier(Option<String>):
 Identifier of the Aurora global database (GlobalCluster) that should be failed over. The identifier is the unique key assigned by the user when the Aurora global database was created. In other words, it’s the name of the Aurora global database that you want to fail over.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must match the identifier of an existing GlobalCluster (Aurora global database).
- target_db_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_target_db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>):
 Identifier of the secondary Aurora DB cluster that you want to promote to primary for the Aurora global database (GlobalCluster.) Use the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the identifier so that Aurora can locate the cluster in its Amazon Web Services Region.
On success, responds with FailoverGlobalClusterOutput with field(s):
- global_cluster(Option<GlobalCluster>):
 A data type representing an Aurora global database.
On failure, responds with SdkError<FailoverGlobalClusterError>

source

pub fn list_tags_for_resource(&self) -> ListTagsForResource

Constructs a fluent builder for the ListTagsForResource operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- resource_name(impl Into<String>) / set_resource_name(Option<String>):
 The Amazon RDS resource with tags to be listed. This value is an Amazon Resource Name (ARN). For information about creating an ARN, see Constructing an ARN for Amazon RDS in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
- filters(Vec<Filter>) / set_filters(Option<Vec<Filter>>):
 This parameter isn’t currently supported.
On success, responds with ListTagsForResourceOutput with field(s):
- tag_list(Option<Vec<Tag>>):
 List of tags returned by the ListTagsForResource operation.
On failure, responds with SdkError<ListTagsForResourceError>

source

pub fn modify_activity_stream(&self) -> ModifyActivityStream

Constructs a fluent builder for the ModifyActivityStream operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- resource_arn(impl Into<String>) / set_resource_arn(Option<String>):
 The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the RDS for Oracle DB instance, for example, arn:aws:rds:us-east-1:12345667890:instance:my-orcl-db.
- audit_policy_state(AuditPolicyState) / set_audit_policy_state(Option<AuditPolicyState>):
 The audit policy state. When a policy is unlocked, it is read/write. When it is locked, it is read-only. You can edit your audit policy only when the activity stream is unlocked or stopped.
On success, responds with ModifyActivityStreamOutput with field(s):
- kms_key_id(Option<String>):
 The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for encryption of messages in the database activity stream.
- kinesis_stream_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the Amazon Kinesis data stream to be used for the database activity stream.
- status(Option<ActivityStreamStatus>):
 The status of the modification to the database activity stream.
- mode(Option<ActivityStreamMode>):
 The mode of the database activity stream.
- engine_native_audit_fields_included(Option<bool>):
 Indicates whether engine-native audit fields are included in the database activity stream.
- policy_status(Option<ActivityStreamPolicyStatus>):
 The status of the modification to the policy state of the database activity stream.
On failure, responds with SdkError<ModifyActivityStreamError>

source

pub fn modify_certificates(&self) -> ModifyCertificates

Constructs a fluent builder for the ModifyCertificates operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- certificate_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_certificate_identifier(Option<String>):
 The new default certificate identifier to override the current one with.
 
 To determine the valid values, use the describe-certificates CLI command or the DescribeCertificates API operation.
- remove_customer_override(bool) / set_remove_customer_override(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether to remove the override for the default certificate. If the override is removed, the default certificate is the system default.
On success, responds with ModifyCertificatesOutput with field(s):
- certificate(Option<Certificate>):
 A CA certificate for an Amazon Web Services account.
On failure, responds with SdkError<ModifyCertificatesError>

source

pub fn modify_current_db_cluster_capacity(
&self
) -> ModifyCurrentDBClusterCapacity

Constructs a fluent builder for the ModifyCurrentDBClusterCapacity operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>):
 The DB cluster identifier for the cluster being modified. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must match the identifier of an existing DB cluster.
- capacity(i32) / set_capacity(Option<i32>):
 The DB cluster capacity.
 
 When you change the capacity of a paused Aurora Serverless v1 DB cluster, it automatically resumes.
 
 Constraints:
 - For Aurora MySQL, valid capacity values are 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, and 256.
 - For Aurora PostgreSQL, valid capacity values are 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 192, and 384.
- seconds_before_timeout(i32) / set_seconds_before_timeout(Option<i32>):
 The amount of time, in seconds, that Aurora Serverless v1 tries to find a scaling point to perform seamless scaling before enforcing the timeout action. The default is 300.
 
 Specify a value between 10 and 600 seconds.
- timeout_action(impl Into<String>) / set_timeout_action(Option<String>):
 The action to take when the timeout is reached, either ForceApplyCapacityChange or RollbackCapacityChange.
 
 ForceApplyCapacityChange, the default, sets the capacity to the specified value as soon as possible.
 
 RollbackCapacityChange ignores the capacity change if a scaling point isn’t found in the timeout period.
On success, responds with ModifyCurrentDbClusterCapacityOutput with field(s):
- db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>):
 A user-supplied DB cluster identifier. This identifier is the unique key that identifies a DB cluster.
- pending_capacity(Option<i32>):
 A value that specifies the capacity that the DB cluster scales to next.
- current_capacity(Option<i32>):
 The current capacity of the DB cluster.
- seconds_before_timeout(Option<i32>):
 The number of seconds before a call to ModifyCurrentDBClusterCapacity times out.
- timeout_action(Option<String>):
 The timeout action of a call to ModifyCurrentDBClusterCapacity, either ForceApplyCapacityChange or RollbackCapacityChange.
On failure, responds with SdkError<ModifyCurrentDBClusterCapacityError>

source

pub fn modify_custom_db_engine_version(&self) -> ModifyCustomDBEngineVersion

Constructs a fluent builder for the ModifyCustomDBEngineVersion operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- engine(impl Into<String>) / set_engine(Option<String>):
 The DB engine. The only supported value is custom-oracle-ee.
- engine_version(impl Into<String>) / set_engine_version(Option<String>):
 The custom engine version (CEV) that you want to modify. This option is required for RDS Custom for Oracle, but optional for Amazon RDS. The combination of Engine and EngineVersion is unique per customer per Amazon Web Services Region.
- description(impl Into<String>) / set_description(Option<String>):
 An optional description of your CEV.
- status(CustomEngineVersionStatus) / set_status(Option<CustomEngineVersionStatus>):
 The availability status to be assigned to the CEV. Valid values are as follows:
 
 available
 
 You can use this CEV to create a new RDS Custom DB instance.
 
 inactive
 
 You can create a new RDS Custom instance by restoring a DB snapshot with this CEV. You can’t patch or create new instances with this CEV.
 
 You can change any status to any status. A typical reason to change status is to prevent the accidental use of a CEV, or to make a deprecated CEV eligible for use again. For example, you might change the status of your CEV from available to inactive, and from inactive back to available. To change the availability status of the CEV, it must not currently be in use by an RDS Custom instance, snapshot, or automated backup.
On success, responds with ModifyCustomDbEngineVersionOutput with field(s):
- engine(Option<String>):
 The name of the database engine.
- engine_version(Option<String>):
 The version number of the database engine.
- db_parameter_group_family(Option<String>):
 The name of the DB parameter group family for the database engine.
- db_engine_description(Option<String>):
 The description of the database engine.
- db_engine_version_description(Option<String>):
 The description of the database engine version.
- default_character_set(Option<CharacterSet>):
 The default character set for new instances of this engine version, if the CharacterSetName parameter of the CreateDBInstance API isn’t specified.
- supported_character_sets(Option<Vec<CharacterSet>>):
 A list of the character sets supported by this engine for the CharacterSetName parameter of the CreateDBInstance operation.
- supported_nchar_character_sets(Option<Vec<CharacterSet>>):
 A list of the character sets supported by the Oracle DB engine for the NcharCharacterSetName parameter of the CreateDBInstance operation.
- valid_upgrade_target(Option<Vec<UpgradeTarget>>):
 A list of engine versions that this database engine version can be upgraded to.
- supported_timezones(Option<Vec<Timezone>>):
 A list of the time zones supported by this engine for the Timezone parameter of the CreateDBInstance action.
- exportable_log_types(Option<Vec<String>>):
 The types of logs that the database engine has available for export to CloudWatch Logs.
- supports_log_exports_to_cloudwatch_logs(bool):
 A value that indicates whether the engine version supports exporting the log types specified by ExportableLogTypes to CloudWatch Logs.
- supports_read_replica(bool):
 Indicates whether the database engine version supports read replicas.
- supported_engine_modes(Option<Vec<String>>):
 A list of the supported DB engine modes.
- supported_feature_names(Option<Vec<String>>):
 A list of features supported by the DB engine.
 
 The supported features vary by DB engine and DB engine version.
 
 To determine the supported features for a specific DB engine and DB engine version using the CLI, use the following command:
 
 aws rds describe-db-engine-versions –engine <engine_name> –engine-version <engine_version></engine_version> </engine_name>
 
 For example, to determine the supported features for RDS for PostgreSQL version 13.3 using the CLI, use the following command:
 
 aws rds describe-db-engine-versions –engine postgres –engine-version 13.3
 
 The supported features are listed under SupportedFeatureNames in the output.
- status(Option<String>):
 The status of the DB engine version, either available or deprecated.
- supports_parallel_query(bool):
 A value that indicates whether you can use Aurora parallel query with a specific DB engine version.
- supports_global_databases(bool):
 A value that indicates whether you can use Aurora global databases with a specific DB engine version.
- major_engine_version(Option<String>):
 The major engine version of the CEV.
- database_installation_files_s3_bucket_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the Amazon S3 bucket that contains your database installation files.
- database_installation_files_s3_prefix(Option<String>):
 The Amazon S3 directory that contains the database installation files. If not specified, then no prefix is assumed.
- db_engine_version_arn(Option<String>):
 The ARN of the custom engine version.
- kms_key_id(Option<String>):
 The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for an encrypted CEV. This parameter is required for RDS Custom, but optional for Amazon RDS.
- create_time(Option<DateTime>):
 The creation time of the DB engine version.
- tag_list(Option<Vec<Tag>>):
 A list of tags. For more information, see Tagging Amazon RDS Resources in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
- supports_babelfish(bool):
 A value that indicates whether the engine version supports Babelfish for Aurora PostgreSQL.
On failure, responds with SdkError<ModifyCustomDBEngineVersionError>

source

pub fn modify_db_cluster(&self) -> ModifyDBCluster

Constructs a fluent builder for the ModifyDBCluster operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>):
 The DB cluster identifier for the cluster being modified. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.
 
 Constraints: This identifier must match the identifier of an existing DB cluster.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- new_db_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_new_db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>):
 The new DB cluster identifier for the DB cluster when renaming a DB cluster. This value is stored as a lowercase string.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must contain from 1 to 63 letters, numbers, or hyphens
 - The first character must be a letter
 - Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens
 Example: my-cluster2
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only
- apply_immediately(bool) / set_apply_immediately(bool):
 A value that indicates whether the modifications in this request and any pending modifications are asynchronously applied as soon as possible, regardless of the PreferredMaintenanceWindow setting for the DB cluster. If this parameter is disabled, changes to the DB cluster are applied during the next maintenance window.
 
 The ApplyImmediately parameter only affects the EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication, MasterUserPassword, and NewDBClusterIdentifier values. If the ApplyImmediately parameter is disabled, then changes to the EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication, MasterUserPassword, and NewDBClusterIdentifier values are applied during the next maintenance window. All other changes are applied immediately, regardless of the value of the ApplyImmediately parameter.
 
 By default, this parameter is disabled.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- backup_retention_period(i32) / set_backup_retention_period(Option<i32>):
 The number of days for which automated backups are retained. Specify a minimum value of 1.
 
 Default: 1
 
 Constraints:
 - Must be a value from 1 to 35
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- db_cluster_parameter_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_cluster_parameter_group_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the DB cluster parameter group to use for the DB cluster.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- vpc_security_group_ids(Vec<String>) / set_vpc_security_group_ids(Option<Vec<String>>):
 A list of VPC security groups that the DB cluster will belong to.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- port(i32) / set_port(Option<i32>):
 The port number on which the DB cluster accepts connections.
 
 Constraints: Value must be 1150-65535
 
 Default: The same port as the original DB cluster.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only
- master_user_password(impl Into<String>) / set_master_user_password(Option<String>):
 The new password for the master database user. This password can contain any printable ASCII character except “/”, “”“, or “@”.
 
 Constraints: Must contain from 8 to 41 characters.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- option_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_option_group_name(Option<String>):
 A value that indicates that the DB cluster should be associated with the specified option group.
 
 DB clusters are associated with a default option group that can’t be modified.
- preferred_backup_window(impl Into<String>) / set_preferred_backup_window(Option<String>):
 The daily time range during which automated backups are created if automated backups are enabled, using the BackupRetentionPeriod parameter.
 
 The default is a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Web Services Region. To view the time blocks available, see Backup window in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must be in the format hh24:mi-hh24:mi.
 - Must be in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).
 - Must not conflict with the preferred maintenance window.
 - Must be at least 30 minutes.
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- preferred_maintenance_window(impl Into<String>) / set_preferred_maintenance_window(Option<String>):
 The weekly time range during which system maintenance can occur, in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).
 
 Format: ddd:hh24:mi-ddd:hh24:mi
 
 The default is a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Web Services Region, occurring on a random day of the week. To see the time blocks available, see Adjusting the Preferred DB Cluster Maintenance Window in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
 
 Valid Days: Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, Sun.
 
 Constraints: Minimum 30-minute window.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- enable_iam_database_authentication(bool) / set_enable_iam_database_authentication(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether to enable mapping of Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) accounts to database accounts. By default, mapping isn’t enabled.
 
 For more information, see IAM Database Authentication in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only
- backtrack_window(i64) / set_backtrack_window(Option<i64>):
 The target backtrack window, in seconds. To disable backtracking, set this value to 0.
 
 Default: 0
 
 Constraints:
 - If specified, this value must be set to a number from 0 to 259,200 (72 hours).
 Valid for: Aurora MySQL DB clusters only
- cloudwatch_logs_export_configuration(CloudwatchLogsExportConfiguration) / set_cloudwatch_logs_export_configuration(Option<CloudwatchLogsExportConfiguration>):
 The configuration setting for the log types to be enabled for export to CloudWatch Logs for a specific DB cluster. The values in the list depend on the DB engine being used.
 
 RDS for MySQL
 
 Possible values are error, general, and slowquery.
 
 RDS for PostgreSQL
 
 Possible values are postgresql and upgrade.
 
 Aurora MySQL
 
 Possible values are audit, error, general, and slowquery.
 
 Aurora PostgreSQL
 
 Possible value is postgresql.
 
 For more information about exporting CloudWatch Logs for Amazon RDS, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 For more information about exporting CloudWatch Logs for Amazon Aurora, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- engine_version(impl Into<String>) / set_engine_version(Option<String>):
 The version number of the database engine to which you want to upgrade. Changing this parameter results in an outage. The change is applied during the next maintenance window unless ApplyImmediately is enabled.
 
 To list all of the available engine versions for MySQL 5.6-compatible Aurora, use the following command:
 
 aws rds describe-db-engine-versions –engine aurora –query “DBEngineVersions[].EngineVersion”
 
 To list all of the available engine versions for MySQL 5.7-compatible and MySQL 8.0-compatible Aurora, use the following command:
 
 aws rds describe-db-engine-versions –engine aurora-mysql –query “DBEngineVersions[].EngineVersion”
 
 To list all of the available engine versions for Aurora PostgreSQL, use the following command:
 
 aws rds describe-db-engine-versions –engine aurora-postgresql –query “DBEngineVersions[].EngineVersion”
 
 To list all of the available engine versions for RDS for MySQL, use the following command:
 
 aws rds describe-db-engine-versions –engine mysql –query “DBEngineVersions[].EngineVersion”
 
 To list all of the available engine versions for RDS for PostgreSQL, use the following command:
 
 aws rds describe-db-engine-versions –engine postgres –query “DBEngineVersions[].EngineVersion”
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- allow_major_version_upgrade(bool) / set_allow_major_version_upgrade(bool):
 A value that indicates whether major version upgrades are allowed.
 
 Constraints: You must allow major version upgrades when specifying a value for the EngineVersion parameter that is a different major version than the DB cluster’s current version.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only
- db_instance_parameter_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_instance_parameter_group_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the DB parameter group to apply to all instances of the DB cluster.
 
 When you apply a parameter group using the DBInstanceParameterGroupName parameter, the DB cluster isn’t rebooted automatically. Also, parameter changes are applied immediately rather than during the next maintenance window.
 
 Default: The existing name setting
 
 Constraints:
 - The DB parameter group must be in the same DB parameter group family as this DB cluster.
 - The DBInstanceParameterGroupName parameter is valid in combination with the AllowMajorVersionUpgrade parameter for a major version upgrade only.
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only
- domain(impl Into<String>) / set_domain(Option<String>):
 The Active Directory directory ID to move the DB cluster to. Specify none to remove the cluster from its current domain. The domain must be created prior to this operation.
 
 For more information, see Kerberos Authentication in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only
- domain_iam_role_name(impl Into<String>) / set_domain_iam_role_name(Option<String>):
 Specify the name of the IAM role to be used when making API calls to the Directory Service.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only
- scaling_configuration(ScalingConfiguration) / set_scaling_configuration(Option<ScalingConfiguration>):
 The scaling properties of the DB cluster. You can only modify scaling properties for DB clusters in serverless DB engine mode.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only
- deletion_protection(bool) / set_deletion_protection(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether the DB cluster has deletion protection enabled. The database can’t be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. By default, deletion protection isn’t enabled.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- enable_http_endpoint(bool) / set_enable_http_endpoint(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether to enable the HTTP endpoint for an Aurora Serverless v1 DB cluster. By default, the HTTP endpoint is disabled.
 
 When enabled, the HTTP endpoint provides a connectionless web service API for running SQL queries on the Aurora Serverless v1 DB cluster. You can also query your database from inside the RDS console with the query editor.
 
 For more information, see Using the Data API for Aurora Serverless v1 in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only
- copy_tags_to_snapshot(bool) / set_copy_tags_to_snapshot(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether to copy all tags from the DB cluster to snapshots of the DB cluster. The default is not to copy them.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- enable_global_write_forwarding(bool) / set_enable_global_write_forwarding(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether to enable this DB cluster to forward write operations to the primary cluster of an Aurora global database (GlobalCluster). By default, write operations are not allowed on Aurora DB clusters that are secondary clusters in an Aurora global database.
 
 You can set this value only on Aurora DB clusters that are members of an Aurora global database. With this parameter enabled, a secondary cluster can forward writes to the current primary cluster and the resulting changes are replicated back to this cluster. For the primary DB cluster of an Aurora global database, this value is used immediately if the primary is demoted by the FailoverGlobalCluster API operation, but it does nothing until then.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only
- db_cluster_instance_class(impl Into<String>) / set_db_cluster_instance_class(Option<String>):
 The compute and memory capacity of each DB instance in the Multi-AZ DB cluster, for example db.m6g.xlarge. Not all DB instance classes are available in all Amazon Web Services Regions, or for all database engines.
 
 For the full list of DB instance classes and availability for your engine, see DB Instance Class in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 Valid for: Multi-AZ DB clusters only
- allocated_storage(i32) / set_allocated_storage(Option<i32>):
 The amount of storage in gibibytes (GiB) to allocate to each DB instance in the Multi-AZ DB cluster.
 
 Type: Integer
 
 Valid for: Multi-AZ DB clusters only
- storage_type(impl Into<String>) / set_storage_type(Option<String>):
 Specifies the storage type to be associated with the DB cluster.
 
 Valid values: io1
 
 When specified, a value for the Iops parameter is required.
 
 Default: io1
 
 Valid for: Multi-AZ DB clusters only
- iops(i32) / set_iops(Option<i32>):
 The amount of Provisioned IOPS (input/output operations per second) to be initially allocated for each DB instance in the Multi-AZ DB cluster.
 
 For information about valid Iops values, see Amazon RDS Provisioned IOPS Storage to Improve Performance in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 Constraints: Must be a multiple between .5 and 50 of the storage amount for the DB cluster.
 
 Valid for: Multi-AZ DB clusters only
- auto_minor_version_upgrade(bool) / set_auto_minor_version_upgrade(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether minor engine upgrades are applied automatically to the DB cluster during the maintenance window. By default, minor engine upgrades are applied automatically.
 
 Valid for: Multi-AZ DB clusters only
- monitoring_interval(i32) / set_monitoring_interval(Option<i32>):
 The interval, in seconds, between points when Enhanced Monitoring metrics are collected for the DB cluster. To turn off collecting Enhanced Monitoring metrics, specify 0. The default is 0.
 
 If MonitoringRoleArn is specified, also set MonitoringInterval to a value other than 0.
 
 Valid Values: 0, 1, 5, 10, 15, 30, 60
 
 Valid for: Multi-AZ DB clusters only
- monitoring_role_arn(impl Into<String>) / set_monitoring_role_arn(Option<String>):
 The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the IAM role that permits RDS to send Enhanced Monitoring metrics to Amazon CloudWatch Logs. An example is arn:aws:iam:123456789012:role/emaccess. For information on creating a monitoring role, see To create an IAM role for Amazon RDS Enhanced Monitoring in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 If MonitoringInterval is set to a value other than 0, supply a MonitoringRoleArn value.
 
 Valid for: Multi-AZ DB clusters only
- enable_performance_insights(bool) / set_enable_performance_insights(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether to turn on Performance Insights for the DB cluster.
 
 For more information, see Using Amazon Performance Insights in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 Valid for: Multi-AZ DB clusters only
- performance_insights_kms_key_id(impl Into<String>) / set_performance_insights_kms_key_id(Option<String>):
 The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for encryption of Performance Insights data.
 
 The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key.
 
 If you don’t specify a value for PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId, then Amazon RDS uses your default KMS key. There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region.
 
 Valid for: Multi-AZ DB clusters only
- performance_insights_retention_period(i32) / set_performance_insights_retention_period(Option<i32>):
 The number of days to retain Performance Insights data. The default is 7 days. The following values are valid:
 - 7
 - month * 31, where month is a number of months from 1-23
 - 731
 For example, the following values are valid:
 - 93 (3 months * 31)
 - 341 (11 months * 31)
 - 589 (19 months * 31)
 - 731
 If you specify a retention period such as 94, which isn’t a valid value, RDS issues an error.
 
 Valid for: Multi-AZ DB clusters only
- serverless_v2_scaling_configuration(ServerlessV2ScalingConfiguration) / set_serverless_v2_scaling_configuration(Option<ServerlessV2ScalingConfiguration>):
 Contains the scaling configuration of an Aurora Serverless v2 DB cluster.
 
 For more information, see Using Amazon Aurora Serverless v2 in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
- network_type(impl Into<String>) / set_network_type(Option<String>):
 The network type of the DB cluster.
 
 Valid values:
 - IPV4
 - DUAL
 The network type is determined by the DBSubnetGroup specified for the DB cluster. A DBSubnetGroup can support only the IPv4 protocol or the IPv4 and the IPv6 protocols (DUAL).
 
 For more information, see Working with a DB instance in a VPC in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only
On success, responds with ModifyDbClusterOutput with field(s):
- db_cluster(Option<DbCluster>):
 Contains the details of an Amazon Aurora DB cluster or Multi-AZ DB cluster.
 
 For an Amazon Aurora DB cluster, this data type is used as a response element in the operations CreateDBCluster, DeleteDBCluster, DescribeDBClusters, FailoverDBCluster, ModifyDBCluster, PromoteReadReplicaDBCluster, RestoreDBClusterFromS3, RestoreDBClusterFromSnapshot, RestoreDBClusterToPointInTime, StartDBCluster, and StopDBCluster.
 
 For a Multi-AZ DB cluster, this data type is used as a response element in the operations CreateDBCluster, DeleteDBCluster, DescribeDBClusters, FailoverDBCluster, ModifyDBCluster, RebootDBCluster, RestoreDBClusterFromSnapshot, and RestoreDBClusterToPointInTime.
 
 For more information on Amazon Aurora DB clusters, see What is Amazon Aurora? in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
 
 For more information on Multi-AZ DB clusters, see Multi-AZ deployments with two readable standby DB instances in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
On failure, responds with SdkError<ModifyDBClusterError>

source

pub fn modify_db_cluster_endpoint(&self) -> ModifyDBClusterEndpoint

Constructs a fluent builder for the ModifyDBClusterEndpoint operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_cluster_endpoint_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_cluster_endpoint_identifier(Option<String>):
 The identifier of the endpoint to modify. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.
- endpoint_type(impl Into<String>) / set_endpoint_type(Option<String>):
 The type of the endpoint. One of: READER, WRITER, ANY.
- static_members(Vec<String>) / set_static_members(Option<Vec<String>>):
 List of DB instance identifiers that are part of the custom endpoint group.
- excluded_members(Vec<String>) / set_excluded_members(Option<Vec<String>>):
 List of DB instance identifiers that aren’t part of the custom endpoint group. All other eligible instances are reachable through the custom endpoint. Only relevant if the list of static members is empty.
On success, responds with ModifyDbClusterEndpointOutput with field(s):
- db_cluster_endpoint_identifier(Option<String>):
 The identifier associated with the endpoint. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.
- db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>):
 The DB cluster identifier of the DB cluster associated with the endpoint. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.
- db_cluster_endpoint_resource_identifier(Option<String>):
 A unique system-generated identifier for an endpoint. It remains the same for the whole life of the endpoint.
- endpoint(Option<String>):
 The DNS address of the endpoint.
- status(Option<String>):
 The current status of the endpoint. One of: creating, available, deleting, inactive, modifying. The inactive state applies to an endpoint that can’t be used for a certain kind of cluster, such as a writer endpoint for a read-only secondary cluster in a global database.
- endpoint_type(Option<String>):
 The type of the endpoint. One of: READER, WRITER, CUSTOM.
- custom_endpoint_type(Option<String>):
 The type associated with a custom endpoint. One of: READER, WRITER, ANY.
- static_members(Option<Vec<String>>):
 List of DB instance identifiers that are part of the custom endpoint group.
- excluded_members(Option<Vec<String>>):
 List of DB instance identifiers that aren’t part of the custom endpoint group. All other eligible instances are reachable through the custom endpoint. Only relevant if the list of static members is empty.
- db_cluster_endpoint_arn(Option<String>):
 The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the endpoint.
On failure, responds with SdkError<ModifyDBClusterEndpointError>

source

pub fn modify_db_cluster_parameter_group(&self) -> ModifyDBClusterParameterGroup

Constructs a fluent builder for the ModifyDBClusterParameterGroup operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_cluster_parameter_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_cluster_parameter_group_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the DB cluster parameter group to modify.
- parameters(Vec<Parameter>) / set_parameters(Option<Vec<Parameter>>):
 A list of parameters in the DB cluster parameter group to modify.
 
 Valid Values (for the application method): immediate | pending-reboot
 
 You can use the immediate value with dynamic parameters only. You can use the pending-reboot value for both dynamic and static parameters.
 
 When the application method is immediate, changes to dynamic parameters are applied immediately to the DB clusters associated with the parameter group. When the application method is pending-reboot, changes to dynamic and static parameters are applied after a reboot without failover to the DB clusters associated with the parameter group.
On success, responds with ModifyDbClusterParameterGroupOutput with field(s):
- db_cluster_parameter_group_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the DB cluster parameter group.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must be 1 to 255 letters or numbers.
 - First character must be a letter
 - Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens
 This value is stored as a lowercase string.
On failure, responds with SdkError<ModifyDBClusterParameterGroupError>

source

pub fn modify_db_cluster_snapshot_attribute(
&self
) -> ModifyDBClusterSnapshotAttribute

Constructs a fluent builder for the ModifyDBClusterSnapshotAttribute operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_cluster_snapshot_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_cluster_snapshot_identifier(Option<String>):
 The identifier for the DB cluster snapshot to modify the attributes for.
- attribute_name(impl Into<String>) / set_attribute_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the DB cluster snapshot attribute to modify.
 
 To manage authorization for other Amazon Web Services accounts to copy or restore a manual DB cluster snapshot, set this value to restore.
 
 To view the list of attributes available to modify, use the DescribeDBClusterSnapshotAttributes API operation.
- values_to_add(Vec<String>) / set_values_to_add(Option<Vec<String>>):
 A list of DB cluster snapshot attributes to add to the attribute specified by AttributeName.
 
 To authorize other Amazon Web Services accounts to copy or restore a manual DB cluster snapshot, set this list to include one or more Amazon Web Services account IDs, or all to make the manual DB cluster snapshot restorable by any Amazon Web Services account. Do not add the all value for any manual DB cluster snapshots that contain private information that you don’t want available to all Amazon Web Services accounts.
- values_to_remove(Vec<String>) / set_values_to_remove(Option<Vec<String>>):
 A list of DB cluster snapshot attributes to remove from the attribute specified by AttributeName.
 
 To remove authorization for other Amazon Web Services accounts to copy or restore a manual DB cluster snapshot, set this list to include one or more Amazon Web Services account identifiers, or all to remove authorization for any Amazon Web Services account to copy or restore the DB cluster snapshot. If you specify all, an Amazon Web Services account whose account ID is explicitly added to the restore attribute can still copy or restore a manual DB cluster snapshot.
On success, responds with ModifyDbClusterSnapshotAttributeOutput with field(s):
- db_cluster_snapshot_attributes_result(Option<DbClusterSnapshotAttributesResult>):
 Contains the results of a successful call to the DescribeDBClusterSnapshotAttributes API action.
 
 Manual DB cluster snapshot attributes are used to authorize other Amazon Web Services accounts to copy or restore a manual DB cluster snapshot. For more information, see the ModifyDBClusterSnapshotAttribute API action.
On failure, responds with SdkError<ModifyDBClusterSnapshotAttributeError>

source

pub fn modify_db_instance(&self) -> ModifyDBInstance

Constructs a fluent builder for the ModifyDBInstance operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_instance_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_instance_identifier(Option<String>):
 The DB instance identifier. This value is stored as a lowercase string.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must match the identifier of an existing DBInstance.
- allocated_storage(i32) / set_allocated_storage(Option<i32>):
 The new amount of storage in gibibytes (GiB) to allocate for the DB instance.
 
 For MariaDB, MySQL, Oracle, and PostgreSQL, the value supplied must be at least 10% greater than the current value. Values that are not at least 10% greater than the existing value are rounded up so that they are 10% greater than the current value.
 
 For the valid values for allocated storage for each engine, see CreateDBInstance.
- db_instance_class(impl Into<String>) / set_db_instance_class(Option<String>):
 The new compute and memory capacity of the DB instance, for example db.m4.large. Not all DB instance classes are available in all Amazon Web Services Regions, or for all database engines. For the full list of DB instance classes, and availability for your engine, see DB Instance Class in the Amazon RDS User Guide. For RDS Custom, see DB instance class support for RDS Custom for Oracle and DB instance class support for RDS Custom for SQL Server.
 
 If you modify the DB instance class, an outage occurs during the change. The change is applied during the next maintenance window, unless ApplyImmediately is enabled for this request.
 
 Default: Uses existing setting
- db_subnet_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_subnet_group_name(Option<String>):
 The new DB subnet group for the DB instance. You can use this parameter to move your DB instance to a different VPC. If your DB instance isn’t in a VPC, you can also use this parameter to move your DB instance into a VPC. For more information, see Working with a DB instance in a VPC in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 Changing the subnet group causes an outage during the change. The change is applied during the next maintenance window, unless you enable ApplyImmediately.
 
 This parameter doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
 
 Constraints: If supplied, must match the name of an existing DBSubnetGroup.
 
 Example: mydbsubnetgroup
- db_security_groups(Vec<String>) / set_db_security_groups(Option<Vec<String>>):
 A list of DB security groups to authorize on this DB instance. Changing this setting doesn’t result in an outage and the change is asynchronously applied as soon as possible.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
 
 Constraints:
 - If supplied, must match existing DBSecurityGroups.
- vpc_security_group_ids(Vec<String>) / set_vpc_security_group_ids(Option<Vec<String>>):
 A list of Amazon EC2 VPC security groups to authorize on this DB instance. This change is asynchronously applied as soon as possible.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
 
 Amazon Aurora
 
 Not applicable. The associated list of EC2 VPC security groups is managed by the DB cluster. For more information, see ModifyDBCluster.
 
 Constraints:
 - If supplied, must match existing VpcSecurityGroupIds.
- apply_immediately(bool) / set_apply_immediately(bool):
 A value that indicates whether the modifications in this request and any pending modifications are asynchronously applied as soon as possible, regardless of the PreferredMaintenanceWindow setting for the DB instance. By default, this parameter is disabled.
 
 If this parameter is disabled, changes to the DB instance are applied during the next maintenance window. Some parameter changes can cause an outage and are applied on the next call to RebootDBInstance, or the next failure reboot. Review the table of parameters in Modifying a DB Instance in the Amazon RDS User Guide to see the impact of enabling or disabling ApplyImmediately for each modified parameter and to determine when the changes are applied.
- master_user_password(impl Into<String>) / set_master_user_password(Option<String>):
 The new password for the master user. The password can include any printable ASCII character except “/”, “”“, or “@”.
 
 Changing this parameter doesn’t result in an outage and the change is asynchronously applied as soon as possible. Between the time of the request and the completion of the request, the MasterUserPassword element exists in the PendingModifiedValues element of the operation response.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
 
 Amazon Aurora
 
 Not applicable. The password for the master user is managed by the DB cluster. For more information, see ModifyDBCluster.
 
 Default: Uses existing setting
 
 MariaDB
 
 Constraints: Must contain from 8 to 41 characters.
 
 Microsoft SQL Server
 
 Constraints: Must contain from 8 to 128 characters.
 
 MySQL
 
 Constraints: Must contain from 8 to 41 characters.
 
 Oracle
 
 Constraints: Must contain from 8 to 30 characters.
 
 PostgreSQL
 
 Constraints: Must contain from 8 to 128 characters.
 
 Amazon RDS API operations never return the password, so this action provides a way to regain access to a primary instance user if the password is lost. This includes restoring privileges that might have been accidentally revoked.
- db_parameter_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_parameter_group_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the DB parameter group to apply to the DB instance.
 
 Changing this setting doesn’t result in an outage. The parameter group name itself is changed immediately, but the actual parameter changes are not applied until you reboot the instance without failover. In this case, the DB instance isn’t rebooted automatically, and the parameter changes aren’t applied during the next maintenance window. However, if you modify dynamic parameters in the newly associated DB parameter group, these changes are applied immediately without a reboot.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
 
 Default: Uses existing setting
 
 Constraints: The DB parameter group must be in the same DB parameter group family as the DB instance.
- backup_retention_period(i32) / set_backup_retention_period(Option<i32>):
 The number of days to retain automated backups. Setting this parameter to a positive number enables backups. Setting this parameter to 0 disables automated backups.
 
 Enabling and disabling backups can result in a brief I/O suspension that lasts from a few seconds to a few minutes, depending on the size and class of your DB instance.
 
 These changes are applied during the next maintenance window unless the ApplyImmediately parameter is enabled for this request. If you change the parameter from one non-zero value to another non-zero value, the change is asynchronously applied as soon as possible.
 
 Amazon Aurora
 
 Not applicable. The retention period for automated backups is managed by the DB cluster. For more information, see ModifyDBCluster.
 
 Default: Uses existing setting
 
 Constraints:
 - It must be a value from 0 to 35. It can’t be set to 0 if the DB instance is a source to read replicas. It can’t be set to 0 for an RDS Custom for Oracle DB instance.
 - It can be specified for a MySQL read replica only if the source is running MySQL 5.6 or later.
 - It can be specified for a PostgreSQL read replica only if the source is running PostgreSQL 9.3.5.
- preferred_backup_window(impl Into<String>) / set_preferred_backup_window(Option<String>):
 The daily time range during which automated backups are created if automated backups are enabled, as determined by the BackupRetentionPeriod parameter. Changing this parameter doesn’t result in an outage and the change is asynchronously applied as soon as possible. The default is a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Web Services Region. For more information, see Backup window in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 Amazon Aurora
 
 Not applicable. The daily time range for creating automated backups is managed by the DB cluster. For more information, see ModifyDBCluster.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must be in the format hh24:mi-hh24:mi
 - Must be in Universal Time Coordinated (UTC)
 - Must not conflict with the preferred maintenance window
 - Must be at least 30 minutes
- preferred_maintenance_window(impl Into<String>) / set_preferred_maintenance_window(Option<String>):
 The weekly time range (in UTC) during which system maintenance can occur, which might result in an outage. Changing this parameter doesn’t result in an outage, except in the following situation, and the change is asynchronously applied as soon as possible. If there are pending actions that cause a reboot, and the maintenance window is changed to include the current time, then changing this parameter will cause a reboot of the DB instance. If moving this window to the current time, there must be at least 30 minutes between the current time and end of the window to ensure pending changes are applied.
 
 For more information, see Amazon RDS Maintenance Window in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 Default: Uses existing setting
 
 Format: ddd:hh24:mi-ddd:hh24:mi
 
 Valid Days: Mon | Tue | Wed | Thu | Fri | Sat | Sun
 
 Constraints: Must be at least 30 minutes
- multi_az(bool) / set_multi_az(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether the DB instance is a Multi-AZ deployment. Changing this parameter doesn’t result in an outage. The change is applied during the next maintenance window unless the ApplyImmediately parameter is enabled for this request.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- engine_version(impl Into<String>) / set_engine_version(Option<String>):
 The version number of the database engine to upgrade to. Changing this parameter results in an outage and the change is applied during the next maintenance window unless the ApplyImmediately parameter is enabled for this request.
 
 For major version upgrades, if a nondefault DB parameter group is currently in use, a new DB parameter group in the DB parameter group family for the new engine version must be specified. The new DB parameter group can be the default for that DB parameter group family.
 
 If you specify only a major version, Amazon RDS will update the DB instance to the default minor version if the current minor version is lower. For information about valid engine versions, see CreateDBInstance, or call DescribeDBEngineVersions.
 
 In RDS Custom for Oracle, this parameter is supported for read replicas only if they are in the PATCH_DB_FAILURE lifecycle.
- allow_major_version_upgrade(bool) / set_allow_major_version_upgrade(bool):
 A value that indicates whether major version upgrades are allowed. Changing this parameter doesn’t result in an outage and the change is asynchronously applied as soon as possible.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
 
 Constraints: Major version upgrades must be allowed when specifying a value for the EngineVersion parameter that is a different major version than the DB instance’s current version.
- auto_minor_version_upgrade(bool) / set_auto_minor_version_upgrade(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether minor version upgrades are applied automatically to the DB instance during the maintenance window. An outage occurs when all the following conditions are met:
 - The automatic upgrade is enabled for the maintenance window.
 - A newer minor version is available.
 - RDS has enabled automatic patching for the engine version.
 If any of the preceding conditions isn’t met, RDS applies the change as soon as possible and doesn’t cause an outage.
 
 For an RDS Custom DB instance, set AutoMinorVersionUpgrade to false. Otherwise, the operation returns an error.
- license_model(impl Into<String>) / set_license_model(Option<String>):
 The license model for the DB instance.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
 
 Valid values: license-included | bring-your-own-license | general-public-license
- iops(i32) / set_iops(Option<i32>):
 The new Provisioned IOPS (I/O operations per second) value for the RDS instance.
 
 Changing this setting doesn’t result in an outage and the change is applied during the next maintenance window unless the ApplyImmediately parameter is enabled for this request. If you are migrating from Provisioned IOPS to standard storage, set this value to 0. The DB instance will require a reboot for the change in storage type to take effect.
 
 If you choose to migrate your DB instance from using standard storage to using Provisioned IOPS, or from using Provisioned IOPS to using standard storage, the process can take time. The duration of the migration depends on several factors such as database load, storage size, storage type (standard or Provisioned IOPS), amount of IOPS provisioned (if any), and the number of prior scale storage operations. Typical migration times are under 24 hours, but the process can take up to several days in some cases. During the migration, the DB instance is available for use, but might experience performance degradation. While the migration takes place, nightly backups for the instance are suspended. No other Amazon RDS operations can take place for the instance, including modifying the instance, rebooting the instance, deleting the instance, creating a read replica for the instance, and creating a DB snapshot of the instance.
 
 Constraints: For MariaDB, MySQL, Oracle, and PostgreSQL, the value supplied must be at least 10% greater than the current value. Values that are not at least 10% greater than the existing value are rounded up so that they are 10% greater than the current value.
 
 Default: Uses existing setting
- option_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_option_group_name(Option<String>):
 A value that indicates the DB instance should be associated with the specified option group.
 
 Changing this parameter doesn’t result in an outage, with one exception. If the parameter change results in an option group that enables OEM, it can cause a brief period, lasting less than a second, during which new connections are rejected but existing connections aren’t interrupted.
 
 The change is applied during the next maintenance window unless the ApplyImmediately parameter is enabled for this request.
 
 Permanent options, such as the TDE option for Oracle Advanced Security TDE, can’t be removed from an option group, and that option group can’t be removed from a DB instance after it is associated with a DB instance.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- new_db_instance_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_new_db_instance_identifier(Option<String>):
 The new DB instance identifier for the DB instance when renaming a DB instance. When you change the DB instance identifier, an instance reboot occurs immediately if you enable ApplyImmediately, or will occur during the next maintenance window if you disable Apply Immediately. This value is stored as a lowercase string.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must contain from 1 to 63 letters, numbers, or hyphens.
 - The first character must be a letter.
 - Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.
 Example: mydbinstance
- storage_type(impl Into<String>) / set_storage_type(Option<String>):
 Specifies the storage type to be associated with the DB instance.
 
 If you specify Provisioned IOPS (io1), you must also include a value for the Iops parameter.
 
 If you choose to migrate your DB instance from using standard storage to using Provisioned IOPS, or from using Provisioned IOPS to using standard storage, the process can take time. The duration of the migration depends on several factors such as database load, storage size, storage type (standard or Provisioned IOPS), amount of IOPS provisioned (if any), and the number of prior scale storage operations. Typical migration times are under 24 hours, but the process can take up to several days in some cases. During the migration, the DB instance is available for use, but might experience performance degradation. While the migration takes place, nightly backups for the instance are suspended. No other Amazon RDS operations can take place for the instance, including modifying the instance, rebooting the instance, deleting the instance, creating a read replica for the instance, and creating a DB snapshot of the instance.
 
 Valid values: standard | gp2 | io1
 
 Default: io1 if the Iops parameter is specified, otherwise gp2
- tde_credential_arn(impl Into<String>) / set_tde_credential_arn(Option<String>):
 The ARN from the key store with which to associate the instance for TDE encryption.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- tde_credential_password(impl Into<String>) / set_tde_credential_password(Option<String>):
 The password for the given ARN from the key store in order to access the device.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- ca_certificate_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_ca_certificate_identifier(Option<String>):
 Specifies the certificate to associate with the DB instance.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- domain(impl Into<String>) / set_domain(Option<String>):
 The Active Directory directory ID to move the DB instance to. Specify none to remove the instance from its current domain. You must create the domain before this operation. Currently, you can create only MySQL, Microsoft SQL Server, Oracle, and PostgreSQL DB instances in an Active Directory Domain.
 
 For more information, see Kerberos Authentication in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- copy_tags_to_snapshot(bool) / set_copy_tags_to_snapshot(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether to copy all tags from the DB instance to snapshots of the DB instance. By default, tags are not copied.
 
 Amazon Aurora
 
 Not applicable. Copying tags to snapshots is managed by the DB cluster. Setting this value for an Aurora DB instance has no effect on the DB cluster setting. For more information, see ModifyDBCluster.
- monitoring_interval(i32) / set_monitoring_interval(Option<i32>):
 The interval, in seconds, between points when Enhanced Monitoring metrics are collected for the DB instance. To disable collecting Enhanced Monitoring metrics, specify 0, which is the default.
 
 If MonitoringRoleArn is specified, set MonitoringInterval to a value other than 0.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
 
 Valid Values: 0, 1, 5, 10, 15, 30, 60
- db_port_number(i32) / set_db_port_number(Option<i32>):
 The port number on which the database accepts connections.
 
 The value of the DBPortNumber parameter must not match any of the port values specified for options in the option group for the DB instance.
 
 If you change the DBPortNumber value, your database restarts regardless of the value of the ApplyImmediately parameter.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
 
 MySQL
 
 Default: 3306
 
 Valid values: 1150-65535
 
 MariaDB
 
 Default: 3306
 
 Valid values: 1150-65535
 
 PostgreSQL
 
 Default: 5432
 
 Valid values: 1150-65535
 
 Type: Integer
 
 Oracle
 
 Default: 1521
 
 Valid values: 1150-65535
 
 SQL Server
 
 Default: 1433
 
 Valid values: 1150-65535 except 1234, 1434, 3260, 3343, 3389, 47001, and 49152-49156.
 
 Amazon Aurora
 
 Default: 3306
 
 Valid values: 1150-65535
- publicly_accessible(bool) / set_publicly_accessible(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether the DB instance is publicly accessible.
 
 When the DB cluster is publicly accessible, its Domain Name System (DNS) endpoint resolves to the private IP address from within the DB cluster’s virtual private cloud (VPC). It resolves to the public IP address from outside of the DB cluster’s VPC. Access to the DB cluster is ultimately controlled by the security group it uses. That public access isn’t permitted if the security group assigned to the DB cluster doesn’t permit it.
 
 When the DB instance isn’t publicly accessible, it is an internal DB instance with a DNS name that resolves to a private IP address.
 
 PubliclyAccessible only applies to DB instances in a VPC. The DB instance must be part of a public subnet and PubliclyAccessible must be enabled for it to be publicly accessible.
 
 Changes to the PubliclyAccessible parameter are applied immediately regardless of the value of the ApplyImmediately parameter.
- monitoring_role_arn(impl Into<String>) / set_monitoring_role_arn(Option<String>):
 The ARN for the IAM role that permits RDS to send enhanced monitoring metrics to Amazon CloudWatch Logs. For example, arn:aws:iam:123456789012:role/emaccess. For information on creating a monitoring role, see To create an IAM role for Amazon RDS Enhanced Monitoring in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 If MonitoringInterval is set to a value other than 0, supply a MonitoringRoleArn value.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- domain_iam_role_name(impl Into<String>) / set_domain_iam_role_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the IAM role to use when making API calls to the Directory Service.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- promotion_tier(i32) / set_promotion_tier(Option<i32>):
 A value that specifies the order in which an Aurora Replica is promoted to the primary instance after a failure of the existing primary instance. For more information, see Fault Tolerance for an Aurora DB Cluster in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
 
 Default: 1
 
 Valid Values: 0 - 15
- enable_iam_database_authentication(bool) / set_enable_iam_database_authentication(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether to enable mapping of Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) accounts to database accounts. By default, mapping isn’t enabled.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to Amazon Aurora. Mapping Amazon Web Services IAM accounts to database accounts is managed by the DB cluster.
 
 For more information about IAM database authentication, see IAM Database Authentication for MySQL and PostgreSQL in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- enable_performance_insights(bool) / set_enable_performance_insights(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether to enable Performance Insights for the DB instance.
 
 For more information, see Using Amazon Performance Insights in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- performance_insights_kms_key_id(impl Into<String>) / set_performance_insights_kms_key_id(Option<String>):
 The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for encryption of Performance Insights data.
 
 The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key.
 
 If you do not specify a value for PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId, then Amazon RDS uses your default KMS key. There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- performance_insights_retention_period(i32) / set_performance_insights_retention_period(Option<i32>):
 The number of days to retain Performance Insights data. The default is 7 days. The following values are valid:
 - 7
 - month * 31, where month is a number of months from 1-23
 - 731
 For example, the following values are valid:
 - 93 (3 months * 31)
 - 341 (11 months * 31)
 - 589 (19 months * 31)
 - 731
 If you specify a retention period such as 94, which isn’t a valid value, RDS issues an error.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- cloudwatch_logs_export_configuration(CloudwatchLogsExportConfiguration) / set_cloudwatch_logs_export_configuration(Option<CloudwatchLogsExportConfiguration>):
 The configuration setting for the log types to be enabled for export to CloudWatch Logs for a specific DB instance.
 
 A change to the CloudwatchLogsExportConfiguration parameter is always applied to the DB instance immediately. Therefore, the ApplyImmediately parameter has no effect.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- processor_features(Vec<ProcessorFeature>) / set_processor_features(Option<Vec<ProcessorFeature>>):
 The number of CPU cores and the number of threads per core for the DB instance class of the DB instance.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- use_default_processor_features(bool) / set_use_default_processor_features(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether the DB instance class of the DB instance uses its default processor features.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- deletion_protection(bool) / set_deletion_protection(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether the DB instance has deletion protection enabled. The database can’t be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. By default, deletion protection isn’t enabled. For more information, see Deleting a DB Instance.
- max_allocated_storage(i32) / set_max_allocated_storage(Option<i32>):
 The upper limit in gibibytes (GiB) to which Amazon RDS can automatically scale the storage of the DB instance.
 
 For more information about this setting, including limitations that apply to it, see Managing capacity automatically with Amazon RDS storage autoscaling in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- certificate_rotation_restart(bool) / set_certificate_rotation_restart(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether the DB instance is restarted when you rotate your SSL/TLS certificate.
 
 By default, the DB instance is restarted when you rotate your SSL/TLS certificate. The certificate is not updated until the DB instance is restarted.
 
 Set this parameter only if you are not using SSL/TLS to connect to the DB instance.
 
 If you are using SSL/TLS to connect to the DB instance, follow the appropriate instructions for your DB engine to rotate your SSL/TLS certificate:
 - For more information about rotating your SSL/TLS certificate for RDS DB engines, see Rotating Your SSL/TLS Certificate. in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 - For more information about rotating your SSL/TLS certificate for Aurora DB engines, see Rotating Your SSL/TLS Certificate in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- replica_mode(ReplicaMode) / set_replica_mode(Option<ReplicaMode>):
 A value that sets the open mode of a replica database to either mounted or read-only.
 
 Currently, this parameter is only supported for Oracle DB instances.
 
 Mounted DB replicas are included in Oracle Enterprise Edition. The main use case for mounted replicas is cross-Region disaster recovery. The primary database doesn’t use Active Data Guard to transmit information to the mounted replica. Because it doesn’t accept user connections, a mounted replica can’t serve a read-only workload. For more information, see Working with Oracle Read Replicas for Amazon RDS in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- enable_customer_owned_ip(bool) / set_enable_customer_owned_ip(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether to enable a customer-owned IP address (CoIP) for an RDS on Outposts DB instance.
 
 A CoIP provides local or external connectivity to resources in your Outpost subnets through your on-premises network. For some use cases, a CoIP can provide lower latency for connections to the DB instance from outside of its virtual private cloud (VPC) on your local network.
 
 For more information about RDS on Outposts, see Working with Amazon RDS on Amazon Web Services Outposts in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 For more information about CoIPs, see Customer-owned IP addresses in the Amazon Web Services Outposts User Guide.
- aws_backup_recovery_point_arn(impl Into<String>) / set_aws_backup_recovery_point_arn(Option<String>):
 The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the recovery point in Amazon Web Services Backup.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- automation_mode(AutomationMode) / set_automation_mode(Option<AutomationMode>):
 The automation mode of the RDS Custom DB instance: full or all paused. If full, the DB instance automates monitoring and instance recovery. If all paused, the instance pauses automation for the duration set by ResumeFullAutomationModeMinutes.
- resume_full_automation_mode_minutes(i32) / set_resume_full_automation_mode_minutes(Option<i32>):
 The number of minutes to pause the automation. When the time period ends, RDS Custom resumes full automation. The minimum value is 60 (default). The maximum value is 1,440.
- network_type(impl Into<String>) / set_network_type(Option<String>):
 The network type of the DB instance.
 
 Valid values:
 - IPV4
 - DUAL
 The network type is determined by the DBSubnetGroup specified for the DB instance. A DBSubnetGroup can support only the IPv4 protocol or the IPv4 and the IPv6 protocols (DUAL).
 
 For more information, see Working with a DB instance in a VPC in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
On success, responds with ModifyDbInstanceOutput with field(s):
- db_instance(Option<DbInstance>):
 Contains the details of an Amazon RDS DB instance.
 
 This data type is used as a response element in the operations CreateDBInstance, CreateDBInstanceReadReplica, DeleteDBInstance, DescribeDBInstances, ModifyDBInstance, PromoteReadReplica, RebootDBInstance, RestoreDBInstanceFromDBSnapshot, RestoreDBInstanceFromS3, RestoreDBInstanceToPointInTime, StartDBInstance, and StopDBInstance.
On failure, responds with SdkError<ModifyDBInstanceError>

source

pub fn modify_db_parameter_group(&self) -> ModifyDBParameterGroup

Constructs a fluent builder for the ModifyDBParameterGroup operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_parameter_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_parameter_group_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the DB parameter group.
 
 Constraints:
 - If supplied, must match the name of an existing DBParameterGroup.
- parameters(Vec<Parameter>) / set_parameters(Option<Vec<Parameter>>):
 An array of parameter names, values, and the application methods for the parameter update. At least one parameter name, value, and application method must be supplied; later arguments are optional. A maximum of 20 parameters can be modified in a single request.
 
 Valid Values (for the application method): immediate | pending-reboot
 
 You can use the immediate value with dynamic parameters only. You can use the pending-reboot value for both dynamic and static parameters.
 
 When the application method is immediate, changes to dynamic parameters are applied immediately to the DB instances associated with the parameter group.
 
 When the application method is pending-reboot, changes to dynamic and static parameters are applied after a reboot without failover to the DB instances associated with the parameter group.
 
 You can’t use pending-reboot with dynamic parameters on RDS for SQL Server DB instances. Use immediate.
 
 For more information on modifying DB parameters, see Working with DB parameter groups in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
On success, responds with ModifyDbParameterGroupOutput with field(s):
- db_parameter_group_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the DB parameter group.
On failure, responds with SdkError<ModifyDBParameterGroupError>

source

pub fn modify_db_proxy(&self) -> ModifyDBProxy

Constructs a fluent builder for the ModifyDBProxy operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_proxy_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_proxy_name(Option<String>):
 The identifier for the DBProxy to modify.
- new_db_proxy_name(impl Into<String>) / set_new_db_proxy_name(Option<String>):
 The new identifier for the DBProxy. An identifier must begin with a letter and must contain only ASCII letters, digits, and hyphens; it can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.
- auth(Vec<UserAuthConfig>) / set_auth(Option<Vec<UserAuthConfig>>):
 The new authentication settings for the DBProxy.
- require_tls(bool) / set_require_tls(Option<bool>):
 Whether Transport Layer Security (TLS) encryption is required for connections to the proxy. By enabling this setting, you can enforce encrypted TLS connections to the proxy, even if the associated database doesn’t use TLS.
- idle_client_timeout(i32) / set_idle_client_timeout(Option<i32>):
 The number of seconds that a connection to the proxy can be inactive before the proxy disconnects it. You can set this value higher or lower than the connection timeout limit for the associated database.
- debug_logging(bool) / set_debug_logging(Option<bool>):
 Whether the proxy includes detailed information about SQL statements in its logs. This information helps you to debug issues involving SQL behavior or the performance and scalability of the proxy connections. The debug information includes the text of SQL statements that you submit through the proxy. Thus, only enable this setting when needed for debugging, and only when you have security measures in place to safeguard any sensitive information that appears in the logs.
- role_arn(impl Into<String>) / set_role_arn(Option<String>):
 The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role that the proxy uses to access secrets in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager.
- security_groups(Vec<String>) / set_security_groups(Option<Vec<String>>):
 The new list of security groups for the DBProxy.
On success, responds with ModifyDbProxyOutput with field(s):
- db_proxy(Option<DbProxy>):
 The DBProxy object representing the new settings for the proxy.
On failure, responds with SdkError<ModifyDBProxyError>

source

pub fn modify_db_proxy_endpoint(&self) -> ModifyDBProxyEndpoint

Constructs a fluent builder for the ModifyDBProxyEndpoint operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_proxy_endpoint_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_proxy_endpoint_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the DB proxy sociated with the DB proxy endpoint that you want to modify.
- new_db_proxy_endpoint_name(impl Into<String>) / set_new_db_proxy_endpoint_name(Option<String>):
 The new identifier for the DBProxyEndpoint. An identifier must begin with a letter and must contain only ASCII letters, digits, and hyphens; it can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.
- vpc_security_group_ids(Vec<String>) / set_vpc_security_group_ids(Option<Vec<String>>):
 The VPC security group IDs for the DB proxy endpoint. When the DB proxy endpoint uses a different VPC than the original proxy, you also specify a different set of security group IDs than for the original proxy.
On success, responds with ModifyDbProxyEndpointOutput with field(s):
- db_proxy_endpoint(Option<DbProxyEndpoint>):
 The DBProxyEndpoint object representing the new settings for the DB proxy endpoint.
On failure, responds with SdkError<ModifyDBProxyEndpointError>

source

pub fn modify_db_proxy_target_group(&self) -> ModifyDBProxyTargetGroup

Constructs a fluent builder for the ModifyDBProxyTargetGroup operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- target_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_target_group_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the target group to modify.
- db_proxy_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_proxy_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the proxy.
- connection_pool_config(ConnectionPoolConfiguration) / set_connection_pool_config(Option<ConnectionPoolConfiguration>):
 The settings that determine the size and behavior of the connection pool for the target group.
- new_name(impl Into<String>) / set_new_name(Option<String>):
 The new name for the modified DBProxyTarget. An identifier must begin with a letter and must contain only ASCII letters, digits, and hyphens; it can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.
On success, responds with ModifyDbProxyTargetGroupOutput with field(s):
- db_proxy_target_group(Option<DbProxyTargetGroup>):
 The settings of the modified DBProxyTarget.
On failure, responds with SdkError<ModifyDBProxyTargetGroupError>

source

pub fn modify_db_snapshot(&self) -> ModifyDBSnapshot

Constructs a fluent builder for the ModifyDBSnapshot operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_snapshot_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_snapshot_identifier(Option<String>):
 The identifier of the DB snapshot to modify.
- engine_version(impl Into<String>) / set_engine_version(Option<String>):
 The engine version to upgrade the DB snapshot to.
 
 The following are the database engines and engine versions that are available when you upgrade a DB snapshot.
 
 MySQL
 - 5.5.46 (supported for 5.1 DB snapshots)
 Oracle
 - 12.1.0.2.v8 (supported for 12.1.0.1 DB snapshots)
 - 11.2.0.4.v12 (supported for 11.2.0.2 DB snapshots)
 - 11.2.0.4.v11 (supported for 11.2.0.3 DB snapshots)
 PostgreSQL
 
 For the list of engine versions that are available for upgrading a DB snapshot, see Upgrading the PostgreSQL DB Engine for Amazon RDS.
- option_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_option_group_name(Option<String>):
 The option group to identify with the upgraded DB snapshot.
 
 You can specify this parameter when you upgrade an Oracle DB snapshot. The same option group considerations apply when upgrading a DB snapshot as when upgrading a DB instance. For more information, see Option group considerations in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
On success, responds with ModifyDbSnapshotOutput with field(s):
- db_snapshot(Option<DbSnapshot>):
 Contains the details of an Amazon RDS DB snapshot.
 
 This data type is used as a response element in the DescribeDBSnapshots action.
On failure, responds with SdkError<ModifyDBSnapshotError>

source

pub fn modify_db_snapshot_attribute(&self) -> ModifyDBSnapshotAttribute

Constructs a fluent builder for the ModifyDBSnapshotAttribute operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_snapshot_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_snapshot_identifier(Option<String>):
 The identifier for the DB snapshot to modify the attributes for.
- attribute_name(impl Into<String>) / set_attribute_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the DB snapshot attribute to modify.
 
 To manage authorization for other Amazon Web Services accounts to copy or restore a manual DB snapshot, set this value to restore.
 
 To view the list of attributes available to modify, use the DescribeDBSnapshotAttributes API operation.
- values_to_add(Vec<String>) / set_values_to_add(Option<Vec<String>>):
 A list of DB snapshot attributes to add to the attribute specified by AttributeName.
 
 To authorize other Amazon Web Services accounts to copy or restore a manual snapshot, set this list to include one or more Amazon Web Services account IDs, or all to make the manual DB snapshot restorable by any Amazon Web Services account. Do not add the all value for any manual DB snapshots that contain private information that you don’t want available to all Amazon Web Services accounts.
- values_to_remove(Vec<String>) / set_values_to_remove(Option<Vec<String>>):
 A list of DB snapshot attributes to remove from the attribute specified by AttributeName.
 
 To remove authorization for other Amazon Web Services accounts to copy or restore a manual snapshot, set this list to include one or more Amazon Web Services account identifiers, or all to remove authorization for any Amazon Web Services account to copy or restore the DB snapshot. If you specify all, an Amazon Web Services account whose account ID is explicitly added to the restore attribute can still copy or restore the manual DB snapshot.
On success, responds with ModifyDbSnapshotAttributeOutput with field(s):
- db_snapshot_attributes_result(Option<DbSnapshotAttributesResult>):
 Contains the results of a successful call to the DescribeDBSnapshotAttributes API action.
 
 Manual DB snapshot attributes are used to authorize other Amazon Web Services accounts to copy or restore a manual DB snapshot. For more information, see the ModifyDBSnapshotAttribute API action.
On failure, responds with SdkError<ModifyDBSnapshotAttributeError>

source

pub fn modify_db_subnet_group(&self) -> ModifyDBSubnetGroup

Constructs a fluent builder for the ModifyDBSubnetGroup operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_subnet_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_subnet_group_name(Option<String>):
 The name for the DB subnet group. This value is stored as a lowercase string. You can’t modify the default subnet group.
 
 Constraints: Must match the name of an existing DBSubnetGroup. Must not be default.
 
 Example: mydbsubnetgroup
- db_subnet_group_description(impl Into<String>) / set_db_subnet_group_description(Option<String>):
 The description for the DB subnet group.
- subnet_ids(Vec<String>) / set_subnet_ids(Option<Vec<String>>):
 The EC2 subnet IDs for the DB subnet group.
On success, responds with ModifyDbSubnetGroupOutput with field(s):
- db_subnet_group(Option<DbSubnetGroup>):
 Contains the details of an Amazon RDS DB subnet group.
 
 This data type is used as a response element in the DescribeDBSubnetGroups action.
On failure, responds with SdkError<ModifyDBSubnetGroupError>

source

pub fn modify_event_subscription(&self) -> ModifyEventSubscription

Constructs a fluent builder for the ModifyEventSubscription operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- subscription_name(impl Into<String>) / set_subscription_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the RDS event notification subscription.
- sns_topic_arn(impl Into<String>) / set_sns_topic_arn(Option<String>):
 The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the SNS topic created for event notification. The ARN is created by Amazon SNS when you create a topic and subscribe to it.
- source_type(impl Into<String>) / set_source_type(Option<String>):
 The type of source that is generating the events. For example, if you want to be notified of events generated by a DB instance, you would set this parameter to db-instance. For RDS Proxy events, specify db-proxy. If this value isn’t specified, all events are returned.
 
 Valid values: db-instance | db-cluster | db-parameter-group | db-security-group | db-snapshot | db-cluster-snapshot | db-proxy
- event_categories(Vec<String>) / set_event_categories(Option<Vec<String>>):
 A list of event categories for a source type (SourceType) that you want to subscribe to. You can see a list of the categories for a given source type in Events in the Amazon RDS User Guide or by using the DescribeEventCategories operation.
- enabled(bool) / set_enabled(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether to activate the subscription.
On success, responds with ModifyEventSubscriptionOutput with field(s):
- event_subscription(Option<EventSubscription>):
 Contains the results of a successful invocation of the DescribeEventSubscriptions action.
On failure, responds with SdkError<ModifyEventSubscriptionError>

source

pub fn modify_global_cluster(&self) -> ModifyGlobalCluster

Constructs a fluent builder for the ModifyGlobalCluster operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- global_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_global_cluster_identifier(Option<String>):
 The DB cluster identifier for the global cluster being modified. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must match the identifier of an existing global database cluster.
- new_global_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_new_global_cluster_identifier(Option<String>):
 The new cluster identifier for the global database cluster when modifying a global database cluster. This value is stored as a lowercase string.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must contain from 1 to 63 letters, numbers, or hyphens
 - The first character must be a letter
 - Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens
 Example: my-cluster2
- deletion_protection(bool) / set_deletion_protection(Option<bool>):
 Indicates if the global database cluster has deletion protection enabled. The global database cluster can’t be deleted when deletion protection is enabled.
- engine_version(impl Into<String>) / set_engine_version(Option<String>):
 The version number of the database engine to which you want to upgrade. Changing this parameter results in an outage. The change is applied during the next maintenance window unless ApplyImmediately is enabled.
 
 To list all of the available engine versions for aurora (for MySQL 5.6-compatible Aurora), use the following command:
 
 aws rds describe-db-engine-versions –engine aurora –query ‘[]|[?SupportsGlobalDatabases == true].[EngineVersion]’
 
 To list all of the available engine versions for aurora-mysql (for MySQL 5.7-compatible and MySQL 8.0-compatible Aurora), use the following command:
 
 aws rds describe-db-engine-versions –engine aurora-mysql –query ‘[]|[?SupportsGlobalDatabases == true].[EngineVersion]’
 
 To list all of the available engine versions for aurora-postgresql, use the following command:
 
 aws rds describe-db-engine-versions –engine aurora-postgresql –query ‘*[]|[?SupportsGlobalDatabases == true].[EngineVersion]’
- allow_major_version_upgrade(bool) / set_allow_major_version_upgrade(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether major version upgrades are allowed.
 
 Constraints: You must allow major version upgrades when specifying a value for the EngineVersion parameter that is a different major version than the DB cluster’s current version.
 
 If you upgrade the major version of a global database, the cluster and DB instance parameter groups are set to the default parameter groups for the new version. Apply any custom parameter groups after completing the upgrade.
On success, responds with ModifyGlobalClusterOutput with field(s):
- global_cluster(Option<GlobalCluster>):
 A data type representing an Aurora global database.
On failure, responds with SdkError<ModifyGlobalClusterError>

source

pub fn modify_option_group(&self) -> ModifyOptionGroup

Constructs a fluent builder for the ModifyOptionGroup operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- option_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_option_group_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the option group to be modified.
 
 Permanent options, such as the TDE option for Oracle Advanced Security TDE, can’t be removed from an option group, and that option group can’t be removed from a DB instance once it is associated with a DB instance
- options_to_include(Vec<OptionConfiguration>) / set_options_to_include(Option<Vec<OptionConfiguration>>):
 Options in this list are added to the option group or, if already present, the specified configuration is used to update the existing configuration.
- options_to_remove(Vec<String>) / set_options_to_remove(Option<Vec<String>>):
 Options in this list are removed from the option group.
- apply_immediately(bool) / set_apply_immediately(bool):
 A value that indicates whether to apply the change immediately or during the next maintenance window for each instance associated with the option group.
On success, responds with ModifyOptionGroupOutput with field(s):
- option_group(Option<OptionGroup>):
On failure, responds with SdkError<ModifyOptionGroupError>

source

pub fn promote_read_replica(&self) -> PromoteReadReplica

Constructs a fluent builder for the PromoteReadReplica operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_instance_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_instance_identifier(Option<String>):
 The DB instance identifier. This value is stored as a lowercase string.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must match the identifier of an existing read replica DB instance.
 Example: mydbinstance
- backup_retention_period(i32) / set_backup_retention_period(Option<i32>):
 The number of days for which automated backups are retained. Setting this parameter to a positive number enables backups. Setting this parameter to 0 disables automated backups.
 
 Default: 1
 
 Constraints:
 - Must be a value from 0 to 35.
 - Can’t be set to 0 if the DB instance is a source to read replicas.
- preferred_backup_window(impl Into<String>) / set_preferred_backup_window(Option<String>):
 The daily time range during which automated backups are created if automated backups are enabled, using the BackupRetentionPeriod parameter.
 
 The default is a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Web Services Region. To see the time blocks available, see Adjusting the Preferred Maintenance Window in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must be in the format hh24:mi-hh24:mi.
 - Must be in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).
 - Must not conflict with the preferred maintenance window.
 - Must be at least 30 minutes.
On success, responds with PromoteReadReplicaOutput with field(s):
- db_instance(Option<DbInstance>):
 Contains the details of an Amazon RDS DB instance.
 
 This data type is used as a response element in the operations CreateDBInstance, CreateDBInstanceReadReplica, DeleteDBInstance, DescribeDBInstances, ModifyDBInstance, PromoteReadReplica, RebootDBInstance, RestoreDBInstanceFromDBSnapshot, RestoreDBInstanceFromS3, RestoreDBInstanceToPointInTime, StartDBInstance, and StopDBInstance.
On failure, responds with SdkError<PromoteReadReplicaError>

source

pub fn promote_read_replica_db_cluster(&self) -> PromoteReadReplicaDBCluster

Constructs a fluent builder for the PromoteReadReplicaDBCluster operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>):
 The identifier of the DB cluster read replica to promote. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must match the identifier of an existing DB cluster read replica.
 Example: my-cluster-replica1
On success, responds with PromoteReadReplicaDbClusterOutput with field(s):
- db_cluster(Option<DbCluster>):
 Contains the details of an Amazon Aurora DB cluster or Multi-AZ DB cluster.
 
 For an Amazon Aurora DB cluster, this data type is used as a response element in the operations CreateDBCluster, DeleteDBCluster, DescribeDBClusters, FailoverDBCluster, ModifyDBCluster, PromoteReadReplicaDBCluster, RestoreDBClusterFromS3, RestoreDBClusterFromSnapshot, RestoreDBClusterToPointInTime, StartDBCluster, and StopDBCluster.
 
 For a Multi-AZ DB cluster, this data type is used as a response element in the operations CreateDBCluster, DeleteDBCluster, DescribeDBClusters, FailoverDBCluster, ModifyDBCluster, RebootDBCluster, RestoreDBClusterFromSnapshot, and RestoreDBClusterToPointInTime.
 
 For more information on Amazon Aurora DB clusters, see What is Amazon Aurora? in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
 
 For more information on Multi-AZ DB clusters, see Multi-AZ deployments with two readable standby DB instances in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
On failure, responds with SdkError<PromoteReadReplicaDBClusterError>

source

pub fn purchase_reserved_db_instances_offering(
&self
) -> PurchaseReservedDBInstancesOffering

Constructs a fluent builder for the PurchaseReservedDBInstancesOffering operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- reserved_db_instances_offering_id(impl Into<String>) / set_reserved_db_instances_offering_id(Option<String>):
 The ID of the Reserved DB instance offering to purchase.
 
 Example: 438012d3-4052-4cc7-b2e3-8d3372e0e706
- reserved_db_instance_id(impl Into<String>) / set_reserved_db_instance_id(Option<String>):
 Customer-specified identifier to track this reservation.
 
 Example: myreservationID
- db_instance_count(i32) / set_db_instance_count(Option<i32>):
 The number of instances to reserve.
 
 Default: 1
- tags(Vec<Tag>) / set_tags(Option<Vec<Tag>>):
 A list of tags. For more information, see Tagging Amazon RDS Resources in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
On success, responds with PurchaseReservedDbInstancesOfferingOutput with field(s):
- reserved_db_instance(Option<ReservedDbInstance>):
 This data type is used as a response element in the DescribeReservedDBInstances and PurchaseReservedDBInstancesOffering actions.
On failure, responds with SdkError<PurchaseReservedDBInstancesOfferingError>

source

pub fn reboot_db_cluster(&self) -> RebootDBCluster

Constructs a fluent builder for the RebootDBCluster operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>):
 The DB cluster identifier. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must match the identifier of an existing DBCluster.
On success, responds with RebootDbClusterOutput with field(s):
- db_cluster(Option<DbCluster>):
 Contains the details of an Amazon Aurora DB cluster or Multi-AZ DB cluster.
 
 For an Amazon Aurora DB cluster, this data type is used as a response element in the operations CreateDBCluster, DeleteDBCluster, DescribeDBClusters, FailoverDBCluster, ModifyDBCluster, PromoteReadReplicaDBCluster, RestoreDBClusterFromS3, RestoreDBClusterFromSnapshot, RestoreDBClusterToPointInTime, StartDBCluster, and StopDBCluster.
 
 For a Multi-AZ DB cluster, this data type is used as a response element in the operations CreateDBCluster, DeleteDBCluster, DescribeDBClusters, FailoverDBCluster, ModifyDBCluster, RebootDBCluster, RestoreDBClusterFromSnapshot, and RestoreDBClusterToPointInTime.
 
 For more information on Amazon Aurora DB clusters, see What is Amazon Aurora? in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
 
 For more information on Multi-AZ DB clusters, see Multi-AZ deployments with two readable standby DB instances in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
On failure, responds with SdkError<RebootDBClusterError>

source

pub fn reboot_db_instance(&self) -> RebootDBInstance

Constructs a fluent builder for the RebootDBInstance operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_instance_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_instance_identifier(Option<String>):
 The DB instance identifier. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must match the identifier of an existing DBInstance.
- force_failover(bool) / set_force_failover(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether the reboot is conducted through a Multi-AZ failover.
 
 Constraint: You can’t enable force failover if the instance isn’t configured for Multi-AZ.
On success, responds with RebootDbInstanceOutput with field(s):
- db_instance(Option<DbInstance>):
 Contains the details of an Amazon RDS DB instance.
 
 This data type is used as a response element in the operations CreateDBInstance, CreateDBInstanceReadReplica, DeleteDBInstance, DescribeDBInstances, ModifyDBInstance, PromoteReadReplica, RebootDBInstance, RestoreDBInstanceFromDBSnapshot, RestoreDBInstanceFromS3, RestoreDBInstanceToPointInTime, StartDBInstance, and StopDBInstance.
On failure, responds with SdkError<RebootDBInstanceError>

source

pub fn register_db_proxy_targets(&self) -> RegisterDBProxyTargets

Constructs a fluent builder for the RegisterDBProxyTargets operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_proxy_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_proxy_name(Option<String>):
 The identifier of the DBProxy that is associated with the DBProxyTargetGroup.
- target_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_target_group_name(Option<String>):
 The identifier of the DBProxyTargetGroup.
- db_instance_identifiers(Vec<String>) / set_db_instance_identifiers(Option<Vec<String>>):
 One or more DB instance identifiers.
- db_cluster_identifiers(Vec<String>) / set_db_cluster_identifiers(Option<Vec<String>>):
 One or more DB cluster identifiers.
On success, responds with RegisterDbProxyTargetsOutput with field(s):
- db_proxy_targets(Option<Vec<DbProxyTarget>>):
 One or more DBProxyTarget objects that are created when you register targets with a target group.
On failure, responds with SdkError<RegisterDBProxyTargetsError>

source

pub fn remove_from_global_cluster(&self) -> RemoveFromGlobalCluster

Constructs a fluent builder for the RemoveFromGlobalCluster operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- global_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_global_cluster_identifier(Option<String>):
 The cluster identifier to detach from the Aurora global database cluster.
- db_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>):
 The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) identifying the cluster that was detached from the Aurora global database cluster.
On success, responds with RemoveFromGlobalClusterOutput with field(s):
- global_cluster(Option<GlobalCluster>):
 A data type representing an Aurora global database.
On failure, responds with SdkError<RemoveFromGlobalClusterError>

source

pub fn remove_role_from_db_cluster(&self) -> RemoveRoleFromDBCluster

Constructs a fluent builder for the RemoveRoleFromDBCluster operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>):
 The name of the DB cluster to disassociate the IAM role from.
- role_arn(impl Into<String>) / set_role_arn(Option<String>):
 The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role to disassociate from the Aurora DB cluster, for example arn:aws:iam::123456789012:role/AuroraAccessRole.
- feature_name(impl Into<String>) / set_feature_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the feature for the DB cluster that the IAM role is to be disassociated from. For information about supported feature names, see DBEngineVersion.
On success, responds with RemoveRoleFromDbClusterOutput
On failure, responds with SdkError<RemoveRoleFromDBClusterError>

source

pub fn remove_role_from_db_instance(&self) -> RemoveRoleFromDBInstance

Constructs a fluent builder for the RemoveRoleFromDBInstance operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_instance_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_instance_identifier(Option<String>):
 The name of the DB instance to disassociate the IAM role from.
- role_arn(impl Into<String>) / set_role_arn(Option<String>):
 The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role to disassociate from the DB instance, for example, arn:aws:iam::123456789012:role/AccessRole.
- feature_name(impl Into<String>) / set_feature_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the feature for the DB instance that the IAM role is to be disassociated from. For information about supported feature names, see DBEngineVersion.
On success, responds with RemoveRoleFromDbInstanceOutput
On failure, responds with SdkError<RemoveRoleFromDBInstanceError>

source

pub fn remove_source_identifier_from_subscription(
&self
) -> RemoveSourceIdentifierFromSubscription

Constructs a fluent builder for the RemoveSourceIdentifierFromSubscription operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- subscription_name(impl Into<String>) / set_subscription_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the RDS event notification subscription you want to remove a source identifier from.
- source_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_source_identifier(Option<String>):
 The source identifier to be removed from the subscription, such as the DB instance identifier for a DB instance or the name of a security group.
On success, responds with RemoveSourceIdentifierFromSubscriptionOutput with field(s):
- event_subscription(Option<EventSubscription>):
 Contains the results of a successful invocation of the DescribeEventSubscriptions action.
On failure, responds with SdkError<RemoveSourceIdentifierFromSubscriptionError>

source

pub fn remove_tags_from_resource(&self) -> RemoveTagsFromResource

Constructs a fluent builder for the RemoveTagsFromResource operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- resource_name(impl Into<String>) / set_resource_name(Option<String>):
 The Amazon RDS resource that the tags are removed from. This value is an Amazon Resource Name (ARN). For information about creating an ARN, see Constructing an ARN for Amazon RDS in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
- tag_keys(Vec<String>) / set_tag_keys(Option<Vec<String>>):
 The tag key (name) of the tag to be removed.
On success, responds with RemoveTagsFromResourceOutput
On failure, responds with SdkError<RemoveTagsFromResourceError>

source

pub fn reset_db_cluster_parameter_group(&self) -> ResetDBClusterParameterGroup

Constructs a fluent builder for the ResetDBClusterParameterGroup operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_cluster_parameter_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_cluster_parameter_group_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the DB cluster parameter group to reset.
- reset_all_parameters(bool) / set_reset_all_parameters(bool):
 A value that indicates whether to reset all parameters in the DB cluster parameter group to their default values. You can’t use this parameter if there is a list of parameter names specified for the Parameters parameter.
- parameters(Vec<Parameter>) / set_parameters(Option<Vec<Parameter>>):
 A list of parameter names in the DB cluster parameter group to reset to the default values. You can’t use this parameter if the ResetAllParameters parameter is enabled.
On success, responds with ResetDbClusterParameterGroupOutput with field(s):
- db_cluster_parameter_group_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the DB cluster parameter group.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must be 1 to 255 letters or numbers.
 - First character must be a letter
 - Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens
 This value is stored as a lowercase string.
On failure, responds with SdkError<ResetDBClusterParameterGroupError>

source

pub fn reset_db_parameter_group(&self) -> ResetDBParameterGroup

Constructs a fluent builder for the ResetDBParameterGroup operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_parameter_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_parameter_group_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the DB parameter group.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must match the name of an existing DBParameterGroup.
- reset_all_parameters(bool) / set_reset_all_parameters(bool):
 A value that indicates whether to reset all parameters in the DB parameter group to default values. By default, all parameters in the DB parameter group are reset to default values.
- parameters(Vec<Parameter>) / set_parameters(Option<Vec<Parameter>>):
 To reset the entire DB parameter group, specify the DBParameterGroup name and ResetAllParameters parameters. To reset specific parameters, provide a list of the following: ParameterName and ApplyMethod. A maximum of 20 parameters can be modified in a single request.
 
 MySQL
 
 Valid Values (for Apply method): immediate | pending-reboot
 
 You can use the immediate value with dynamic parameters only. You can use the pending-reboot value for both dynamic and static parameters, and changes are applied when DB instance reboots.
 
 MariaDB
 
 Valid Values (for Apply method): immediate | pending-reboot
 
 You can use the immediate value with dynamic parameters only. You can use the pending-reboot value for both dynamic and static parameters, and changes are applied when DB instance reboots.
 
 Oracle
 
 Valid Values (for Apply method): pending-reboot
On success, responds with ResetDbParameterGroupOutput with field(s):
- db_parameter_group_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the DB parameter group.
On failure, responds with SdkError<ResetDBParameterGroupError>

source

pub fn restore_db_cluster_from_s3(&self) -> RestoreDBClusterFromS3

Constructs a fluent builder for the RestoreDBClusterFromS3 operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- availability_zones(Vec<String>) / set_availability_zones(Option<Vec<String>>):
 A list of Availability Zones (AZs) where instances in the restored DB cluster can be created.
- backup_retention_period(i32) / set_backup_retention_period(Option<i32>):
 The number of days for which automated backups of the restored DB cluster are retained. You must specify a minimum value of 1.
 
 Default: 1
 
 Constraints:
 - Must be a value from 1 to 35
- character_set_name(impl Into<String>) / set_character_set_name(Option<String>):
 A value that indicates that the restored DB cluster should be associated with the specified CharacterSet.
- database_name(impl Into<String>) / set_database_name(Option<String>):
 The database name for the restored DB cluster.
- db_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>):
 The name of the DB cluster to create from the source data in the Amazon S3 bucket. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must contain from 1 to 63 letters, numbers, or hyphens.
 - First character must be a letter.
 - Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.
 Example: my-cluster1
- db_cluster_parameter_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_cluster_parameter_group_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the DB cluster parameter group to associate with the restored DB cluster. If this argument is omitted, default.aurora5.6 is used.
 
 Constraints:
 - If supplied, must match the name of an existing DBClusterParameterGroup.
- vpc_security_group_ids(Vec<String>) / set_vpc_security_group_ids(Option<Vec<String>>):
 A list of EC2 VPC security groups to associate with the restored DB cluster.
- db_subnet_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_subnet_group_name(Option<String>):
 A DB subnet group to associate with the restored DB cluster.
 
 Constraints: If supplied, must match the name of an existing DBSubnetGroup.
 
 Example: mydbsubnetgroup
- engine(impl Into<String>) / set_engine(Option<String>):
 The name of the database engine to be used for this DB cluster.
 
 Valid Values: aurora (for MySQL 5.6-compatible Aurora) and aurora-mysql (for MySQL 5.7-compatible and MySQL 8.0-compatible Aurora)
- engine_version(impl Into<String>) / set_engine_version(Option<String>):
 The version number of the database engine to use.
 
 To list all of the available engine versions for aurora (for MySQL 5.6-compatible Aurora), use the following command:
 
 aws rds describe-db-engine-versions –engine aurora –query “DBEngineVersions[].EngineVersion”
 
 To list all of the available engine versions for aurora-mysql (for MySQL 5.7-compatible and MySQL 8.0-compatible Aurora), use the following command:
 
 aws rds describe-db-engine-versions –engine aurora-mysql –query “DBEngineVersions[].EngineVersion”
 
 Aurora MySQL
 
 Example: 5.6.10a, 5.6.mysql_aurora.1.19.2, 5.7.mysql_aurora.2.07.1, 8.0.mysql_aurora.3.02.0
- port(i32) / set_port(Option<i32>):
 The port number on which the instances in the restored DB cluster accept connections.
 
 Default: 3306
- master_username(impl Into<String>) / set_master_username(Option<String>):
 The name of the master user for the restored DB cluster.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must be 1 to 16 letters or numbers.
 - First character must be a letter.
 - Can’t be a reserved word for the chosen database engine.
- master_user_password(impl Into<String>) / set_master_user_password(Option<String>):
 The password for the master database user. This password can contain any printable ASCII character except “/”, “”“, or “@”.
 
 Constraints: Must contain from 8 to 41 characters.
- option_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_option_group_name(Option<String>):
 A value that indicates that the restored DB cluster should be associated with the specified option group.
 
 Permanent options can’t be removed from an option group. An option group can’t be removed from a DB cluster once it is associated with a DB cluster.
- preferred_backup_window(impl Into<String>) / set_preferred_backup_window(Option<String>):
 The daily time range during which automated backups are created if automated backups are enabled using the BackupRetentionPeriod parameter.
 
 The default is a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Web Services Region. To view the time blocks available, see Backup window in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must be in the format hh24:mi-hh24:mi.
 - Must be in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).
 - Must not conflict with the preferred maintenance window.
 - Must be at least 30 minutes.
- preferred_maintenance_window(impl Into<String>) / set_preferred_maintenance_window(Option<String>):
 The weekly time range during which system maintenance can occur, in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).
 
 Format: ddd:hh24:mi-ddd:hh24:mi
 
 The default is a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Web Services Region, occurring on a random day of the week. To see the time blocks available, see Adjusting the Preferred Maintenance Window in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
 
 Valid Days: Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, Sun.
 
 Constraints: Minimum 30-minute window.
- tags(Vec<Tag>) / set_tags(Option<Vec<Tag>>):
 A list of tags. For more information, see Tagging Amazon RDS Resources in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
- storage_encrypted(bool) / set_storage_encrypted(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether the restored DB cluster is encrypted.
- kms_key_id(impl Into<String>) / set_kms_key_id(Option<String>):
 The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for an encrypted DB cluster.
 
 The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. To use a KMS key in a different Amazon Web Services account, specify the key ARN or alias ARN.
 
 If the StorageEncrypted parameter is enabled, and you do not specify a value for the KmsKeyId parameter, then Amazon RDS will use your default KMS key. There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region.
- enable_iam_database_authentication(bool) / set_enable_iam_database_authentication(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether to enable mapping of Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) accounts to database accounts. By default, mapping isn’t enabled.
 
 For more information, see IAM Database Authentication in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
- source_engine(impl Into<String>) / set_source_engine(Option<String>):
 The identifier for the database engine that was backed up to create the files stored in the Amazon S3 bucket.
 
 Valid values: mysql
- source_engine_version(impl Into<String>) / set_source_engine_version(Option<String>):
 The version of the database that the backup files were created from.
 
 MySQL versions 5.5, 5.6, and 5.7 are supported.
 
 Example: 5.6.40, 5.7.28
- s3_bucket_name(impl Into<String>) / set_s3_bucket_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the Amazon S3 bucket that contains the data used to create the Amazon Aurora DB cluster.
- s3_prefix(impl Into<String>) / set_s3_prefix(Option<String>):
 The prefix for all of the file names that contain the data used to create the Amazon Aurora DB cluster. If you do not specify a SourceS3Prefix value, then the Amazon Aurora DB cluster is created by using all of the files in the Amazon S3 bucket.
- s3_ingestion_role_arn(impl Into<String>) / set_s3_ingestion_role_arn(Option<String>):
 The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) role that authorizes Amazon RDS to access the Amazon S3 bucket on your behalf.
- backtrack_window(i64) / set_backtrack_window(Option<i64>):
 The target backtrack window, in seconds. To disable backtracking, set this value to 0.
 
 Currently, Backtrack is only supported for Aurora MySQL DB clusters.
 
 Default: 0
 
 Constraints:
 - If specified, this value must be set to a number from 0 to 259,200 (72 hours).
- enable_cloudwatch_logs_exports(Vec<String>) / set_enable_cloudwatch_logs_exports(Option<Vec<String>>):
 The list of logs that the restored DB cluster is to export to CloudWatch Logs. The values in the list depend on the DB engine being used.
 
 Aurora MySQL
 
 Possible values are audit, error, general, and slowquery.
 
 Aurora PostgreSQL
 
 Possible value is postgresql.
 
 For more information about exporting CloudWatch Logs for Amazon Aurora, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
- deletion_protection(bool) / set_deletion_protection(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether the DB cluster has deletion protection enabled. The database can’t be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. By default, deletion protection isn’t enabled.
- copy_tags_to_snapshot(bool) / set_copy_tags_to_snapshot(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether to copy all tags from the restored DB cluster to snapshots of the restored DB cluster. The default is not to copy them.
- domain(impl Into<String>) / set_domain(Option<String>):
 Specify the Active Directory directory ID to restore the DB cluster in. The domain must be created prior to this operation.
 
 For Amazon Aurora DB clusters, Amazon RDS can use Kerberos Authentication to authenticate users that connect to the DB cluster. For more information, see Kerberos Authentication in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
- domain_iam_role_name(impl Into<String>) / set_domain_iam_role_name(Option<String>):
 Specify the name of the IAM role to be used when making API calls to the Directory Service.
- serverless_v2_scaling_configuration(ServerlessV2ScalingConfiguration) / set_serverless_v2_scaling_configuration(Option<ServerlessV2ScalingConfiguration>):
 Contains the scaling configuration of an Aurora Serverless v2 DB cluster.
 
 For more information, see Using Amazon Aurora Serverless v2 in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
- network_type(impl Into<String>) / set_network_type(Option<String>):
 The network type of the DB cluster.
 
 Valid values:
 - IPV4
 - DUAL
 The network type is determined by the DBSubnetGroup specified for the DB cluster. A DBSubnetGroup can support only the IPv4 protocol or the IPv4 and the IPv6 protocols (DUAL).
 
 For more information, see Working with a DB instance in a VPC in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
On success, responds with RestoreDbClusterFromS3Output with field(s):
- db_cluster(Option<DbCluster>):
 Contains the details of an Amazon Aurora DB cluster or Multi-AZ DB cluster.
 
 For an Amazon Aurora DB cluster, this data type is used as a response element in the operations CreateDBCluster, DeleteDBCluster, DescribeDBClusters, FailoverDBCluster, ModifyDBCluster, PromoteReadReplicaDBCluster, RestoreDBClusterFromS3, RestoreDBClusterFromSnapshot, RestoreDBClusterToPointInTime, StartDBCluster, and StopDBCluster.
 
 For a Multi-AZ DB cluster, this data type is used as a response element in the operations CreateDBCluster, DeleteDBCluster, DescribeDBClusters, FailoverDBCluster, ModifyDBCluster, RebootDBCluster, RestoreDBClusterFromSnapshot, and RestoreDBClusterToPointInTime.
 
 For more information on Amazon Aurora DB clusters, see What is Amazon Aurora? in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
 
 For more information on Multi-AZ DB clusters, see Multi-AZ deployments with two readable standby DB instances in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
On failure, responds with SdkError<RestoreDBClusterFromS3Error>

source

pub fn restore_db_cluster_from_snapshot(&self) -> RestoreDBClusterFromSnapshot

Constructs a fluent builder for the RestoreDBClusterFromSnapshot operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- availability_zones(Vec<String>) / set_availability_zones(Option<Vec<String>>):
 Provides the list of Availability Zones (AZs) where instances in the restored DB cluster can be created.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only
- db_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>):
 The name of the DB cluster to create from the DB snapshot or DB cluster snapshot. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must contain from 1 to 63 letters, numbers, or hyphens
 - First character must be a letter
 - Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens
 Example: my-snapshot-id
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- snapshot_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_snapshot_identifier(Option<String>):
 The identifier for the DB snapshot or DB cluster snapshot to restore from.
 
 You can use either the name or the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) to specify a DB cluster snapshot. However, you can use only the ARN to specify a DB snapshot.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must match the identifier of an existing Snapshot.
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- engine(impl Into<String>) / set_engine(Option<String>):
 The database engine to use for the new DB cluster.
 
 Default: The same as source
 
 Constraint: Must be compatible with the engine of the source
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- engine_version(impl Into<String>) / set_engine_version(Option<String>):
 The version of the database engine to use for the new DB cluster.
 
 To list all of the available engine versions for MySQL 5.6-compatible Aurora, use the following command:
 
 aws rds describe-db-engine-versions –engine aurora –query “DBEngineVersions[].EngineVersion”
 
 To list all of the available engine versions for MySQL 5.7-compatible and MySQL 8.0-compatible Aurora, use the following command:
 
 aws rds describe-db-engine-versions –engine aurora-mysql –query “DBEngineVersions[].EngineVersion”
 
 To list all of the available engine versions for Aurora PostgreSQL, use the following command:
 
 aws rds describe-db-engine-versions –engine aurora-postgresql –query “DBEngineVersions[].EngineVersion”
 
 To list all of the available engine versions for RDS for MySQL, use the following command:
 
 aws rds describe-db-engine-versions –engine mysql –query “DBEngineVersions[].EngineVersion”
 
 To list all of the available engine versions for RDS for PostgreSQL, use the following command:
 
 aws rds describe-db-engine-versions –engine postgres –query “DBEngineVersions[].EngineVersion”
 
 Aurora MySQL
 
 See MySQL on Amazon RDS Versions in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
 
 Aurora PostgreSQL
 
 See Amazon Aurora PostgreSQL releases and engine versions in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
 
 MySQL
 
 See MySQL on Amazon RDS Versions in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 PostgreSQL
 
 See Amazon RDS for PostgreSQL versions and extensions in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- port(i32) / set_port(Option<i32>):
 The port number on which the new DB cluster accepts connections.
 
 Constraints: This value must be 1150-65535
 
 Default: The same port as the original DB cluster.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- db_subnet_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_subnet_group_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the DB subnet group to use for the new DB cluster.
 
 Constraints: If supplied, must match the name of an existing DB subnet group.
 
 Example: mydbsubnetgroup
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- database_name(impl Into<String>) / set_database_name(Option<String>):
 The database name for the restored DB cluster.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- option_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_option_group_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the option group to use for the restored DB cluster.
 
 DB clusters are associated with a default option group that can’t be modified.
- vpc_security_group_ids(Vec<String>) / set_vpc_security_group_ids(Option<Vec<String>>):
 A list of VPC security groups that the new DB cluster will belong to.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- tags(Vec<Tag>) / set_tags(Option<Vec<Tag>>):
 The tags to be assigned to the restored DB cluster.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- kms_key_id(impl Into<String>) / set_kms_key_id(Option<String>):
 The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier to use when restoring an encrypted DB cluster from a DB snapshot or DB cluster snapshot.
 
 The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. To use a KMS key in a different Amazon Web Services account, specify the key ARN or alias ARN.
 
 When you don’t specify a value for the KmsKeyId parameter, then the following occurs:
 - If the DB snapshot or DB cluster snapshot in SnapshotIdentifier is encrypted, then the restored DB cluster is encrypted using the KMS key that was used to encrypt the DB snapshot or DB cluster snapshot.
 - If the DB snapshot or DB cluster snapshot in SnapshotIdentifier isn’t encrypted, then the restored DB cluster isn’t encrypted.
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- enable_iam_database_authentication(bool) / set_enable_iam_database_authentication(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether to enable mapping of Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) accounts to database accounts. By default, mapping isn’t enabled.
 
 For more information, see IAM Database Authentication in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only
- backtrack_window(i64) / set_backtrack_window(Option<i64>):
 The target backtrack window, in seconds. To disable backtracking, set this value to 0.
 
 Currently, Backtrack is only supported for Aurora MySQL DB clusters.
 
 Default: 0
 
 Constraints:
 - If specified, this value must be set to a number from 0 to 259,200 (72 hours).
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only
- enable_cloudwatch_logs_exports(Vec<String>) / set_enable_cloudwatch_logs_exports(Option<Vec<String>>):
 The list of logs that the restored DB cluster is to export to Amazon CloudWatch Logs. The values in the list depend on the DB engine being used.
 
 RDS for MySQL
 
 Possible values are error, general, and slowquery.
 
 RDS for PostgreSQL
 
 Possible values are postgresql and upgrade.
 
 Aurora MySQL
 
 Possible values are audit, error, general, and slowquery.
 
 Aurora PostgreSQL
 
 Possible value is postgresql.
 
 For more information about exporting CloudWatch Logs for Amazon RDS, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 For more information about exporting CloudWatch Logs for Amazon Aurora, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- engine_mode(impl Into<String>) / set_engine_mode(Option<String>):
 The DB engine mode of the DB cluster, either provisioned, serverless, parallelquery, global, or multimaster.
 
 For more information, see CreateDBCluster.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only
- scaling_configuration(ScalingConfiguration) / set_scaling_configuration(Option<ScalingConfiguration>):
 For DB clusters in serverless DB engine mode, the scaling properties of the DB cluster.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only
- db_cluster_parameter_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_cluster_parameter_group_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the DB cluster parameter group to associate with this DB cluster. If this argument is omitted, the default DB cluster parameter group for the specified engine is used.
 
 Constraints:
 - If supplied, must match the name of an existing default DB cluster parameter group.
 - Must be 1 to 255 letters, numbers, or hyphens.
 - First character must be a letter.
 - Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- deletion_protection(bool) / set_deletion_protection(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether the DB cluster has deletion protection enabled. The database can’t be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. By default, deletion protection isn’t enabled.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- copy_tags_to_snapshot(bool) / set_copy_tags_to_snapshot(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether to copy all tags from the restored DB cluster to snapshots of the restored DB cluster. The default is not to copy them.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- domain(impl Into<String>) / set_domain(Option<String>):
 Specify the Active Directory directory ID to restore the DB cluster in. The domain must be created prior to this operation. Currently, only MySQL, Microsoft SQL Server, Oracle, and PostgreSQL DB instances can be created in an Active Directory Domain.
 
 For more information, see Kerberos Authentication in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only
- domain_iam_role_name(impl Into<String>) / set_domain_iam_role_name(Option<String>):
 Specify the name of the IAM role to be used when making API calls to the Directory Service.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only
- db_cluster_instance_class(impl Into<String>) / set_db_cluster_instance_class(Option<String>):
 The compute and memory capacity of the each DB instance in the Multi-AZ DB cluster, for example db.m6g.xlarge. Not all DB instance classes are available in all Amazon Web Services Regions, or for all database engines.
 
 For the full list of DB instance classes, and availability for your engine, see DB Instance Class in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 Valid for: Multi-AZ DB clusters only
- storage_type(impl Into<String>) / set_storage_type(Option<String>):
 Specifies the storage type to be associated with the each DB instance in the Multi-AZ DB cluster.
 
 Valid values: io1
 
 When specified, a value for the Iops parameter is required.
 
 Default: io1
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- iops(i32) / set_iops(Option<i32>):
 The amount of Provisioned IOPS (input/output operations per second) to be initially allocated for each DB instance in the Multi-AZ DB cluster.
 
 For information about valid Iops values, see Amazon RDS Provisioned IOPS Storage to Improve Performance in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 Constraints: Must be a multiple between .5 and 50 of the storage amount for the DB instance.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- publicly_accessible(bool) / set_publicly_accessible(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether the DB cluster is publicly accessible.
 
 When the DB cluster is publicly accessible, its Domain Name System (DNS) endpoint resolves to the private IP address from within the DB cluster’s virtual private cloud (VPC). It resolves to the public IP address from outside of the DB cluster’s VPC. Access to the DB cluster is ultimately controlled by the security group it uses. That public access is not permitted if the security group assigned to the DB cluster doesn’t permit it.
 
 When the DB cluster isn’t publicly accessible, it is an internal DB cluster with a DNS name that resolves to a private IP address.
 
 Default: The default behavior varies depending on whether DBSubnetGroupName is specified.
 
 If DBSubnetGroupName isn’t specified, and PubliclyAccessible isn’t specified, the following applies:
 - If the default VPC in the target Region doesn’t have an internet gateway attached to it, the DB cluster is private.
 - If the default VPC in the target Region has an internet gateway attached to it, the DB cluster is public.
 If DBSubnetGroupName is specified, and PubliclyAccessible isn’t specified, the following applies:
 - If the subnets are part of a VPC that doesn’t have an internet gateway attached to it, the DB cluster is private.
 - If the subnets are part of a VPC that has an internet gateway attached to it, the DB cluster is public.
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- serverless_v2_scaling_configuration(ServerlessV2ScalingConfiguration) / set_serverless_v2_scaling_configuration(Option<ServerlessV2ScalingConfiguration>):
 Contains the scaling configuration of an Aurora Serverless v2 DB cluster.
 
 For more information, see Using Amazon Aurora Serverless v2 in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
- network_type(impl Into<String>) / set_network_type(Option<String>):
 The network type of the DB cluster.
 
 Valid values:
 - IPV4
 - DUAL
 The network type is determined by the DBSubnetGroup specified for the DB cluster. A DBSubnetGroup can support only the IPv4 protocol or the IPv4 and the IPv6 protocols (DUAL).
 
 For more information, see Working with a DB instance in a VPC in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only
On success, responds with RestoreDbClusterFromSnapshotOutput with field(s):
- db_cluster(Option<DbCluster>):
 Contains the details of an Amazon Aurora DB cluster or Multi-AZ DB cluster.
 
 For an Amazon Aurora DB cluster, this data type is used as a response element in the operations CreateDBCluster, DeleteDBCluster, DescribeDBClusters, FailoverDBCluster, ModifyDBCluster, PromoteReadReplicaDBCluster, RestoreDBClusterFromS3, RestoreDBClusterFromSnapshot, RestoreDBClusterToPointInTime, StartDBCluster, and StopDBCluster.
 
 For a Multi-AZ DB cluster, this data type is used as a response element in the operations CreateDBCluster, DeleteDBCluster, DescribeDBClusters, FailoverDBCluster, ModifyDBCluster, RebootDBCluster, RestoreDBClusterFromSnapshot, and RestoreDBClusterToPointInTime.
 
 For more information on Amazon Aurora DB clusters, see What is Amazon Aurora? in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
 
 For more information on Multi-AZ DB clusters, see Multi-AZ deployments with two readable standby DB instances in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
On failure, responds with SdkError<RestoreDBClusterFromSnapshotError>

source

pub fn restore_db_cluster_to_point_in_time(
&self
) -> RestoreDBClusterToPointInTime

Constructs a fluent builder for the RestoreDBClusterToPointInTime operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>):
 The name of the new DB cluster to be created.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must contain from 1 to 63 letters, numbers, or hyphens
 - First character must be a letter
 - Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- restore_type(impl Into<String>) / set_restore_type(Option<String>):
 The type of restore to be performed. You can specify one of the following values:
 - full-copy - The new DB cluster is restored as a full copy of the source DB cluster.
 - copy-on-write - The new DB cluster is restored as a clone of the source DB cluster.
 Constraints: You can’t specify copy-on-write if the engine version of the source DB cluster is earlier than 1.11.
 
 If you don’t specify a RestoreType value, then the new DB cluster is restored as a full copy of the source DB cluster.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- source_db_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_source_db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>):
 The identifier of the source DB cluster from which to restore.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must match the identifier of an existing DBCluster.
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- restore_to_time(DateTime) / set_restore_to_time(Option<DateTime>):
 The date and time to restore the DB cluster to.
 
 Valid Values: Value must be a time in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC) format
 
 Constraints:
 - Must be before the latest restorable time for the DB instance
 - Must be specified if UseLatestRestorableTime parameter isn’t provided
 - Can’t be specified if the UseLatestRestorableTime parameter is enabled
 - Can’t be specified if the RestoreType parameter is copy-on-write
 Example: 2015-03-07T23:45:00Z
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- use_latest_restorable_time(bool) / set_use_latest_restorable_time(bool):
 A value that indicates whether to restore the DB cluster to the latest restorable backup time. By default, the DB cluster isn’t restored to the latest restorable backup time.
 
 Constraints: Can’t be specified if RestoreToTime parameter is provided.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- port(i32) / set_port(Option<i32>):
 The port number on which the new DB cluster accepts connections.
 
 Constraints: A value from 1150-65535.
 
 Default: The default port for the engine.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- db_subnet_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_subnet_group_name(Option<String>):
 The DB subnet group name to use for the new DB cluster.
 
 Constraints: If supplied, must match the name of an existing DBSubnetGroup.
 
 Example: mydbsubnetgroup
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- option_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_option_group_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the option group for the new DB cluster.
 
 DB clusters are associated with a default option group that can’t be modified.
- vpc_security_group_ids(Vec<String>) / set_vpc_security_group_ids(Option<Vec<String>>):
 A list of VPC security groups that the new DB cluster belongs to.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- tags(Vec<Tag>) / set_tags(Option<Vec<Tag>>):
 A list of tags. For more information, see Tagging Amazon RDS Resources in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
- kms_key_id(impl Into<String>) / set_kms_key_id(Option<String>):
 The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier to use when restoring an encrypted DB cluster from an encrypted DB cluster.
 
 The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. To use a KMS key in a different Amazon Web Services account, specify the key ARN or alias ARN.
 
 You can restore to a new DB cluster and encrypt the new DB cluster with a KMS key that is different from the KMS key used to encrypt the source DB cluster. The new DB cluster is encrypted with the KMS key identified by the KmsKeyId parameter.
 
 If you don’t specify a value for the KmsKeyId parameter, then the following occurs:
 - If the DB cluster is encrypted, then the restored DB cluster is encrypted using the KMS key that was used to encrypt the source DB cluster.
 - If the DB cluster isn’t encrypted, then the restored DB cluster isn’t encrypted.
 If DBClusterIdentifier refers to a DB cluster that isn’t encrypted, then the restore request is rejected.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- enable_iam_database_authentication(bool) / set_enable_iam_database_authentication(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether to enable mapping of Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) accounts to database accounts. By default, mapping isn’t enabled.
 
 For more information, see IAM Database Authentication in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only
- backtrack_window(i64) / set_backtrack_window(Option<i64>):
 The target backtrack window, in seconds. To disable backtracking, set this value to 0.
 
 Default: 0
 
 Constraints:
 - If specified, this value must be set to a number from 0 to 259,200 (72 hours).
 Valid for: Aurora MySQL DB clusters only
- enable_cloudwatch_logs_exports(Vec<String>) / set_enable_cloudwatch_logs_exports(Option<Vec<String>>):
 The list of logs that the restored DB cluster is to export to CloudWatch Logs. The values in the list depend on the DB engine being used.
 
 RDS for MySQL
 
 Possible values are error, general, and slowquery.
 
 RDS for PostgreSQL
 
 Possible values are postgresql and upgrade.
 
 Aurora MySQL
 
 Possible values are audit, error, general, and slowquery.
 
 Aurora PostgreSQL
 
 Possible value is postgresql.
 
 For more information about exporting CloudWatch Logs for Amazon RDS, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 For more information about exporting CloudWatch Logs for Amazon Aurora, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- db_cluster_parameter_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_cluster_parameter_group_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the DB cluster parameter group to associate with this DB cluster. If this argument is omitted, the default DB cluster parameter group for the specified engine is used.
 
 Constraints:
 - If supplied, must match the name of an existing DB cluster parameter group.
 - Must be 1 to 255 letters, numbers, or hyphens.
 - First character must be a letter.
 - Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- deletion_protection(bool) / set_deletion_protection(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether the DB cluster has deletion protection enabled. The database can’t be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. By default, deletion protection isn’t enabled.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- copy_tags_to_snapshot(bool) / set_copy_tags_to_snapshot(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether to copy all tags from the restored DB cluster to snapshots of the restored DB cluster. The default is not to copy them.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
- domain(impl Into<String>) / set_domain(Option<String>):
 Specify the Active Directory directory ID to restore the DB cluster in. The domain must be created prior to this operation.
 
 For Amazon Aurora DB clusters, Amazon RDS can use Kerberos Authentication to authenticate users that connect to the DB cluster. For more information, see Kerberos Authentication in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only
- domain_iam_role_name(impl Into<String>) / set_domain_iam_role_name(Option<String>):
 Specify the name of the IAM role to be used when making API calls to the Directory Service.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only
- scaling_configuration(ScalingConfiguration) / set_scaling_configuration(Option<ScalingConfiguration>):
 For DB clusters in serverless DB engine mode, the scaling properties of the DB cluster.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only
- engine_mode(impl Into<String>) / set_engine_mode(Option<String>):
 The engine mode of the new cluster. Specify provisioned or serverless, depending on the type of the cluster you are creating. You can create an Aurora Serverless v1 clone from a provisioned cluster, or a provisioned clone from an Aurora Serverless v1 cluster. To create a clone that is an Aurora Serverless v1 cluster, the original cluster must be an Aurora Serverless v1 cluster or an encrypted provisioned cluster.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only
- db_cluster_instance_class(impl Into<String>) / set_db_cluster_instance_class(Option<String>):
 The compute and memory capacity of the each DB instance in the Multi-AZ DB cluster, for example db.m6g.xlarge. Not all DB instance classes are available in all Amazon Web Services Regions, or for all database engines.
 
 For the full list of DB instance classes, and availability for your engine, see DB instance class in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 Valid for: Multi-AZ DB clusters only
- storage_type(impl Into<String>) / set_storage_type(Option<String>):
 Specifies the storage type to be associated with the each DB instance in the Multi-AZ DB cluster.
 
 Valid values: io1
 
 When specified, a value for the Iops parameter is required.
 
 Default: io1
 
 Valid for: Multi-AZ DB clusters only
- publicly_accessible(bool) / set_publicly_accessible(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether the DB cluster is publicly accessible.
 
 When the DB cluster is publicly accessible, its Domain Name System (DNS) endpoint resolves to the private IP address from within the DB cluster’s virtual private cloud (VPC). It resolves to the public IP address from outside of the DB cluster’s VPC. Access to the DB cluster is ultimately controlled by the security group it uses. That public access is not permitted if the security group assigned to the DB cluster doesn’t permit it.
 
 When the DB cluster isn’t publicly accessible, it is an internal DB cluster with a DNS name that resolves to a private IP address.
 
 Default: The default behavior varies depending on whether DBSubnetGroupName is specified.
 
 If DBSubnetGroupName isn’t specified, and PubliclyAccessible isn’t specified, the following applies:
 - If the default VPC in the target Region doesn’t have an internet gateway attached to it, the DB cluster is private.
 - If the default VPC in the target Region has an internet gateway attached to it, the DB cluster is public.
 If DBSubnetGroupName is specified, and PubliclyAccessible isn’t specified, the following applies:
 - If the subnets are part of a VPC that doesn’t have an internet gateway attached to it, the DB cluster is private.
 - If the subnets are part of a VPC that has an internet gateway attached to it, the DB cluster is public.
 Valid for: Multi-AZ DB clusters only
- iops(i32) / set_iops(Option<i32>):
 The amount of Provisioned IOPS (input/output operations per second) to be initially allocated for each DB instance in the Multi-AZ DB cluster.
 
 For information about valid Iops values, see Amazon RDS Provisioned IOPS storage to improve performance in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 Constraints: Must be a multiple between .5 and 50 of the storage amount for the DB instance.
 
 Valid for: Multi-AZ DB clusters only
- serverless_v2_scaling_configuration(ServerlessV2ScalingConfiguration) / set_serverless_v2_scaling_configuration(Option<ServerlessV2ScalingConfiguration>):
 Contains the scaling configuration of an Aurora Serverless v2 DB cluster.
 
 For more information, see Using Amazon Aurora Serverless v2 in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
- network_type(impl Into<String>) / set_network_type(Option<String>):
 The network type of the DB cluster.
 
 Valid values:
 - IPV4
 - DUAL
 The network type is determined by the DBSubnetGroup specified for the DB cluster. A DBSubnetGroup can support only the IPv4 protocol or the IPv4 and the IPv6 protocols (DUAL).
 
 For more information, see Working with a DB instance in a VPC in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
 
 Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only
On success, responds with RestoreDbClusterToPointInTimeOutput with field(s):
- db_cluster(Option<DbCluster>):
 Contains the details of an Amazon Aurora DB cluster or Multi-AZ DB cluster.
 
 For an Amazon Aurora DB cluster, this data type is used as a response element in the operations CreateDBCluster, DeleteDBCluster, DescribeDBClusters, FailoverDBCluster, ModifyDBCluster, PromoteReadReplicaDBCluster, RestoreDBClusterFromS3, RestoreDBClusterFromSnapshot, RestoreDBClusterToPointInTime, StartDBCluster, and StopDBCluster.
 
 For a Multi-AZ DB cluster, this data type is used as a response element in the operations CreateDBCluster, DeleteDBCluster, DescribeDBClusters, FailoverDBCluster, ModifyDBCluster, RebootDBCluster, RestoreDBClusterFromSnapshot, and RestoreDBClusterToPointInTime.
 
 For more information on Amazon Aurora DB clusters, see What is Amazon Aurora? in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
 
 For more information on Multi-AZ DB clusters, see Multi-AZ deployments with two readable standby DB instances in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
On failure, responds with SdkError<RestoreDBClusterToPointInTimeError>

source

pub fn restore_db_instance_from_db_snapshot(
&self
) -> RestoreDBInstanceFromDBSnapshot

Constructs a fluent builder for the RestoreDBInstanceFromDBSnapshot operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_instance_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_instance_identifier(Option<String>):
 Name of the DB instance to create from the DB snapshot. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must contain from 1 to 63 numbers, letters, or hyphens
 - First character must be a letter
 - Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens
 Example: my-snapshot-id
- db_snapshot_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_snapshot_identifier(Option<String>):
 The identifier for the DB snapshot to restore from.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must match the identifier of an existing DBSnapshot.
 - If you are restoring from a shared manual DB snapshot, the DBSnapshotIdentifier must be the ARN of the shared DB snapshot.
- db_instance_class(impl Into<String>) / set_db_instance_class(Option<String>):
 The compute and memory capacity of the Amazon RDS DB instance, for example db.m4.large. Not all DB instance classes are available in all Amazon Web Services Regions, or for all database engines. For the full list of DB instance classes, and availability for your engine, see DB Instance Class in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 Default: The same DBInstanceClass as the original DB instance.
- port(i32) / set_port(Option<i32>):
 The port number on which the database accepts connections.
 
 Default: The same port as the original DB instance
 
 Constraints: Value must be 1150-65535
- availability_zone(impl Into<String>) / set_availability_zone(Option<String>):
 The Availability Zone (AZ) where the DB instance will be created.
 
 Default: A random, system-chosen Availability Zone.
 
 Constraint: You can’t specify the AvailabilityZone parameter if the DB instance is a Multi-AZ deployment.
 
 Example: us-east-1a
- db_subnet_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_subnet_group_name(Option<String>):
 The DB subnet group name to use for the new instance.
 
 Constraints: If supplied, must match the name of an existing DBSubnetGroup.
 
 Example: mydbsubnetgroup
- multi_az(bool) / set_multi_az(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether the DB instance is a Multi-AZ deployment.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
 
 Constraint: You can’t specify the AvailabilityZone parameter if the DB instance is a Multi-AZ deployment.
- publicly_accessible(bool) / set_publicly_accessible(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether the DB instance is publicly accessible.
 
 When the DB instance is publicly accessible, its Domain Name System (DNS) endpoint resolves to the private IP address from within the DB instance’s virtual private cloud (VPC). It resolves to the public IP address from outside of the DB instance’s VPC. Access to the DB instance is ultimately controlled by the security group it uses. That public access is not permitted if the security group assigned to the DB instance doesn’t permit it.
 
 When the DB instance isn’t publicly accessible, it is an internal DB instance with a DNS name that resolves to a private IP address.
 
 For more information, see CreateDBInstance.
- auto_minor_version_upgrade(bool) / set_auto_minor_version_upgrade(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether minor version upgrades are applied automatically to the DB instance during the maintenance window.
 
 If you restore an RDS Custom DB instance, you must disable this parameter.
- license_model(impl Into<String>) / set_license_model(Option<String>):
 License model information for the restored DB instance.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
 
 Default: Same as source.
 
 Valid values: license-included | bring-your-own-license | general-public-license
- db_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_name(Option<String>):
 The database name for the restored DB instance.
 
 This parameter doesn’t apply to the MySQL, PostgreSQL, or MariaDB engines. It also doesn’t apply to RDS Custom DB instances.
- engine(impl Into<String>) / set_engine(Option<String>):
 The database engine to use for the new instance.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
 
 Default: The same as source
 
 Constraint: Must be compatible with the engine of the source. For example, you can restore a MariaDB 10.1 DB instance from a MySQL 5.6 snapshot.
 
 Valid Values:
 - mariadb
 - mysql
 - oracle-ee
 - oracle-ee-cdb
 - oracle-se2
 - oracle-se2-cdb
 - postgres
 - sqlserver-ee
 - sqlserver-se
 - sqlserver-ex
 - sqlserver-web
- iops(i32) / set_iops(Option<i32>):
 Specifies the amount of provisioned IOPS for the DB instance, expressed in I/O operations per second. If this parameter isn’t specified, the IOPS value is taken from the backup. If this parameter is set to 0, the new instance is converted to a non-PIOPS instance. The conversion takes additional time, though your DB instance is available for connections before the conversion starts.
 
 The provisioned IOPS value must follow the requirements for your database engine. For more information, see Amazon RDS Provisioned IOPS Storage to Improve Performance in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 Constraints: Must be an integer greater than 1000.
- option_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_option_group_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the option group to be used for the restored DB instance.
 
 Permanent options, such as the TDE option for Oracle Advanced Security TDE, can’t be removed from an option group, and that option group can’t be removed from a DB instance after it is associated with a DB instance.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- tags(Vec<Tag>) / set_tags(Option<Vec<Tag>>):
 A list of tags. For more information, see Tagging Amazon RDS Resources in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
- storage_type(impl Into<String>) / set_storage_type(Option<String>):
 Specifies the storage type to be associated with the DB instance.
 
 Valid values: standard | gp2 | io1
 
 If you specify io1, you must also include a value for the Iops parameter.
 
 Default: io1 if the Iops parameter is specified, otherwise gp2
- tde_credential_arn(impl Into<String>) / set_tde_credential_arn(Option<String>):
 The ARN from the key store with which to associate the instance for TDE encryption.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- tde_credential_password(impl Into<String>) / set_tde_credential_password(Option<String>):
 The password for the given ARN from the key store in order to access the device.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- vpc_security_group_ids(Vec<String>) / set_vpc_security_group_ids(Option<Vec<String>>):
 A list of EC2 VPC security groups to associate with this DB instance.
 
 Default: The default EC2 VPC security group for the DB subnet group’s VPC.
- domain(impl Into<String>) / set_domain(Option<String>):
 Specify the Active Directory directory ID to restore the DB instance in. The domain/ must be created prior to this operation. Currently, you can create only MySQL, Microsoft SQL Server, Oracle, and PostgreSQL DB instances in an Active Directory Domain.
 
 For more information, see Kerberos Authentication in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- copy_tags_to_snapshot(bool) / set_copy_tags_to_snapshot(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether to copy all tags from the restored DB instance to snapshots of the DB instance.
 
 In most cases, tags aren’t copied by default. However, when you restore a DB instance from a DB snapshot, RDS checks whether you specify new tags. If yes, the new tags are added to the restored DB instance. If there are no new tags, RDS looks for the tags from the source DB instance for the DB snapshot, and then adds those tags to the restored DB instance.
 
 For more information, see Copying tags to DB instance snapshots in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
- domain_iam_role_name(impl Into<String>) / set_domain_iam_role_name(Option<String>):
 Specify the name of the IAM role to be used when making API calls to the Directory Service.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- enable_iam_database_authentication(bool) / set_enable_iam_database_authentication(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether to enable mapping of Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) accounts to database accounts. By default, mapping is disabled.
 
 For more information about IAM database authentication, see IAM Database Authentication for MySQL and PostgreSQL in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- enable_cloudwatch_logs_exports(Vec<String>) / set_enable_cloudwatch_logs_exports(Option<Vec<String>>):
 The list of logs that the restored DB instance is to export to CloudWatch Logs. The values in the list depend on the DB engine being used. For more information, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- processor_features(Vec<ProcessorFeature>) / set_processor_features(Option<Vec<ProcessorFeature>>):
 The number of CPU cores and the number of threads per core for the DB instance class of the DB instance.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- use_default_processor_features(bool) / set_use_default_processor_features(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether the DB instance class of the DB instance uses its default processor features.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- db_parameter_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_parameter_group_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the DB parameter group to associate with this DB instance.
 
 If you don’t specify a value for DBParameterGroupName, then RDS uses the default DBParameterGroup for the specified DB engine.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
 
 Constraints:
 - If supplied, must match the name of an existing DBParameterGroup.
 - Must be 1 to 255 letters, numbers, or hyphens.
 - First character must be a letter.
 - Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.
- deletion_protection(bool) / set_deletion_protection(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether the DB instance has deletion protection enabled. The database can’t be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. By default, deletion protection isn’t enabled. For more information, see Deleting a DB Instance.
- enable_customer_owned_ip(bool) / set_enable_customer_owned_ip(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether to enable a customer-owned IP address (CoIP) for an RDS on Outposts DB instance.
 
 A CoIP provides local or external connectivity to resources in your Outpost subnets through your on-premises network. For some use cases, a CoIP can provide lower latency for connections to the DB instance from outside of its virtual private cloud (VPC) on your local network.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
 
 For more information about RDS on Outposts, see Working with Amazon RDS on Amazon Web Services Outposts in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 For more information about CoIPs, see Customer-owned IP addresses in the Amazon Web Services Outposts User Guide.
- custom_iam_instance_profile(impl Into<String>) / set_custom_iam_instance_profile(Option<String>):
 The instance profile associated with the underlying Amazon EC2 instance of an RDS Custom DB instance. The instance profile must meet the following requirements:
 - The profile must exist in your account.
 - The profile must have an IAM role that Amazon EC2 has permissions to assume.
 - The instance profile name and the associated IAM role name must start with the prefix AWSRDSCustom.
 For the list of permissions required for the IAM role, see Configure IAM and your VPC in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 This setting is required for RDS Custom.
- backup_target(impl Into<String>) / set_backup_target(Option<String>):
 Specifies where automated backups and manual snapshots are stored for the restored DB instance.
 
 Possible values are outposts (Amazon Web Services Outposts) and region (Amazon Web Services Region). The default is region.
 
 For more information, see Working with Amazon RDS on Amazon Web Services Outposts in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
- network_type(impl Into<String>) / set_network_type(Option<String>):
 The network type of the DB instance.
 
 Valid values:
 - IPV4
 - DUAL
 The network type is determined by the DBSubnetGroup specified for the DB instance. A DBSubnetGroup can support only the IPv4 protocol or the IPv4 and the IPv6 protocols (DUAL).
 
 For more information, see Working with a DB instance in a VPC in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
On success, responds with RestoreDbInstanceFromDbSnapshotOutput with field(s):
- db_instance(Option<DbInstance>):
 Contains the details of an Amazon RDS DB instance.
 
 This data type is used as a response element in the operations CreateDBInstance, CreateDBInstanceReadReplica, DeleteDBInstance, DescribeDBInstances, ModifyDBInstance, PromoteReadReplica, RebootDBInstance, RestoreDBInstanceFromDBSnapshot, RestoreDBInstanceFromS3, RestoreDBInstanceToPointInTime, StartDBInstance, and StopDBInstance.
On failure, responds with SdkError<RestoreDBInstanceFromDBSnapshotError>

source

pub fn restore_db_instance_from_s3(&self) -> RestoreDBInstanceFromS3

Constructs a fluent builder for the RestoreDBInstanceFromS3 operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the database to create when the DB instance is created. Follow the naming rules specified in CreateDBInstance.
- db_instance_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_instance_identifier(Option<String>):
 The DB instance identifier. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must contain from 1 to 63 letters, numbers, or hyphens.
 - First character must be a letter.
 - Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.
 Example: mydbinstance
- allocated_storage(i32) / set_allocated_storage(Option<i32>):
 The amount of storage (in gigabytes) to allocate initially for the DB instance. Follow the allocation rules specified in CreateDBInstance.
 
 Be sure to allocate enough memory for your new DB instance so that the restore operation can succeed. You can also allocate additional memory for future growth.
- db_instance_class(impl Into<String>) / set_db_instance_class(Option<String>):
 The compute and memory capacity of the DB instance, for example db.m4.large. Not all DB instance classes are available in all Amazon Web Services Regions, or for all database engines. For the full list of DB instance classes, and availability for your engine, see DB Instance Class in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 Importing from Amazon S3 isn’t supported on the db.t2.micro DB instance class.
- engine(impl Into<String>) / set_engine(Option<String>):
 The name of the database engine to be used for this instance.
 
 Valid Values: mysql
- master_username(impl Into<String>) / set_master_username(Option<String>):
 The name for the master user.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must be 1 to 16 letters or numbers.
 - First character must be a letter.
 - Can’t be a reserved word for the chosen database engine.
- master_user_password(impl Into<String>) / set_master_user_password(Option<String>):
 The password for the master user. The password can include any printable ASCII character except “/”, “”“, or “@”.
 
 Constraints: Must contain from 8 to 41 characters.
- db_security_groups(Vec<String>) / set_db_security_groups(Option<Vec<String>>):
 A list of DB security groups to associate with this DB instance.
 
 Default: The default DB security group for the database engine.
- vpc_security_group_ids(Vec<String>) / set_vpc_security_group_ids(Option<Vec<String>>):
 A list of VPC security groups to associate with this DB instance.
- availability_zone(impl Into<String>) / set_availability_zone(Option<String>):
 The Availability Zone that the DB instance is created in. For information about Amazon Web Services Regions and Availability Zones, see Regions and Availability Zones in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 Default: A random, system-chosen Availability Zone in the endpoint’s Amazon Web Services Region.
 
 Example: us-east-1d
 
 Constraint: The AvailabilityZone parameter can’t be specified if the DB instance is a Multi-AZ deployment. The specified Availability Zone must be in the same Amazon Web Services Region as the current endpoint.
- db_subnet_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_subnet_group_name(Option<String>):
 A DB subnet group to associate with this DB instance.
 
 Constraints: If supplied, must match the name of an existing DBSubnetGroup.
 
 Example: mydbsubnetgroup
- preferred_maintenance_window(impl Into<String>) / set_preferred_maintenance_window(Option<String>):
 The time range each week during which system maintenance can occur, in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC). For more information, see Amazon RDS Maintenance Window in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must be in the format ddd:hh24:mi-ddd:hh24:mi.
 - Valid Days: Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, Sun.
 - Must be in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).
 - Must not conflict with the preferred backup window.
 - Must be at least 30 minutes.
- db_parameter_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_parameter_group_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the DB parameter group to associate with this DB instance.
 
 If you do not specify a value for DBParameterGroupName, then the default DBParameterGroup for the specified DB engine is used.
- backup_retention_period(i32) / set_backup_retention_period(Option<i32>):
 The number of days for which automated backups are retained. Setting this parameter to a positive number enables backups. For more information, see CreateDBInstance.
- preferred_backup_window(impl Into<String>) / set_preferred_backup_window(Option<String>):
 The time range each day during which automated backups are created if automated backups are enabled. For more information, see Backup window in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must be in the format hh24:mi-hh24:mi.
 - Must be in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).
 - Must not conflict with the preferred maintenance window.
 - Must be at least 30 minutes.
- port(i32) / set_port(Option<i32>):
 The port number on which the database accepts connections.
 
 Type: Integer
 
 Valid Values: 1150-65535
 
 Default: 3306
- multi_az(bool) / set_multi_az(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether the DB instance is a Multi-AZ deployment. If the DB instance is a Multi-AZ deployment, you can’t set the AvailabilityZone parameter.
- engine_version(impl Into<String>) / set_engine_version(Option<String>):
 The version number of the database engine to use. Choose the latest minor version of your database engine. For information about engine versions, see CreateDBInstance, or call DescribeDBEngineVersions.
- auto_minor_version_upgrade(bool) / set_auto_minor_version_upgrade(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether minor engine upgrades are applied automatically to the DB instance during the maintenance window. By default, minor engine upgrades are not applied automatically.
- license_model(impl Into<String>) / set_license_model(Option<String>):
 The license model for this DB instance. Use general-public-license.
- iops(i32) / set_iops(Option<i32>):
 The amount of Provisioned IOPS (input/output operations per second) to allocate initially for the DB instance. For information about valid Iops values, see Amazon RDS Provisioned IOPS Storage to Improve Performance in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
- option_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_option_group_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the option group to associate with this DB instance. If this argument is omitted, the default option group for the specified engine is used.
- publicly_accessible(bool) / set_publicly_accessible(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether the DB instance is publicly accessible.
 
 When the DB instance is publicly accessible, its Domain Name System (DNS) endpoint resolves to the private IP address from within the DB instance’s virtual private cloud (VPC). It resolves to the public IP address from outside of the DB instance’s VPC. Access to the DB instance is ultimately controlled by the security group it uses. That public access is not permitted if the security group assigned to the DB instance doesn’t permit it.
 
 When the DB instance isn’t publicly accessible, it is an internal DB instance with a DNS name that resolves to a private IP address.
 
 For more information, see CreateDBInstance.
- tags(Vec<Tag>) / set_tags(Option<Vec<Tag>>):
 A list of tags to associate with this DB instance. For more information, see Tagging Amazon RDS Resources in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
- storage_type(impl Into<String>) / set_storage_type(Option<String>):
 Specifies the storage type to be associated with the DB instance.
 
 Valid values: standard | gp2 | io1
 
 If you specify io1, you must also include a value for the Iops parameter.
 
 Default: io1 if the Iops parameter is specified; otherwise gp2
- storage_encrypted(bool) / set_storage_encrypted(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether the new DB instance is encrypted or not.
- kms_key_id(impl Into<String>) / set_kms_key_id(Option<String>):
 The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for an encrypted DB instance.
 
 The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. To use a KMS key in a different Amazon Web Services account, specify the key ARN or alias ARN.
 
 If the StorageEncrypted parameter is enabled, and you do not specify a value for the KmsKeyId parameter, then Amazon RDS will use your default KMS key. There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region.
- copy_tags_to_snapshot(bool) / set_copy_tags_to_snapshot(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether to copy all tags from the DB instance to snapshots of the DB instance. By default, tags are not copied.
- monitoring_interval(i32) / set_monitoring_interval(Option<i32>):
 The interval, in seconds, between points when Enhanced Monitoring metrics are collected for the DB instance. To disable collecting Enhanced Monitoring metrics, specify 0.
 
 If MonitoringRoleArn is specified, then you must also set MonitoringInterval to a value other than 0.
 
 Valid Values: 0, 1, 5, 10, 15, 30, 60
 
 Default: 0
- monitoring_role_arn(impl Into<String>) / set_monitoring_role_arn(Option<String>):
 The ARN for the IAM role that permits RDS to send enhanced monitoring metrics to Amazon CloudWatch Logs. For example, arn:aws:iam:123456789012:role/emaccess. For information on creating a monitoring role, see Setting Up and Enabling Enhanced Monitoring in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 If MonitoringInterval is set to a value other than 0, then you must supply a MonitoringRoleArn value.
- enable_iam_database_authentication(bool) / set_enable_iam_database_authentication(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether to enable mapping of Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) accounts to database accounts. By default, mapping isn’t enabled.
 
 For more information about IAM database authentication, see IAM Database Authentication for MySQL and PostgreSQL in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
- source_engine(impl Into<String>) / set_source_engine(Option<String>):
 The name of the engine of your source database.
 
 Valid Values: mysql
- source_engine_version(impl Into<String>) / set_source_engine_version(Option<String>):
 The version of the database that the backup files were created from.
 
 MySQL versions 5.6 and 5.7 are supported.
 
 Example: 5.6.40
- s3_bucket_name(impl Into<String>) / set_s3_bucket_name(Option<String>):
 The name of your Amazon S3 bucket that contains your database backup file.
- s3_prefix(impl Into<String>) / set_s3_prefix(Option<String>):
 The prefix of your Amazon S3 bucket.
- s3_ingestion_role_arn(impl Into<String>) / set_s3_ingestion_role_arn(Option<String>):
 An Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) role to allow Amazon RDS to access your Amazon S3 bucket.
- enable_performance_insights(bool) / set_enable_performance_insights(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether to enable Performance Insights for the DB instance.
 
 For more information, see Using Amazon Performance Insights in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
- performance_insights_kms_key_id(impl Into<String>) / set_performance_insights_kms_key_id(Option<String>):
 The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for encryption of Performance Insights data.
 
 The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key.
 
 If you do not specify a value for PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId, then Amazon RDS uses your default KMS key. There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region.
- performance_insights_retention_period(i32) / set_performance_insights_retention_period(Option<i32>):
 The number of days to retain Performance Insights data. The default is 7 days. The following values are valid:
 - 7
 - month * 31, where month is a number of months from 1-23
 - 731
 For example, the following values are valid:
 - 93 (3 months * 31)
 - 341 (11 months * 31)
 - 589 (19 months * 31)
 - 731
 If you specify a retention period such as 94, which isn’t a valid value, RDS issues an error.
- enable_cloudwatch_logs_exports(Vec<String>) / set_enable_cloudwatch_logs_exports(Option<Vec<String>>):
 The list of logs that the restored DB instance is to export to CloudWatch Logs. The values in the list depend on the DB engine being used. For more information, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
- processor_features(Vec<ProcessorFeature>) / set_processor_features(Option<Vec<ProcessorFeature>>):
 The number of CPU cores and the number of threads per core for the DB instance class of the DB instance.
- use_default_processor_features(bool) / set_use_default_processor_features(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether the DB instance class of the DB instance uses its default processor features.
- deletion_protection(bool) / set_deletion_protection(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether the DB instance has deletion protection enabled. The database can’t be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. By default, deletion protection isn’t enabled. For more information, see Deleting a DB Instance.
- max_allocated_storage(i32) / set_max_allocated_storage(Option<i32>):
 The upper limit in gibibytes (GiB) to which Amazon RDS can automatically scale the storage of the DB instance.
 
 For more information about this setting, including limitations that apply to it, see Managing capacity automatically with Amazon RDS storage autoscaling in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
- network_type(impl Into<String>) / set_network_type(Option<String>):
 The network type of the DB instance.
 
 Valid values:
 - IPV4
 - DUAL
 The network type is determined by the DBSubnetGroup specified for the DB instance. A DBSubnetGroup can support only the IPv4 protocol or the IPv4 and the IPv6 protocols (DUAL).
 
 For more information, see Working with a DB instance in a VPC in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
On success, responds with RestoreDbInstanceFromS3Output with field(s):
- db_instance(Option<DbInstance>):
 Contains the details of an Amazon RDS DB instance.
 
 This data type is used as a response element in the operations CreateDBInstance, CreateDBInstanceReadReplica, DeleteDBInstance, DescribeDBInstances, ModifyDBInstance, PromoteReadReplica, RebootDBInstance, RestoreDBInstanceFromDBSnapshot, RestoreDBInstanceFromS3, RestoreDBInstanceToPointInTime, StartDBInstance, and StopDBInstance.
On failure, responds with SdkError<RestoreDBInstanceFromS3Error>

source

pub fn restore_db_instance_to_point_in_time(
&self
) -> RestoreDBInstanceToPointInTime

Constructs a fluent builder for the RestoreDBInstanceToPointInTime operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- source_db_instance_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_source_db_instance_identifier(Option<String>):
 The identifier of the source DB instance from which to restore.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must match the identifier of an existing DB instance.
- target_db_instance_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_target_db_instance_identifier(Option<String>):
 The name of the new DB instance to be created.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must contain from 1 to 63 letters, numbers, or hyphens
 - First character must be a letter
 - Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens
- restore_time(DateTime) / set_restore_time(Option<DateTime>):
 The date and time to restore from.
 
 Valid Values: Value must be a time in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC) format
 
 Constraints:
 - Must be before the latest restorable time for the DB instance
 - Can’t be specified if the UseLatestRestorableTime parameter is enabled
 Example: 2009-09-07T23:45:00Z
- use_latest_restorable_time(bool) / set_use_latest_restorable_time(bool):
 A value that indicates whether the DB instance is restored from the latest backup time. By default, the DB instance isn’t restored from the latest backup time.
 
 Constraints: Can’t be specified if the RestoreTime parameter is provided.
- db_instance_class(impl Into<String>) / set_db_instance_class(Option<String>):
 The compute and memory capacity of the Amazon RDS DB instance, for example db.m4.large. Not all DB instance classes are available in all Amazon Web Services Regions, or for all database engines. For the full list of DB instance classes, and availability for your engine, see DB Instance Class in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 Default: The same DBInstanceClass as the original DB instance.
- port(i32) / set_port(Option<i32>):
 The port number on which the database accepts connections.
 
 Constraints: Value must be 1150-65535
 
 Default: The same port as the original DB instance.
- availability_zone(impl Into<String>) / set_availability_zone(Option<String>):
 The Availability Zone (AZ) where the DB instance will be created.
 
 Default: A random, system-chosen Availability Zone.
 
 Constraint: You can’t specify the AvailabilityZone parameter if the DB instance is a Multi-AZ deployment.
 
 Example: us-east-1a
- db_subnet_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_subnet_group_name(Option<String>):
 The DB subnet group name to use for the new instance.
 
 Constraints: If supplied, must match the name of an existing DBSubnetGroup.
 
 Example: mydbsubnetgroup
- multi_az(bool) / set_multi_az(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether the DB instance is a Multi-AZ deployment.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
 
 Constraint: You can’t specify the AvailabilityZone parameter if the DB instance is a Multi-AZ deployment.
- publicly_accessible(bool) / set_publicly_accessible(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether the DB instance is publicly accessible.
 
 When the DB cluster is publicly accessible, its Domain Name System (DNS) endpoint resolves to the private IP address from within the DB cluster’s virtual private cloud (VPC). It resolves to the public IP address from outside of the DB cluster’s VPC. Access to the DB cluster is ultimately controlled by the security group it uses. That public access isn’t permitted if the security group assigned to the DB cluster doesn’t permit it.
 
 When the DB instance isn’t publicly accessible, it is an internal DB instance with a DNS name that resolves to a private IP address.
 
 For more information, see CreateDBInstance.
- auto_minor_version_upgrade(bool) / set_auto_minor_version_upgrade(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether minor version upgrades are applied automatically to the DB instance during the maintenance window.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- license_model(impl Into<String>) / set_license_model(Option<String>):
 License model information for the restored DB instance.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
 
 Default: Same as source.
 
 Valid values: license-included | bring-your-own-license | general-public-license
- db_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_name(Option<String>):
 The database name for the restored DB instance.
 
 This parameter isn’t supported for the MySQL or MariaDB engines. It also doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- engine(impl Into<String>) / set_engine(Option<String>):
 The database engine to use for the new instance.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
 
 Default: The same as source
 
 Constraint: Must be compatible with the engine of the source
 
 Valid Values:
 - mariadb
 - mysql
 - oracle-ee
 - oracle-ee-cdb
 - oracle-se2
 - oracle-se2-cdb
 - postgres
 - sqlserver-ee
 - sqlserver-se
 - sqlserver-ex
 - sqlserver-web
- iops(i32) / set_iops(Option<i32>):
 The amount of Provisioned IOPS (input/output operations per second) to be initially allocated for the DB instance.
 
 Constraints: Must be an integer greater than 1000.
 
 SQL Server
 
 Setting the IOPS value for the SQL Server database engine isn’t supported.
- option_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_option_group_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the option group to be used for the restored DB instance.
 
 Permanent options, such as the TDE option for Oracle Advanced Security TDE, can’t be removed from an option group, and that option group can’t be removed from a DB instance after it is associated with a DB instance
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- copy_tags_to_snapshot(bool) / set_copy_tags_to_snapshot(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether to copy all tags from the restored DB instance to snapshots of the DB instance. By default, tags are not copied.
- tags(Vec<Tag>) / set_tags(Option<Vec<Tag>>):
 A list of tags. For more information, see Tagging Amazon RDS Resources in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
- storage_type(impl Into<String>) / set_storage_type(Option<String>):
 Specifies the storage type to be associated with the DB instance.
 
 Valid values: standard | gp2 | io1
 
 If you specify io1, you must also include a value for the Iops parameter.
 
 Default: io1 if the Iops parameter is specified, otherwise gp2
- tde_credential_arn(impl Into<String>) / set_tde_credential_arn(Option<String>):
 The ARN from the key store with which to associate the instance for TDE encryption.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- tde_credential_password(impl Into<String>) / set_tde_credential_password(Option<String>):
 The password for the given ARN from the key store in order to access the device.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- vpc_security_group_ids(Vec<String>) / set_vpc_security_group_ids(Option<Vec<String>>):
 A list of EC2 VPC security groups to associate with this DB instance.
 
 Default: The default EC2 VPC security group for the DB subnet group’s VPC.
- domain(impl Into<String>) / set_domain(Option<String>):
 Specify the Active Directory directory ID to restore the DB instance in. Create the domain before running this command. Currently, you can create only the MySQL, Microsoft SQL Server, Oracle, and PostgreSQL DB instances in an Active Directory Domain.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
 
 For more information, see Kerberos Authentication in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
- domain_iam_role_name(impl Into<String>) / set_domain_iam_role_name(Option<String>):
 Specify the name of the IAM role to be used when making API calls to the Directory Service.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- enable_iam_database_authentication(bool) / set_enable_iam_database_authentication(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether to enable mapping of Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) accounts to database accounts. By default, mapping isn’t enabled.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
 
 For more information about IAM database authentication, see IAM Database Authentication for MySQL and PostgreSQL in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
- enable_cloudwatch_logs_exports(Vec<String>) / set_enable_cloudwatch_logs_exports(Option<Vec<String>>):
 The list of logs that the restored DB instance is to export to CloudWatch Logs. The values in the list depend on the DB engine being used. For more information, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- processor_features(Vec<ProcessorFeature>) / set_processor_features(Option<Vec<ProcessorFeature>>):
 The number of CPU cores and the number of threads per core for the DB instance class of the DB instance.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- use_default_processor_features(bool) / set_use_default_processor_features(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether the DB instance class of the DB instance uses its default processor features.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- db_parameter_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_parameter_group_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the DB parameter group to associate with this DB instance.
 
 If you do not specify a value for DBParameterGroupName, then the default DBParameterGroup for the specified DB engine is used.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
 
 Constraints:
 - If supplied, must match the name of an existing DBParameterGroup.
 - Must be 1 to 255 letters, numbers, or hyphens.
 - First character must be a letter.
 - Can’t end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.
- deletion_protection(bool) / set_deletion_protection(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether the DB instance has deletion protection enabled. The database can’t be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. By default, deletion protection isn’t enabled. For more information, see Deleting a DB Instance.
- source_dbi_resource_id(impl Into<String>) / set_source_dbi_resource_id(Option<String>):
 The resource ID of the source DB instance from which to restore.
- max_allocated_storage(i32) / set_max_allocated_storage(Option<i32>):
 The upper limit in gibibytes (GiB) to which Amazon RDS can automatically scale the storage of the DB instance.
 
 For more information about this setting, including limitations that apply to it, see Managing capacity automatically with Amazon RDS storage autoscaling in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- source_db_instance_automated_backups_arn(impl Into<String>) / set_source_db_instance_automated_backups_arn(Option<String>):
 The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the replicated automated backups from which to restore, for example, arn:aws:rds:useast-1:123456789012:auto-backup:ab-L2IJCEXJP7XQ7HOJ4SIEXAMPLE.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
- enable_customer_owned_ip(bool) / set_enable_customer_owned_ip(Option<bool>):
 A value that indicates whether to enable a customer-owned IP address (CoIP) for an RDS on Outposts DB instance.
 
 A CoIP provides local or external connectivity to resources in your Outpost subnets through your on-premises network. For some use cases, a CoIP can provide lower latency for connections to the DB instance from outside of its virtual private cloud (VPC) on your local network.
 
 This setting doesn’t apply to RDS Custom.
 
 For more information about RDS on Outposts, see Working with Amazon RDS on Amazon Web Services Outposts in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 For more information about CoIPs, see Customer-owned IP addresses in the Amazon Web Services Outposts User Guide.
- custom_iam_instance_profile(impl Into<String>) / set_custom_iam_instance_profile(Option<String>):
 The instance profile associated with the underlying Amazon EC2 instance of an RDS Custom DB instance. The instance profile must meet the following requirements:
 - The profile must exist in your account.
 - The profile must have an IAM role that Amazon EC2 has permissions to assume.
 - The instance profile name and the associated IAM role name must start with the prefix AWSRDSCustom.
 For the list of permissions required for the IAM role, see Configure IAM and your VPC in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
 
 This setting is required for RDS Custom.
- backup_target(impl Into<String>) / set_backup_target(Option<String>):
 Specifies where automated backups and manual snapshots are stored for the restored DB instance.
 
 Possible values are outposts (Amazon Web Services Outposts) and region (Amazon Web Services Region). The default is region.
 
 For more information, see Working with Amazon RDS on Amazon Web Services Outposts in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
- network_type(impl Into<String>) / set_network_type(Option<String>):
 The network type of the DB instance.
 
 Valid values:
 - IPV4
 - DUAL
 The network type is determined by the DBSubnetGroup specified for the DB instance. A DBSubnetGroup can support only the IPv4 protocol or the IPv4 and the IPv6 protocols (DUAL).
 
 For more information, see Working with a DB instance in a VPC in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
On success, responds with RestoreDbInstanceToPointInTimeOutput with field(s):
- db_instance(Option<DbInstance>):
 Contains the details of an Amazon RDS DB instance.
 
 This data type is used as a response element in the operations CreateDBInstance, CreateDBInstanceReadReplica, DeleteDBInstance, DescribeDBInstances, ModifyDBInstance, PromoteReadReplica, RebootDBInstance, RestoreDBInstanceFromDBSnapshot, RestoreDBInstanceFromS3, RestoreDBInstanceToPointInTime, StartDBInstance, and StopDBInstance.
On failure, responds with SdkError<RestoreDBInstanceToPointInTimeError>

source

pub fn revoke_db_security_group_ingress(&self) -> RevokeDBSecurityGroupIngress

Constructs a fluent builder for the RevokeDBSecurityGroupIngress operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_security_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_db_security_group_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the DB security group to revoke ingress from.
- cidrip(impl Into<String>) / set_cidrip(Option<String>):
 The IP range to revoke access from. Must be a valid CIDR range. If CIDRIP is specified, EC2SecurityGroupName, EC2SecurityGroupId and EC2SecurityGroupOwnerId can’t be provided.
- ec2_security_group_name(impl Into<String>) / set_ec2_security_group_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the EC2 security group to revoke access from. For VPC DB security groups, EC2SecurityGroupId must be provided. Otherwise, EC2SecurityGroupOwnerId and either EC2SecurityGroupName or EC2SecurityGroupId must be provided.
- ec2_security_group_id(impl Into<String>) / set_ec2_security_group_id(Option<String>):
 The id of the EC2 security group to revoke access from. For VPC DB security groups, EC2SecurityGroupId must be provided. Otherwise, EC2SecurityGroupOwnerId and either EC2SecurityGroupName or EC2SecurityGroupId must be provided.
- ec2_security_group_owner_id(impl Into<String>) / set_ec2_security_group_owner_id(Option<String>):
 The Amazon Web Services account number of the owner of the EC2 security group specified in the EC2SecurityGroupName parameter. The Amazon Web Services access key ID isn’t an acceptable value. For VPC DB security groups, EC2SecurityGroupId must be provided. Otherwise, EC2SecurityGroupOwnerId and either EC2SecurityGroupName or EC2SecurityGroupId must be provided.
On success, responds with RevokeDbSecurityGroupIngressOutput with field(s):
- db_security_group(Option<DbSecurityGroup>):
 Contains the details for an Amazon RDS DB security group.
 
 This data type is used as a response element in the DescribeDBSecurityGroups action.
On failure, responds with SdkError<RevokeDBSecurityGroupIngressError>

source

pub fn start_activity_stream(&self) -> StartActivityStream

Constructs a fluent builder for the StartActivityStream operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- resource_arn(impl Into<String>) / set_resource_arn(Option<String>):
 The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the DB cluster, for example, arn:aws:rds:us-east-1:12345667890:cluster:das-cluster.
- mode(ActivityStreamMode) / set_mode(Option<ActivityStreamMode>):
 Specifies the mode of the database activity stream. Database events such as a change or access generate an activity stream event. The database session can handle these events either synchronously or asynchronously.
- kms_key_id(impl Into<String>) / set_kms_key_id(Option<String>):
 The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for encrypting messages in the database activity stream. The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key.
- apply_immediately(bool) / set_apply_immediately(Option<bool>):
 Specifies whether or not the database activity stream is to start as soon as possible, regardless of the maintenance window for the database.
- engine_native_audit_fields_included(bool) / set_engine_native_audit_fields_included(Option<bool>):
 Specifies whether the database activity stream includes engine-native audit fields. This option only applies to an Oracle DB instance. By default, no engine-native audit fields are included.
On success, responds with StartActivityStreamOutput with field(s):
- kms_key_id(Option<String>):
 The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for encryption of messages in the database activity stream.
- kinesis_stream_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the Amazon Kinesis data stream to be used for the database activity stream.
- status(Option<ActivityStreamStatus>):
 The status of the database activity stream.
- mode(Option<ActivityStreamMode>):
 The mode of the database activity stream.
- apply_immediately(bool):
 Indicates whether or not the database activity stream will start as soon as possible, regardless of the maintenance window for the database.
- engine_native_audit_fields_included(Option<bool>):
 Indicates whether engine-native audit fields are included in the database activity stream.
On failure, responds with SdkError<StartActivityStreamError>

source

pub fn start_db_cluster(&self) -> StartDBCluster

Constructs a fluent builder for the StartDBCluster operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>):
 The DB cluster identifier of the Amazon Aurora DB cluster to be started. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.
On success, responds with StartDbClusterOutput with field(s):
- db_cluster(Option<DbCluster>):
 Contains the details of an Amazon Aurora DB cluster or Multi-AZ DB cluster.
 
 For an Amazon Aurora DB cluster, this data type is used as a response element in the operations CreateDBCluster, DeleteDBCluster, DescribeDBClusters, FailoverDBCluster, ModifyDBCluster, PromoteReadReplicaDBCluster, RestoreDBClusterFromS3, RestoreDBClusterFromSnapshot, RestoreDBClusterToPointInTime, StartDBCluster, and StopDBCluster.
 
 For a Multi-AZ DB cluster, this data type is used as a response element in the operations CreateDBCluster, DeleteDBCluster, DescribeDBClusters, FailoverDBCluster, ModifyDBCluster, RebootDBCluster, RestoreDBClusterFromSnapshot, and RestoreDBClusterToPointInTime.
 
 For more information on Amazon Aurora DB clusters, see What is Amazon Aurora? in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
 
 For more information on Multi-AZ DB clusters, see Multi-AZ deployments with two readable standby DB instances in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
On failure, responds with SdkError<StartDBClusterError>

source

pub fn start_db_instance(&self) -> StartDBInstance

Constructs a fluent builder for the StartDBInstance operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_instance_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_instance_identifier(Option<String>):
 The user-supplied instance identifier.
On success, responds with StartDbInstanceOutput with field(s):
- db_instance(Option<DbInstance>):
 Contains the details of an Amazon RDS DB instance.
 
 This data type is used as a response element in the operations CreateDBInstance, CreateDBInstanceReadReplica, DeleteDBInstance, DescribeDBInstances, ModifyDBInstance, PromoteReadReplica, RebootDBInstance, RestoreDBInstanceFromDBSnapshot, RestoreDBInstanceFromS3, RestoreDBInstanceToPointInTime, StartDBInstance, and StopDBInstance.
On failure, responds with SdkError<StartDBInstanceError>

source

pub fn start_db_instance_automated_backups_replication(
&self
) -> StartDBInstanceAutomatedBackupsReplication

Constructs a fluent builder for the StartDBInstanceAutomatedBackupsReplication operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- source_db_instance_arn(impl Into<String>) / set_source_db_instance_arn(Option<String>):
 The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the source DB instance for the replicated automated backups, for example, arn:aws:rds:us-west-2:123456789012:db:mydatabase.
- backup_retention_period(i32) / set_backup_retention_period(Option<i32>):
 The retention period for the replicated automated backups.
- kms_key_id(impl Into<String>) / set_kms_key_id(Option<String>):
 The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for encryption of the replicated automated backups. The KMS key ID is the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the KMS encryption key in the destination Amazon Web Services Region, for example, arn:aws:kms:us-east-1:123456789012:key/AKIAIOSFODNN7EXAMPLE.
- pre_signed_url(impl Into<String>) / set_pre_signed_url(Option<String>):
 In an Amazon Web Services GovCloud (US) Region, an URL that contains a Signature Version 4 signed request for the StartDBInstanceAutomatedBackupsReplication operation to call in the Amazon Web Services Region of the source DB instance. The presigned URL must be a valid request for the StartDBInstanceAutomatedBackupsReplication API operation that can run in the Amazon Web Services Region that contains the source DB instance.
 
 This setting applies only to Amazon Web Services GovCloud (US) Regions. It’s ignored in other Amazon Web Services Regions.
 
 To learn how to generate a Signature Version 4 signed request, see Authenticating Requests: Using Query Parameters (Amazon Web Services Signature Version 4) and Signature Version 4 Signing Process.
 
 If you are using an Amazon Web Services SDK tool or the CLI, you can specify SourceRegion (or –source-region for the CLI) instead of specifying PreSignedUrl manually. Specifying SourceRegion autogenerates a presigned URL that is a valid request for the operation that can run in the source Amazon Web Services Region.
On success, responds with StartDbInstanceAutomatedBackupsReplicationOutput with field(s):
- db_instance_automated_backup(Option<DbInstanceAutomatedBackup>):
 An automated backup of a DB instance. It consists of system backups, transaction logs, and the database instance properties that existed at the time you deleted the source instance.
On failure, responds with SdkError<StartDBInstanceAutomatedBackupsReplicationError>

source

pub fn start_export_task(&self) -> StartExportTask

Constructs a fluent builder for the StartExportTask operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- export_task_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_export_task_identifier(Option<String>):
 A unique identifier for the snapshot export task. This ID isn’t an identifier for the Amazon S3 bucket where the snapshot is to be exported to.
- source_arn(impl Into<String>) / set_source_arn(Option<String>):
 The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the snapshot to export to Amazon S3.
- s3_bucket_name(impl Into<String>) / set_s3_bucket_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the Amazon S3 bucket to export the snapshot to.
- iam_role_arn(impl Into<String>) / set_iam_role_arn(Option<String>):
 The name of the IAM role to use for writing to the Amazon S3 bucket when exporting a snapshot.
- kms_key_id(impl Into<String>) / set_kms_key_id(Option<String>):
 The ID of the Amazon Web Services KMS key to use to encrypt the snapshot exported to Amazon S3. The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. The caller of this operation must be authorized to execute the following operations. These can be set in the Amazon Web Services KMS key policy:
 - GrantOperation.Encrypt
 - GrantOperation.Decrypt
 - GrantOperation.GenerateDataKey
 - GrantOperation.GenerateDataKeyWithoutPlaintext
 - GrantOperation.ReEncryptFrom
 - GrantOperation.ReEncryptTo
 - GrantOperation.CreateGrant
 - GrantOperation.DescribeKey
 - GrantOperation.RetireGrant
- s3_prefix(impl Into<String>) / set_s3_prefix(Option<String>):
 The Amazon S3 bucket prefix to use as the file name and path of the exported snapshot.
- export_only(Vec<String>) / set_export_only(Option<Vec<String>>):
 The data to be exported from the snapshot. If this parameter is not provided, all the snapshot data is exported. Valid values are the following:
 - database - Export all the data from a specified database.
 - database.table table-name - Export a table of the snapshot. This format is valid only for RDS for MySQL, RDS for MariaDB, and Aurora MySQL.
 - database.schema schema-name - Export a database schema of the snapshot. This format is valid only for RDS for PostgreSQL and Aurora PostgreSQL.
 - database.schema.table table-name - Export a table of the database schema. This format is valid only for RDS for PostgreSQL and Aurora PostgreSQL.
On success, responds with StartExportTaskOutput with field(s):
- export_task_identifier(Option<String>):
 A unique identifier for the snapshot export task. This ID isn’t an identifier for the Amazon S3 bucket where the snapshot is exported to.
- source_arn(Option<String>):
 The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the snapshot exported to Amazon S3.
- export_only(Option<Vec<String>>):
 The data exported from the snapshot. Valid values are the following:
 - database - Export all the data from a specified database.
 - database.table table-name - Export a table of the snapshot. This format is valid only for RDS for MySQL, RDS for MariaDB, and Aurora MySQL.
 - database.schema schema-name - Export a database schema of the snapshot. This format is valid only for RDS for PostgreSQL and Aurora PostgreSQL.
 - database.schema.table table-name - Export a table of the database schema. This format is valid only for RDS for PostgreSQL and Aurora PostgreSQL.
- snapshot_time(Option<DateTime>):
 The time that the snapshot was created.
- task_start_time(Option<DateTime>):
 The time that the snapshot export task started.
- task_end_time(Option<DateTime>):
 The time that the snapshot export task completed.
- s3_bucket(Option<String>):
 The Amazon S3 bucket that the snapshot is exported to.
- s3_prefix(Option<String>):
 The Amazon S3 bucket prefix that is the file name and path of the exported snapshot.
- iam_role_arn(Option<String>):
 The name of the IAM role that is used to write to Amazon S3 when exporting a snapshot.
- kms_key_id(Option<String>):
 The key identifier of the Amazon Web Services KMS key that is used to encrypt the snapshot when it’s exported to Amazon S3. The KMS key identifier is its key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name. The IAM role used for the snapshot export must have encryption and decryption permissions to use this KMS key.
- status(Option<String>):
 The progress status of the export task.
- percent_progress(i32):
 The progress of the snapshot export task as a percentage.
- total_extracted_data_in_gb(i32):
 The total amount of data exported, in gigabytes.
- failure_cause(Option<String>):
 The reason the export failed, if it failed.
- warning_message(Option<String>):
 A warning about the snapshot export task.
On failure, responds with SdkError<StartExportTaskError>

source

pub fn stop_activity_stream(&self) -> StopActivityStream

Constructs a fluent builder for the StopActivityStream operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- resource_arn(impl Into<String>) / set_resource_arn(Option<String>):
 The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the DB cluster for the database activity stream. For example, arn:aws:rds:us-east-1:12345667890:cluster:das-cluster.
- apply_immediately(bool) / set_apply_immediately(Option<bool>):
 Specifies whether or not the database activity stream is to stop as soon as possible, regardless of the maintenance window for the database.
On success, responds with StopActivityStreamOutput with field(s):
- kms_key_id(Option<String>):
 The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier used for encrypting messages in the database activity stream.
 
 The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key.
- kinesis_stream_name(Option<String>):
 The name of the Amazon Kinesis data stream used for the database activity stream.
- status(Option<ActivityStreamStatus>):
 The status of the database activity stream.
On failure, responds with SdkError<StopActivityStreamError>

source

pub fn stop_db_cluster(&self) -> StopDBCluster

Constructs a fluent builder for the StopDBCluster operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_cluster_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_cluster_identifier(Option<String>):
 The DB cluster identifier of the Amazon Aurora DB cluster to be stopped. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.
On success, responds with StopDbClusterOutput with field(s):
- db_cluster(Option<DbCluster>):
 Contains the details of an Amazon Aurora DB cluster or Multi-AZ DB cluster.
 
 For an Amazon Aurora DB cluster, this data type is used as a response element in the operations CreateDBCluster, DeleteDBCluster, DescribeDBClusters, FailoverDBCluster, ModifyDBCluster, PromoteReadReplicaDBCluster, RestoreDBClusterFromS3, RestoreDBClusterFromSnapshot, RestoreDBClusterToPointInTime, StartDBCluster, and StopDBCluster.
 
 For a Multi-AZ DB cluster, this data type is used as a response element in the operations CreateDBCluster, DeleteDBCluster, DescribeDBClusters, FailoverDBCluster, ModifyDBCluster, RebootDBCluster, RestoreDBClusterFromSnapshot, and RestoreDBClusterToPointInTime.
 
 For more information on Amazon Aurora DB clusters, see What is Amazon Aurora? in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
 
 For more information on Multi-AZ DB clusters, see Multi-AZ deployments with two readable standby DB instances in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
On failure, responds with SdkError<StopDBClusterError>

source

pub fn stop_db_instance(&self) -> StopDBInstance

Constructs a fluent builder for the StopDBInstance operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_instance_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_instance_identifier(Option<String>):
 The user-supplied instance identifier.
- db_snapshot_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_snapshot_identifier(Option<String>):
 The user-supplied instance identifier of the DB Snapshot created immediately before the DB instance is stopped.
On success, responds with StopDbInstanceOutput with field(s):
- db_instance(Option<DbInstance>):
 Contains the details of an Amazon RDS DB instance.
 
 This data type is used as a response element in the operations CreateDBInstance, CreateDBInstanceReadReplica, DeleteDBInstance, DescribeDBInstances, ModifyDBInstance, PromoteReadReplica, RebootDBInstance, RestoreDBInstanceFromDBSnapshot, RestoreDBInstanceFromS3, RestoreDBInstanceToPointInTime, StartDBInstance, and StopDBInstance.
On failure, responds with SdkError<StopDBInstanceError>

source

pub fn stop_db_instance_automated_backups_replication(
&self
) -> StopDBInstanceAutomatedBackupsReplication

Constructs a fluent builder for the StopDBInstanceAutomatedBackupsReplication operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- source_db_instance_arn(impl Into<String>) / set_source_db_instance_arn(Option<String>):
 The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the source DB instance for which to stop replicating automated backups, for example, arn:aws:rds:us-west-2:123456789012:db:mydatabase.
On success, responds with StopDbInstanceAutomatedBackupsReplicationOutput with field(s):
- db_instance_automated_backup(Option<DbInstanceAutomatedBackup>):
 An automated backup of a DB instance. It consists of system backups, transaction logs, and the database instance properties that existed at the time you deleted the source instance.
On failure, responds with SdkError<StopDBInstanceAutomatedBackupsReplicationError>

source

pub fn switchover_read_replica(&self) -> SwitchoverReadReplica

Constructs a fluent builder for the SwitchoverReadReplica operation.

The fluent builder is configurable:
- db_instance_identifier(impl Into<String>) / set_db_instance_identifier(Option<String>):
 The DB instance identifier of the current standby database. This value is stored as a lowercase string.
 
 Constraints:
 - Must match the identiﬁer of an existing Oracle read replica DB instance.
On success, responds with SwitchoverReadReplicaOutput with field(s):
- db_instance(Option<DbInstance>):
 Contains the details of an Amazon RDS DB instance.
 
 This data type is used as a response element in the operations CreateDBInstance, CreateDBInstanceReadReplica, DeleteDBInstance, DescribeDBInstances, ModifyDBInstance, PromoteReadReplica, RebootDBInstance, RestoreDBInstanceFromDBSnapshot, RestoreDBInstanceFromS3, RestoreDBInstanceToPointInTime, StartDBInstance, and StopDBInstance.
On failure, responds with SdkError<SwitchoverReadReplicaError>

source

impl Client

source

pub fn from_conf_conn<C, E>(conf: Config, conn: C) -> Self where
C: SmithyConnector<Error = E> + Send + 'static,
E: Into<ConnectorError>,

Creates a client with the given service config and connector override.

source

pub fn new(sdk_config: &SdkConfig) -> Self

Creates a new client from a shared config.

source

pub fn from_conf(conf: Config) -> Self

Creates a new client from the service Config.

Trait Implementations

source

impl Clone for Client

source

fn clone(&self) -> Self

Returns a copy of the value. Read more

1.0.0 · source

fn clone_from(&mut self, source: &Self)

Performs copy-assignment from source. Read more

source

impl Debug for Client

source

fn fmt(&self, f: &mut Formatter<'_>) -> Result

Formats the value using the given formatter. Read more

source

impl From<Client<DynConnector, DynMiddleware<DynConnector>, Standard>> for Client

source

fn from(client: Client<DynConnector, DynMiddleware<DynConnector>>) -> Self

Converts to this type from the input type.

Auto Trait Implementations

impl !RefUnwindSafe for Client

impl Send for Client

impl Sync for Client

impl Unpin for Client

impl !UnwindSafe for Client

Blanket Implementations

source

impl<T> Any for T where
T: 'static + ?Sized,

source

fn type_id(&self) -> TypeId

Gets the TypeId of self. Read more

source

impl<T> Borrow<T> for T where
T: ?Sized,

const: unstable · source

fn borrow(&self) -> &T

Immutably borrows from an owned value. Read more

source

impl<T> BorrowMut<T> for T where
T: ?Sized,

const: unstable · source

fn borrow_mut(&mut self) -> &mut T

Mutably borrows from an owned value. Read more

source

impl<T> From<T> for T

const: unstable · source

fn from(t: T) -> T

Returns the argument unchanged.

source

impl<T> Instrument for T

source

fn instrument(self, span: Span) -> Instrumented<Self>

Instruments this type with the provided Span, returning an Instrumented wrapper. Read more

source

fn in_current_span(self) -> Instrumented<Self>

Instruments this type with the current Span, returning an Instrumented wrapper. Read more

source

impl<T, U> Into for T where
U: From<T>,

const: unstable · source

fn into(self) -> U

Calls U::from(self).

That is, this conversion is whatever the implementation of From<T> for U chooses to do.

source

impl<T> ToOwned for T where
T: Clone,

type Owned = T

The resulting type after obtaining ownership.

source

fn to_owned(&self) -> T

Creates owned data from borrowed data, usually by cloning. Read more

source

fn clone_into(&self, target: &mut T)

Uses borrowed data to replace owned data, usually by cloning. Read more

source

impl<T, U> TryFrom for T where
U: Into<T>,

type Error = Infallible

The type returned in the event of a conversion error.

const: unstable · source

fn try_from(value: U) -> Result<T, <T as TryFrom>::Error>

Performs the conversion.

source

impl<T, U> TryInto for T where
U: TryFrom<T>,

type Error = >::Error

The type returned in the event of a conversion error.

const: unstable · source

fn try_into(self) -> Result<U, >::Error>

Performs the conversion.

source

impl<T> WithSubscriber for T

source

fn with_subscriber<S>(self, subscriber: S) -> WithDispatch<Self> where
S: Into<Dispatch>,

Attaches the provided Subscriber to this type, returning a WithDispatch wrapper. Read more

source

fn with_current_subscriber(self) -> WithDispatch<Self>

Attaches the current default Subscriber to this type, returning a WithDispatch wrapper. Read more

Struct aws_sdk_rds::Client

Examples

Implementations

impl Client

pub fn with_config( client: Client<DynConnector, DynMiddleware<DynConnector>>, conf: Config) -> Self

pub fn conf(&self) -> &Config

impl Client

pub fn add_role_to_db_cluster(&self) -> AddRoleToDBCluster

pub fn add_role_to_db_instance(&self) -> AddRoleToDBInstance

pub fn add_source_identifier_to_subscription( &self) -> AddSourceIdentifierToSubscription

pub fn add_tags_to_resource(&self) -> AddTagsToResource

pub fn apply_pending_maintenance_action(&self) -> ApplyPendingMaintenanceAction

pub fn authorize_db_security_group_ingress( &self) -> AuthorizeDBSecurityGroupIngress

pub fn backtrack_db_cluster(&self) -> BacktrackDBCluster

pub fn cancel_export_task(&self) -> CancelExportTask

pub fn copy_db_cluster_parameter_group(&self) -> CopyDBClusterParameterGroup

pub fn copy_db_cluster_snapshot(&self) -> CopyDBClusterSnapshot

pub fn copy_db_parameter_group(&self) -> CopyDBParameterGroup

pub fn copy_db_snapshot(&self) -> CopyDBSnapshot

pub fn copy_option_group(&self) -> CopyOptionGroup

pub fn create_custom_db_engine_version(&self) -> CreateCustomDBEngineVersion

pub fn create_db_cluster(&self) -> CreateDBCluster

pub fn create_db_cluster_endpoint(&self) -> CreateDBClusterEndpoint

pub fn create_db_cluster_parameter_group(&self) -> CreateDBClusterParameterGroup

pub fn create_db_cluster_snapshot(&self) -> CreateDBClusterSnapshot

pub fn create_db_instance(&self) -> CreateDBInstance

pub fn create_db_instance_read_replica(&self) -> CreateDBInstanceReadReplica

pub fn create_db_parameter_group(&self) -> CreateDBParameterGroup

pub fn create_db_proxy(&self) -> CreateDBProxy

pub fn create_db_proxy_endpoint(&self) -> CreateDBProxyEndpoint

pub fn create_db_security_group(&self) -> CreateDBSecurityGroup

pub fn create_db_snapshot(&self) -> CreateDBSnapshot

pub fn create_db_subnet_group(&self) -> CreateDBSubnetGroup

pub fn create_event_subscription(&self) -> CreateEventSubscription

pub fn create_global_cluster(&self) -> CreateGlobalCluster

pub fn create_option_group(&self) -> CreateOptionGroup

pub fn delete_custom_db_engine_version(&self) -> DeleteCustomDBEngineVersion

pub fn delete_db_cluster(&self) -> DeleteDBCluster

pub fn delete_db_cluster_endpoint(&self) -> DeleteDBClusterEndpoint

pub fn delete_db_cluster_parameter_group(&self) -> DeleteDBClusterParameterGroup

pub fn delete_db_cluster_snapshot(&self) -> DeleteDBClusterSnapshot

pub fn delete_db_instance(&self) -> DeleteDBInstance

pub fn delete_db_instance_automated_backup( &self) -> DeleteDBInstanceAutomatedBackup

pub fn delete_db_parameter_group(&self) -> DeleteDBParameterGroup

pub fn delete_db_proxy(&self) -> DeleteDBProxy

pub fn delete_db_proxy_endpoint(&self) -> DeleteDBProxyEndpoint

pub fn delete_db_security_group(&self) -> DeleteDBSecurityGroup

pub fn delete_db_snapshot(&self) -> DeleteDBSnapshot

pub fn delete_db_subnet_group(&self) -> DeleteDBSubnetGroup

pub fn delete_event_subscription(&self) -> DeleteEventSubscription

pub fn delete_global_cluster(&self) -> DeleteGlobalCluster

pub fn delete_option_group(&self) -> DeleteOptionGroup

pub fn deregister_db_proxy_targets(&self) -> DeregisterDBProxyTargets

pub fn describe_account_attributes(&self) -> DescribeAccountAttributes

pub fn describe_certificates(&self) -> DescribeCertificates

pub fn describe_db_cluster_backtracks(&self) -> DescribeDBClusterBacktracks

pub fn describe_db_cluster_endpoints(&self) -> DescribeDBClusterEndpoints

pub fn describe_db_cluster_parameter_groups( &self) -> DescribeDBClusterParameterGroups

pub fn describe_db_cluster_parameters(&self) -> DescribeDBClusterParameters

pub fn describe_db_clusters(&self) -> DescribeDBClusters

pub fn describe_db_cluster_snapshot_attributes( &self) -> DescribeDBClusterSnapshotAttributes

pub fn describe_db_cluster_snapshots(&self) -> DescribeDBClusterSnapshots

pub fn describe_db_engine_versions(&self) -> DescribeDBEngineVersions

pub fn describe_db_instance_automated_backups( &self) -> DescribeDBInstanceAutomatedBackups

pub fn describe_db_instances(&self) -> DescribeDBInstances

pub fn describe_db_log_files(&self) -> DescribeDBLogFiles

pub fn describe_db_parameter_groups(&self) -> DescribeDBParameterGroups

pub fn describe_db_parameters(&self) -> DescribeDBParameters

pub fn describe_db_proxies(&self) -> DescribeDBProxies

pub fn describe_db_proxy_endpoints(&self) -> DescribeDBProxyEndpoints

pub fn describe_db_proxy_target_groups(&self) -> DescribeDBProxyTargetGroups

pub fn describe_db_proxy_targets(&self) -> DescribeDBProxyTargets

pub fn describe_db_security_groups(&self) -> DescribeDBSecurityGroups

pub fn describe_db_snapshot_attributes(&self) -> DescribeDBSnapshotAttributes

pub fn describe_db_snapshots(&self) -> DescribeDBSnapshots

pub fn describe_db_subnet_groups(&self) -> DescribeDBSubnetGroups

pub fn describe_engine_default_cluster_parameters( &self) -> DescribeEngineDefaultClusterParameters

pub fn describe_engine_default_parameters( &self) -> DescribeEngineDefaultParameters

pub fn describe_event_categories(&self) -> DescribeEventCategories

pub fn describe_events(&self) -> DescribeEvents

pub fn with_config(
client: Client<DynConnector, DynMiddleware<DynConnector>>,
conf: Config
) -> Self

pub fn add_source_identifier_to_subscription(
&self
) -> AddSourceIdentifierToSubscription

pub fn authorize_db_security_group_ingress(
&self
) -> AuthorizeDBSecurityGroupIngress

pub fn delete_db_instance_automated_backup(
&self
) -> DeleteDBInstanceAutomatedBackup

pub fn describe_db_cluster_parameter_groups(
&self
) -> DescribeDBClusterParameterGroups

pub fn describe_db_cluster_snapshot_attributes(
&self
) -> DescribeDBClusterSnapshotAttributes

pub fn describe_db_instance_automated_backups(
&self
) -> DescribeDBInstanceAutomatedBackups

pub fn describe_engine_default_cluster_parameters(
&self
) -> DescribeEngineDefaultClusterParameters

pub fn describe_engine_default_parameters(
&self
) -> DescribeEngineDefaultParameters

pub fn describe_orderable_db_instance_options(
&self
) -> DescribeOrderableDBInstanceOptions

pub fn describe_pending_maintenance_actions(
&self
) -> DescribePendingMaintenanceActions

pub fn describe_reserved_db_instances_offerings(
&self
) -> DescribeReservedDBInstancesOfferings

pub fn describe_valid_db_instance_modifications(
&self
) -> DescribeValidDBInstanceModifications

pub fn modify_current_db_cluster_capacity(
&self
) -> ModifyCurrentDBClusterCapacity

pub fn modify_db_cluster_snapshot_attribute(
&self
) -> ModifyDBClusterSnapshotAttribute

pub fn purchase_reserved_db_instances_offering(
&self
) -> PurchaseReservedDBInstancesOffering

pub fn remove_source_identifier_from_subscription(
&self
) -> RemoveSourceIdentifierFromSubscription

pub fn restore_db_cluster_to_point_in_time(
&self
) -> RestoreDBClusterToPointInTime

pub fn restore_db_instance_from_db_snapshot(
&self
) -> RestoreDBInstanceFromDBSnapshot

pub fn restore_db_instance_to_point_in_time(
&self
) -> RestoreDBInstanceToPointInTime

pub fn start_db_instance_automated_backups_replication(
&self
) -> StartDBInstanceAutomatedBackupsReplication

pub fn stop_db_instance_automated_backups_replication(
&self
) -> StopDBInstanceAutomatedBackupsReplication